3mE Keuzevakken 2010 En

7/22/2019 3mE Keuzevakken 2010 En

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3me-keuzevakken-2010-en 1/186

Program overview04-Sep-2013 10:53

Year 2010/2011

Organization Mechanical, Maritime and Materials Engineering

Education 3mE Keuzevakken

Code Omschrijving ECTS p1 p2 p3 p4 p5

3mE Keuzevakken 2010 3mE Electives 2010BM1100 Orthopaedic Implants and Technology 3BM1210 Medical Instruments A: Clinical Challenges and Engineering Solutions 3

ME1100 Automotive Crash Safety; Active & Passive Safety Systems 3

ME1110 Medical Device Prototyping 6ME1120 Space Robotics 4ME1400 Sustainability in Transportation Engineering 3ME1590CH Separation Processes, Design & Operation 6

ME1591CH Thermodynamics for Designers 3

ME1592CH Process Intensification 6ME1600 Reliability and Uncertainty Models in Engineering Mechanics 2ME1610-10 Tissue Biomechanics of Bone, Cartilage and Tendon 4

ME1615 Micro-Assembly, Packaging and Test 3MS3011 Semiconductor Principles and Devices 3

MS3021 Metals Science 4MS3031 Computational Materials Science 4MS3221 History of Materials Production and Usage 3MS3252 Materials Degradation and Countermeasures 3

MS3401 Primary Metals Production 3

MS3412 Processing of Metals 4MS3421 Developments in Production and Processing 2MS3432 Determination of Microstructure 4MS3442 Relation between Properties and Microstructure 4

MS3452 Total Performance Approach: Case Studies 3

MS3461 Corrosion and Protection against Corrosion 3MS3471 Modern Analysis Techniques & Authenticity Research 4MS4011 Mechanical Properties 3

MS4021 Structure Characterisation 5MS4031 Waves 3

MS4041 Structure of Materials 5MS4051 Physics of Materials 6MS4061 Thermodynamics and Kinetics 4MS4071 Materials in Art and Design 3

MS4081 Mechanics of Materials 4

MS4091 Material Connections 4MS4101 From Ore to Plate: Production of Materials 3MS4111 Thin Film Materials 3MS4121 Practicals Materials Science 4

MS4131NS Solid State Physics 2 3

MS4141TU Fracture Mechanics 3MS4151 Recycling Engineering Materials 3MS4161 Engineering with Materials 10

MS4171 Lifetime Performance of Materials 3MS4181 New Trends in Materials 3

MS4191 Materials for Conventional Energy Production 2MS4201 Art History and Archaeology 4MS4211 Materials at High Temperature 3MS4221 Materials for the Hydrogen Economy 2

MS4232-09 Biomaterials 6

MT113 Design of Advanced Marine Vehicles 3MT1401 Law for MT 3MT213 Marine Engineering C 2MT216 Introduction Combustion Engines 3

MT218 Mechatronics in MT 5

MT313 Shipping Management 3MT514 Ship Movements and Steering 3 3MT515 Resistance and Propulsion 3 3

MT523 Numerical Methods for MT 4MT524 Hydromechanics of Special Ship Types 3

MT525 Marine Propulsion Systems 2MT724 Shipfinance 3MT725 Inland Shipping 2MT727 Shipyard Process, Simulation and Strategy 4

3

of 186



MT728 SalvageMT729 Maritime Business Game 3MT815 Construction and Strength, Special Subjects 2MT816 Composit Materials 2MT830 Applications of the Finite Element Method 3

MT835 Hydro Elasticity 3

OE4601 Survey of Offshore Engineering Lectures 3OE4603 Introduction to Offshore Structures 3OE4610 Survey of Offshore Engineering Projects 8OE4623 Drive System Design Principles 3

OE4624 Offshore Soil Mechanics 3

OE4625 Dredge Pumps and Slurry Transport 4OE4626 Dredging Processes 4OE4630 Offshore Hydromechanics 8

OE4630 D1 Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 1 1,5

OE4630 D2 Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 2 2


OE4630 D4 Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 4 1,5

OE4651 Bottom Founded Structures 6OE4652 Floating Structures 4

OE4653 Marine Pipelines 4

OE4654 Sub Sea Engineering 4OE5662 Offshore Wind Farm Design 4OE5663 Dynamic Positioning 3OE5664 Offshore Moorings 3

OE5665 Offshore Wind Support Structures 3

OE5670-11 Integrating Exercise 11OE5671 Dredging Equipment Design 4OE5672 Dredging Laboratory 4SC4010 Introduction Project SC 3

SC4025 Control Theory 6

SC4026 Control System Design 3SC4032 Physical Modelling for Systems and Control 4SC4040 Filtering & Identification 6SC4050 Integration Project SC 5

SC4060 Model Predictive Control 4

SC4070 Control Systems Lab 4SC4081-10 Knowledge Based Control Systems 4

SC4081-10 D1 Knowledge Based Control Systems, Exam 3

SC4081-10 D2 Knowledge Based Control Systems, Literature 0,5

SC4081-10 D3 Knowledge Based Control Systems, Matlab0,5

SC4091 Optimization in Systems and Control 4SC4110 System Identification 5SC4120 Special Topics in Signals, Systems & Control 3SC4150 Fuzzy Logic and Engineering Applications 3

SC4160 Modeling and Control of Hybrid Systems 3

SC4170AP Inverse Problems & Statistical Signal Processing 3SC4180ES Modeling and Control 6SC4190CH Process Dynamics and Control 6SC4210 Vehicle Mechatronics 4

WB1310 Multibody Dynamics A 3

WB1405A Stability of Thin-Walled Structures 1 4WB1406-07 Experimental Dynamics 3WB1408A Shell Structures - Introductory Course 3WB1408B Shell Structures - Advanced Course 5

WB1409 Theory of Elasticity 3WB1412 Linear & Non-lineair Vibrations in Mechanical Systems 3WB1413-04 Multibody Dynamics B 4WB1416 Numerical Methods for Dynamics 3WB1417-05 Fluid-Structures Interaction 4

WB1418-07 Engineering Dynamics 4

WB1422ATU Advanced Fluid Dynamics A 6WB1424BTU Race Car Aerodynamics 3WB1427-03 Advanced Fluid Dynamics A 5WB1428-3 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3

WB1429-03 Microfluidics 3

WB1433-04 Thermomechanical Modelling & Charact.of Polymers 3WB1440 Eng. Optimization: Concept & Applications 3WB1441 Engineering Optimization 2 3WB1443 Matlab in Engineering Mechanics 2

WB1444-07 Advanced Micro Electronic Packaging 3WB1445-05 Mechanics of Micro Electronics and Microsystems 3WB1450-05 Mechanical Analysis for Engineering 4WB1451-05 Engineering Mechanics Fundamentals 4WB1481LR Dynamics and Control Space Systems 4

WB2301-5 System Identification and Parameter Estimation 7

WB2303-10 Measurement in Engineering 3

of 186



WB2305 Digital Control 3

WB2306 The Human Controller 3WB2308 Biomedical Engineering Design 4WB2404 Man-machine systems 4WB2408 Physiological Systems 3

WB2414-09 Mechatronic System Design 4

WB2415 Robust Control 6WB2421 Multivariable Control Systems 6WB2427 Predictive Modelling 3WB2428-03 Mechanical Design in Mechatronics 5

WB2432 Bio Mechatronics 4

WB2433-03 Humanoid Robots 3WB2436-05 Bio-Inspired Design 3WB2454-07 Multiphysics Modelling using COMSOL 4WB2601OE Strenght of Materials 1

WB3404A Vehicle Dynamics A 3

WB3415-03 Adams Course 3WB3416-03 Design with the Finite Element Method 3WB3417-04 Discrete Systems: MPSC 5WB3419-03 Characterization and Handling of Bulk Solid Materials 6

WB3420-03 Introduction Transport Engineering and Logistics 5

WB3421-04 Automation and Control of Transport and Production Systems 6WB3422-03 Design of Transport Equipment 5WB3423-04 The Delft Systems Approach 3WB3424-08 Production Organisation Principles 3

WB3425-04 Production Engineering Practical 5

WB4300B Fundamentals of Fluid Machinery 2WB4302 Energy Conversion 4WB4400-03 World of Process & Energy Technologies 1WB4402 Project Engineering 6

WB4403 Advanced Reaction & Separation Systems 4

WB4405 Fuel Conversion 3WB4408A Diesel Engines A 4WB4408B Diesel Engines B 4WB4410A Refrigeration 3

WB4416 Nuclear Engineering 3

WB4420 Gas Turbines 3WB4421 Gas Turbine Simulation/Application 3WB4422 Thermal Power Plants 4WB4425-09TU Fuel Cell Systems 3

WB4426 Indoor Climate Control Fundamentals3

WB4427 Refrigeration Technology and Applications 4WB4429-03 Thermodynamics for Process & Energy 3WB4431-05 Modeling of Process and Energy Systems 4WB4432-05 Process Dynamics and Control 3

WB4433-05 Conceptual Process Design and Optimization 4

WB4435-05 Equipment for Heat Transfer 3WB4436-05 Equipment for Mass Transfer 3WB4438-05 Technology and Sustainability 3WB5400-08 Mechatronic System Design 2 4

WB5414-08 Design of Machines and Mechanisms 4

WB5430-05 Engineering Informatics 3WB5431-05 Life Cycle Engineering 3WB5435-05 Machine Intelligence 3WB5451-05 Student colloquia and events PME 1

WBP202 Haptic Experiment Design 4

of 186



Year 2010/2011

Organization Mechanical, Maritime and Materials Engineering

Education 3mE Keuzevakken

3mE Keuzevakken 2010

Responsible ProgramEmployee

E.P. van Luik

of 186



BM1100 Orthopaedic Implants and Technology 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. E.R. Valstar

Instructor Dr.ir. R. Happee

Contact Hours / Weekx/x/x/x

0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period Different, to be announced

Course Language English

Course Contents Most people have first hand experience with the limitations and impact of trauma of the musculo-skeletal system: a sprainedankle severely limits your mobility and causes severe pain, but will heal without too many residual complaints.

However, diseases such as osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis - irreversibly destroy joints, and cause severe limitation of thepatients mobility and produce pain. Today, 600 million people worldwide are suffering from the limitations and pain that arecaused by arthritis.

In the end, these affected joints will often be replaced surgically with an artificial joint. Worldwide 1.5 million hips and 750,000knees are replaced with a joint prosthesis annually. After a joint replacement, patients are normally pain free again and gain inmobility. A joint replacement is one of the most rewarding surgical procedures.

Ten years post-operatively, 5 to 10% of these prostheses annually 150.000 cases - have failed and need to be replaced in ademanding revision operation. For total shoulder replacement these numbers are much higher: up to 44% of the implants havefailed at ten years follow-up.

In this course you will learn to analyse, evaluate, and judge joint replacement prostheses with respect to their influence on thehost bone, their function, fixation, and longevity based on the scientific state-of-the art knowledge.

Study Goals Main intended learning outcomeThe student should be able to analyse, evaluate, and judge joint replacement prostheses with respect to their influence on the hostbone, their function, fixation, and longevity based on the scientific state-of-the art knowledge.

Sub intended learning objectivesThe student should be able to:LO1: Describe the function, role and organisation of the main constituents of bone tissue, and explain the bone remodellingprocessLO2: Describe the hip, the knee, and the shoulder from a structural and functional perspective.LO3: Describe the effects of osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis on the human body, understand the problems thatpatients experience.LO4: Analyse, evaluate, and judge the design of orthopaedic implants, based on design rationales, peer-reviewed scientificarticles, and national registers.

Education Method This course will be taught in a number of highly interactive sessions and a mini-symposium. In addition to that, there is a visit tothe Department of Anatomy at Leiden University Medical Center (LUMC) and a one-on-one meeting with an orthopaedicsurgeon from the LUMC.

One of the class sessions is a hands on session in which you are going to place a real prosthesis in an artificial bone. The courseis finished in a mini-symposium in which students will present the results of their assignments and there will be extensivediscussions with the students and a basic researcher and an orthopaedic surgeon.

The class sessions will have a highly interactive nature and will have to be prepared thoroughly by the students. All assignmentsare carried out by groups of three students. For several sessions there will be an assignment that the students need to hand inbefore the session takes place.In a larger assignment, which forms the basis for the presentations and discussions in the mini-symposium, students will focuson different controversies that still exist in orthopaedics.

Course Relations This course partially replaces WB2431 Bone Mechanics & implants which was last given in 2007-2008.Participation in the course ME1610, Bone and Cartilage is recommended but not required.

Assessment You are assessed based on assignments that you hand in. All assignments are carried out by groups of three students. Studentscan pass this course only if all assignments have been handed in on time.

There is no additional examination.

Department 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering

of 186



ME1100 Automotive Crash Safety; Active & Passive Safety Systems 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. R. Happee


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45


Expected prior knowledge WB3404A Vehicle Dynamics A can be followed in parallel (recommended).Summary Automotive Safety technologies are covered with a focus on potential benefits, test procedures, sensing, control and human

machine interfacing.

Course Contents Contents as stated below may be adapted based on the interests of students and time constraints

Course ContentsContinuation

1.The road safety problemReview of fatalities, injuries and vehicle damage in a national and international perspective. Outlook on safety in first, secondand third world countries.Comparison of safety of different transport modes. Breakdown into injuries of car occupants, pedestrians, cyclists, motorcyclistsand others. Breakdown of costs into life years lost, medical and rehabilitation costs, vehicle damage and congestion due toaccidents.

Road safety countermeasure overview: Pre-crash, In-crash and Post-crash measures (Haddon Matrix). Vehicle safetytechnologies, road infrastructure, enforcement of speed, alcohol and other regulations, education.

2.Accident causationIntroduction of aspects like perception of speed, direction and distance, awareness, reaction times & failure to act.Illustration of loss of control due to wheel slip etc.

3.Active Safety 1Vision and Visibility.Obstacle & vehicle detection technologies.Vehicle to vehicle communication and vehicle to infrastructure communication.Driver assistance systems.

4.Active Safety 2The role of tyre, suspension, steering and braking system.Antilock Braking Systems (ABS) and Electronic Stability Programs (ESP).

5.Crash dummies & Injury CriteriaDevelopment and validation of crash test dummies using cadaver testing for high severity and volunteer testing for low severityloading.- Mathematical human body models.- Injury severity scales (AIS, MAIS, )- Injury criteria and tolerances and their derivation from cadaver testing and real accidents.

6.Passive Safety 1 frontal impact

Frontal car impact will be used to explain how occupant safety is enhanced by the deformable vehicle front structure, theprotective vehicle compartment, belt system, airbag and seat. The mechanical interaction will be illustrated quantitativelyincluding some practical calculation assignments.- Injuries to car occupants in Frontal Impact.- Demonstrated benefits of belts and airbags.- Full vehicle front overlap versus partial overlap impact.- Compatibility of vehicle shape and stiffness across the diversifying car fleet.- Triggering of belt pretensioner and airbag(s)- Adaptation of belt and airbag operation towards crash conditions and occupant size and position. Potential benefits of real timecontrol of belt and airbag.

7.Passive Safety 2 other impact modesOther impact modes will be reviewed in a global manner:SIDE IMPACT: Injuries. Test procedures & dummies. Protection offered by the protective vehicle compartment, airbags andvehicle interior padding.ROLLOVER: Injuries and ejection. Test procedures & dummies. Effectiveness of curtain airbags and belts to prevent ejection.REAR IMPACT: Injuries. Test procedures & dummies. Passive and active seat systems for rear impact.PEDESTRIANS AND CYCLISTS impacted by vehicle fronts: Injuries. Test procedures & dummy subsystems representingbody parts. Deformable vehicle front and bonnet structures. Compromises between pedestrian, frontal impact, durability andrepair costs for marginal accidents (parking).

8.Safety from a sensing & control perspectiveReview of safety systems described in previous chapters in terms of:- Sensing, identification and state estimation.- Human machine interfacing.

9.Safety test proceduresReview of regulated test procedures, consumer test procedures and best practice for active and passive safety as introduced inprevious chapters.- Safety in the vehicle development process.- Subsystem versus full system testing.- Hardware versus virtual testing.- Gaps where accident types and injury types are not well covered.- Gaps where innovative safety systems are not well covered.- Discussion of political and financial forces driving safety enhancement including: Governments, Car manufacturers, Suppliers,Vehicle and health Insurance companies.

Study Goals The student must be able to analyse the potential benefits of current or future active and/or passive safety systems

Education Method Lectures (4 hours per week)Plus Self-study & Exercises

Assessment Written exam

Enrolment / Application Register on Blackboard and mail [email protected]

Percentage of Design 10%

of 186




ME1110 Medical Device Prototyping 6

Responsible Instructor Dr. J.J. van den Dobbelsteen

Instructor Dr.ir. J.L. Herder

Instructor Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg

Instructor Dr.ir. G.J.M. Tuijthof

Contact Hours / Week

x/x/x/x

0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period Exam by appointment


Expected prior knowledge Previous participation in WB2436-05, WB5414-03, WB2308, WB2428-03 is considered as a pre.

Course Contents In the course Medical Device Design students develop and produce a sound solution to a problem in the medical field incollaboration with their supervisor, clinicians, instrument makers and production companies. The course offers students to workon a design assignment that encompasses the complete design cycle from problem analysis to actual production of the prototype.Each group has a budget of 3000 Euro for production of the prototype. The course is a logical follow-up of the courseBiomedical design engineering WB2308.

Students will select a design assignment from a number of options proposed by clinicians (e.g. surgeons, rehabilitation doctors).A conceptual design previously developed in WB2308 could also serve as a base for the development of a physical prototype.The students work in groups of two under close supervision of an instructor on the assignment, to end up with a working

prototype. The course is finalized with a public presentation for clinicians and companies and a report.

In weekly meetings of the instructors with all participating groups students are expected to present and discuss the progress intheir project in an informal setting.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1. Employ a design task with a multidisciplinary team to solve a real technical problem in a medical environment:translate the clinical problem as presented in the assignment into a practical, technical solution, i.e. do a problem analysis,specify design requirements, come up with a conceptual design, create a cardboard model;obtain feedback on the clinical feasibility of the concept from the medical assignor to further detail the design.2. Realize the fabrication of a prototype medical device in collaboration with instrument makers and production companies:

define economical demands;create detailed drawings, CAD model;formulate a production plan.3. Evaluate the performance of the new prototype:test the technical functionality of the device and/or the clinical applicability of the device in a medical setting;reflect on previously made design choices based on the performance of the prototype.4. Present the design to a multidisciplinary audience of technicians, clinicians and (medical) companies.

Education Method Design project

Assessment Prototype, report and final presentation


Design Content Specification of technical, economical and fabrication demands, development and selection of conceptual designs, CAD,Fabrication of prototype.


of 186



ME1120 Space Robotics 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ing. A. Schiele


0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4



Course Contents Overview to space robotics systems, design and requirements. This course will set the foundation to design space robotic

systems and to understand the requirements specifically imposed on robots by application in non-terrestrial environments. Thelecture provides an overview to some relevant basics about robotic manipulators in general and then prepares the students toconsider particular constraints posed by temp., radiation and space robotic systems. Focus will lie on manipulator type of roboticapplications, but also typical mobile robotics scenarios will be outlined.

Lect. 1:IntroductionRobots in space;Manipulators, Mobile robotics;Purpose, goals, difference w.r.t. terrestrial robotic systems

Lect. 2:Basics I: Homogeneous coordinatesConcept of homogeneous transformations, linear & rotational transforms(Euler angles, quaternions), Denavit-Hertenberg Convention, 6 DOF forward and inverse kinematics (Assignment)

Lect. 3:Basics II: Link velocityLink velocity and velocity propagation, Jacobians (analytical, geometrical, numerical,), construction of Jacobian,

Lect. 4:Basics III: Link forces & RedundancyLink force propagation, force transformations

Manipulator redundancy, Manipulator & operational space, null space, redundancy resolution strategies, redundant inversekinematics

Lect. 5:Exercises (Basics I-III)

Lect. 6:Space environmental effectsTemperature Environment (effects on mechanical Systems), radiation environment (effects on electronic systems), launch andlanding environments (examples), planetary surface environments

Lect. 7:Tribology in spaceBasic effects, overview of models, selection of appropriate lubricants

Lect. 8:Robotic actuators in spaceDC, stepper and brushless motors, bearing and bushing modification, qualified motors, selection of actuators.

Lect. 9:Sensors for manipulators in spacePosition/Velocity Sensing, force sensors, strain gauges (layout and design), sensor electronics,

Lect. 10:Testing for space mechatronicsIntroduction to applicable standards, mechanical, thermal and electrical testing. (I/F load calculation, thermal modelingapproaches, EMC)

Lect. 11:Applications I: Robotic planetary missionsMission operation, examples about mission control (MER, Nanokhod)

Lect. 12:Applications II: Orbital roboticsOperational modes: human-machine interfaces, examples of ERA/SSRMS, introduction to Telecontrol and Tele-operationconcepts

Lect. 13/14:Lab assignment (TBC):A: SRMS/SSRMS interfaces joystick (trl. Of 7 dof. Manipulators (PA.10, LBR4)B: Nullspace motion, resolution of 7 dof redundancy on LBR4(A+B = final assignment)

Study Goals The students are capable:* To identify, define and analyse problems of robots, vehicles and other mechanical systems in space* To design and produce a sound solution to typical space robotics problems

The following exit qualifications serve to realise this goal:

The students meet the following qualifications:* Basic knowledge of the problems of mechanical systems in space, i.e. related to tribology, actuators, mechatronics, sensors,thermodynamics, etc.* Ability to set up motion equations for 3D mechanisms applicable in space and in general, calculation of kinematics anddynamics using most often used methods.* Knowledge about particular space environment requirements and testing methods.* Knowledge about the space mission operations and human interfacing requirements.* Analyze some basic problems in space robotic missions, and synthesize an adequate solution.

Education Method 14 lectures, 2 assignment

Prerequisites Basic understanding of: linear algebra, physics, analog electronics, digital & analog signal processing, mechanics (statics,kinetics, dynamics), linear control theory, Matlab, C.

Assessment Assignment


of 186



ME1400 Sustainability in Transportation Engineering 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. J.H. Welink


0/0/2/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Course Contents Subject of the course is the sustainability in the transportation and production engineering and logistics. The course covers:Use of material and energy resourcesEnergy production and storageEfficiency of transport systems: Transport loss factor, effect kinetic energy, energy recuperation and transmissionProduct life cycle and sustainable product designSustainable processes and supply chainsEconomical aspects of sustainability

Study Goals The student must be able toâ¢ Describe and explain issues with (non-)sustainable materials and energyâ¢ Calculate the use of energy resources and emissions for different uses of energy sourcesâ¢ Devise, propose, explain and/or evaluate more energy efficient transport systemsâ¢ Demonstrate, analyse and evaluate life cycle analyses and devise, explain, analyse and evaluate sustainable design in relationto the life cycle of a productâ¢ Explain, devise, propose, analyse and evaluate and/or explain more sustainable production processesâ¢ Calculate the costs of the environmental impact of the transportation and production engineering and logistics, and theaccounting of environmental costs and calculate economics for (sustainable) investments

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week)

Assessment Written exam (80% of mark) and assignment (20% of mark)Department 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology

ME1590CH Separation Processes, Design & Operation 6

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. J.H. ter Horst


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 2


Course Contents Separation processes are very important in all sectors of modern process industry. A reaction section in a chemical plant istypically surrounded by 3-6 separation units, which perform a variety of functions (e.g. feed concentration, product purification,solvent-recycling, off-gas treatment and water-recovery). Separation processes consume approximately 40% of the energyconsumption and 75% of the investment cost in the process industry. Consequently, you are likely to come across the designand/or operation of separation units in your future career.Focus is given on the conceptual design of the main separation processes in the chemical industry: distillation, absorption,extraction, crystallization, adsorption and membrane separations. The main features of these processes are highlighted andillustrated with examples from industrial practice.

Study Goals Students are taught to select industrial separation units, to master various design methodologies and to recognize their potentialsand limitations. Hands-on experience with computer-aided design is developed through instructions and homework assignments.

Education Method Lectures, class assignments

Books Separation Process Principles, J.D.Seader & E.J.Henley, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Ed., 2006

Assessment The developed knowledge and acquired skills are tested by means of homework assignments, which can be worked out in groupsof two students. An oral examination of the groups about the obtained separation technology knowledge finalizes the course.

Department 3mE Department Process & Energy

ME1591CH Thermodynamics for Designers 3Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. T.W. de Loos


0/0/0/0/x

Education Period Summer Holidays

Start Education 5

Exam Period 5


Course Contents Data retrieval. Intermolecular forces. Prediction of ideal gas properties. Equations of state. Thermodynamics properties of non-ideal fluids. Vapour pressure and latent heat. G-excess models. UNIFAC methods. G-excess mixing rules for equations of state.Algorithms to calculate phase equilibria and complex chemical equilibria. Examples. Data banks, data generators, flowsheeting.

Study Goals Overview of state of the art thermodynamic models used in process design, allowing the participant to make a motivated choicebetween models used in flowsheet programms

Education Method intensive course (1 week)

Assessment assignments


of 186



ME1592CH Process Intensification 6

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. A.I. Stankiewicz


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 2


Course Contents 1.

Introduction to Process Intensification(PI):- sustainability-related issues in process industry- defnitions of Process Intensification- fundamental principles and approaches of PI

2.How to design a sustainable, inherently safer processing plant - presentation of PI case study assignments.

3.PI Approaches:- STRUCTURE - PI approach in spatial domain (incl. "FOCUS ON" guest lecture)- ENERGY - PI approach in thermodynamic domain (incl. "FOCUS ON" guest lecture)- SYNERGY - PI approach in functional domain (incl. "FOCUS ON" guest lecture)- TIME - PI approach in temporal domain (incl. "FOCUS ON" guest lecture)

4.Team work on case studies - intermediate reporting, consultancy.

Study Goals Basic knowledge and conceptual process design experience in Process Intensification.

Education Method Lectures, group projectLiterature and StudyMaterials

1.Lecture notes via Blackboard.

2.Book "Re-Enegineering the Chemical Processing Plant: Process Intensification" by A. Stankiewicz and J. A. Moulijn (MarcelDekker, 2004), also available for on-line reading via the Library of TU Delft.

3.Recommended papers via Blackboard

4."Process Intensification Information Sheets" via Blackboard

Assessment The examination on Process Intensification course lasts 2.5 hours and is divided into two parts:

Part 1: Written examination, lasting 1.5 hour.Part 2: Presentation and discussion of the case-study assignment results by project groups (1 hour)


ME1600 Reliability and Uncertainty Models in Engineering Mechanics 2

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. M.A. Gutierrez De La Merced


0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4



Course Contents This course provides an introduction to the most common computational techniques to study the influence of parameteruncertainty in the performance of mechanical systems. Rather than modelling the problem by means of stochastic differentialequations, advantage is taken of existing numerical techniques for deterministic problems in order to characterise the stochastic

response. The focus is in modelling the spatial variability of material and geometric properties by means of random fields andstudying how this randomness propagates to the response field. The preferential techniques for this purpose belong to the familyof Stochastic Finite Element Methods and are presented in this course for the purpose of both uncertainty and reliability analysis.In the former attention is paid to how characteristics of the random parameters such as the expectation and the covariancepropagate to those of the response. In the latter the focus is on approximating the probability distribution of any characteristic of the structural performance.

Study Goals To get acquainted with the most common techniques for random field modelling and stochastic finite elements, including theirrange of applicability, limitations and accuracy.

Education Method Lecture

Assessment Assignment and oral discussion

Department 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering

of 186



ME1610-10 Tissue Biomechanics of Bone, Cartilage and Tendon 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. H.H. Weinans

Instructor Dr. A.A. Zadpoor

Instructor Dr.ir. R. Happee


2/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 1

2Course Language English

Course Contents The healing process of bone is a beautiful example of adaptive repair in a living tissue.The tissues of the musculoskeletal system such as bone, cartilage and tendon/ligament are able to adapt their architecture tochanges in external loads and to repair damage. Astronauts lose bone mass during spaceflight, as their skeleton adapts to the lowgravity environment. Tennis players have stronger bones in their dominant arm and high resistance training, likeweight-lifting, increases bone mass.

During this lecture series, a number of topics related to musculoskeletal tissues will be discussed.We will give an introduction to the development of the skeletal system, bone and cartilagebiology and the remodeling and repair processes that are important during life.In addition the most important skeletal diseases will be discussed, such as osteoporosis (reduced bone mass that increasesfracture risk) and osteoarthritis (degeneration of the joints). The course will also cover diagnostic methods, imaging andcomputer analyses that can be used to obtain information on the skeleton from novel imaging modalities.

Study Goals 1. know the function and role of the main constituents of bone, cartilage and tendon tissueand the organisation of these tissues at the different hierarchies2. be able to describe the development, remodeling and repair processes of bone cartilage and tendon tissue and its response to

mechanical load. Understand these concepts in terms of growth, aging and degeneration.3. know the structure, function of bone cartilage and tendon and understand the mechanical properties of these tissues, such ase.g. anisotropy and visco-elasticity.4. describe the effects of the major diseases of the skeletal system such as osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis andtendinopathy and understand the concept behind different treatment options.5. know the principles of tissue engineering, be able to describe the tissue engineering process in the laboratory and knowadvantages and disadvantages of natural and synthetic tissue6. describe clinical study set-ups: prospective, retrospective,randomised, non-randomised; clinical scoring systems, radiologicalassessment techniques, national registries and explain the advantagesand disadvantages of each aforementioned item

Education Method Lectures

Assessment written exam


of 186



ME1615 Micro-Assembly, Packaging and Test 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. M. Tichem

Course Coordinator Ir. J.J.L. Neve


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 35

Course Language EnglishRequired for Micro and Nano Engineering (specialisation within the MSc Mechanical Engineering variant PME)

-NOTE:This course will not be given during the study year 2010/2011.Students of the specialisation PME-MNE who want to finish their courses this studyyear can choose an extra elective of 3 EC tocompensate for this course.As a replacment course WB1444-7 "Advanced Micro-electronic packaging" is advised. This course is also given in Educationperiod 3.-

Summary Assembly and packaging processes are very important for the realisation of microsysems, and determine to a high degree theirtechnical and economic performance. The course teaches the basic principles of and technology for micro-assembly andpackaging processes.

Course Contents The course explains the basic principles of as well as the technology for the assembly and packaging of miniaturisedproducts/systems. The products focused on originate both from the micro-mechanical engineering domain and from thesemiconductor domain (complex microelectronics and microsystems/ MEMS).

More specifically, the course addresses the following topics: example microproducts and microsystems and their integrationchallenges; trends and roadmaps; scaling laws and the consequences for assembly; micro-part gripping; accurate part alignment;precision and micro-robots; haptic assembly; self-assembly and batch assembly; micro-assembly systems, design; generalpackaging flows for IC packaging and MEMS packaging; packaging architectures (including SoC, MCM, SiP); materials andprocesses; thermal management; hermeticity; packaging-induced failures; reliability and test.

Study Goals The course enables students to research, to design and to implement micro-assembly and packaging processes. More specifically,students- Gain understanding of the state-of-the-art in industrial assembly and packaging processes, as well as knowledge on the state-of-the-art in research in the domain;- Gain knowledge and skills to develop innovative micro-assembly and packaging processes.

Education Method A variety of methods will be used: lectures, guest lectures, analysis of scientific and technical papers/ mini-workshop,exercises/case studies during the lectures/ the course period.

Literature and StudyMaterials

Lecture notes Micro-assembly, most recent version available upon start of the course.Scientific papers, made available during the course.Handouts with presentation slides.

Assessment Written examAssignments



of 186



MS3011 Semiconductor Principles and Devices 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. B.J. Thijsse


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Required for MS3031 Computational Materials Science, MS4111 Thin Film Materials, MS4131NS Solid State Physics II.Expected prior knowledge Introductory classical mechanics and electromagnetism.

Basic quantum mechanics (particle-wave dualism, one-dimensional Schrödinger equation, hydrogen atom, chemical bond, freeelectron theory, band theory).Crystal dynamics.Elements of statistical physics (Maxwell-Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac, Bose-Einstein distributions, phonons, photons).

Summary Basic semiconductor physics, principles of semiconductor devices, low-dimensional systems.

Course Contents Following up on the free electron and band theories of solids, the course focuses on the properties of electrons and holes insemiconductors and on the different ways in which semiconductor materials can be engineered into devices. Examples arediodes, transistors, leds, lasers, and solar cells. Special subjects are low-dimensional systems and the question why electronsbehave independently.

Study Goals The student is able to use quantum mechanical models to explain the properties and behavior of electrons and holes insemiconductors and of their roles in basic electronic, and optoelectronic devices.

More specifically, the student is able to:1.Explain the band model for electron and hole energies in semiconductors.2.Apply Fermi-Dirac statistics to calculate the number of carrier electrons and holes in conductors and semiconductors.

3.Formulate the combined roles of electron scattering and electric field on the electrical conductivity of materials in variousmaterials.4.Indicate the main fundamental and application-oriented differences between elemental, III-V, and II-VI semiconductors.5.Demonstrate the effects of doping, composition, and size on energy gaps and Fermi energies.6.Explain the biased and unbiased p-n junction, the tunnel diode, the field effect transistor, and high-mobility electron devices.7.Formulate the operation of lasers and leds.8.Show how and why heterostructure semiconductor lasers are built and operated.9.Explain light detectors and photovoltaic cells as examples of optoelectronics.10.Identify the main materials engineering aspects of device fabrication.11.Demonstrate the role of diffusion, annihilation, and creation of electrons and holes on the dynamic behavior of semiconductors.12.Explain the effects of low-dimensionality on device properties.13.Identify the main materials engineering aspects of device fabrication.14.Explain why electrons behave independently, in spite of their Coulomb interaction.15.Apply all of the above in problems representing simplified and real cases.



Course material:"Solid State Physics", 2nd edition, by J.R. Hook and H.E. Hall (Wiley, 2006).Statistical mechanics survival guide", version 24 Sep 2007, by B.J. Thijsse, available through Blackboard.Exercises and useful links on Blackboard.Making your own notes during class is highly recommended.

Prerequisites MS4031 Waves, MS4041 Structure of Materials, MS4051 Physics of Materials, or equivalent courses.

Assessment Written exam, open book

Remarks Oral examination possible only in special circumstances (after two seriously attempted written exams).

Department 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering

of 186



MS3021 Metals Science 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. L.A.I. Kestens

Instructor Ir. N. Geerlofs

Instructor Dr.ir. W.G. Sloof

Instructor Prof.dr. J.H.W. de Wit


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Required for Specialisation Course Metals Science & Technology:- MS3412 Processing of Metals,- MS3442 Relation between Properties & Microstructure,- MS3461 Corrosion & Protection against Corrosion,- MS3452 Total Performance Approach: Case Studies

Summary Microstructure, Nucleation, Growth, Interfaces, Solid-State Transformations, Crystallographic Texture, Solidification, Diffusion,Segregation, Grain Boundary, Dislocation, Hardening, Hall-Petch Relation, Constitutional Undercooling, Precipitation.

Course Contents Metals represent a vital class of materials for a technological society. This course examines the structure and properties of metalsacross a range of length scales, addressing issues of microstructural changes and phase transformations, metals productiontechniques and the behaviour of metals in generic applications.

The course covers microstructures, mechanical properties in relation to microstructures and solidification. In additionintroductions are given to the influence of welding on microstructures and properties and on the susceptibility of metals to

corrosion.Microstructural aspects include:1)the essential characteristics of different types of interface between either grains of the same phase or

grains of different phases, the formation of metastable phases, and orientation relations.2)the classical nucleation theory for phase transformations in the solid state, and the relation to

experimental observations on nucleation.3)the basic features of phase-transformation models for diffusion-controlled, interface-controlled, and

mixed-mode transformations, and the relation to experimental results.4)diffusionless / martensitic phase transformations occurring under either thermal or mechanical driving

force.5)the origin of crystallographic texture in metallic microstructures, the representation of texture and the

experimental techniques to measure texture on a macro- or microscopic scale.6)the characteristics of the microstructure of a range of commercial steels, aluminium alloys, titanium

alloys and magnesium alloys, the main features of the technological processing of these alloys and themain application areas.

Mechanical properties of metals in relation with their microstructure include descriptions of dislocations, slip systems,movement of dislocations, interactions between dislocations, lattice defects and precipitates. Concepts of dislocation generation

and multiplication are discussed. Strength of metals is considered including temperature and strain rate dependence of the flowstress. Strengthening mechanisms such as solute and precipitation hardening, work hardening and grain size refinement aredescribed. The relation between strength and grain size i.e. the Hall-Petch relation is discussed.

Solidification and melting describe transformations between crystallographic and non-crystallographic states of a metal or alloy.Basic phenomena during solidification are explained including: nucleation and growth, heat flow and micro segregation. Theeffects of major process parameters on these phenomena are described, as well as their effect on as-cast microstructures.

Study Goals The student is able to describe the characteristic features of metals, explain the dominant structures and mechanisms responsiblefor their physical and mechanical properties and describe the temperature dependence of these structures and mechanisms.

More specifically, the student is able to:1. distinguish the different types of interfaces and their characteristic properties.2. identify the microstructural parameters that play a critical role in the nucleation behaviour of various

solid-state transformation processes based on thermodynamic principles,.3. differentiate between the different types of growth modes, to make the link with the kinetic features of

the transformation, and to derive the relevance for the microstructural features.4. identify the mechanism, including the crystallographic features, of a diffusionless transformation.5. quantitatively describe the crystallographic texture of metals and understands the importance of the

crystallographic texture with regard to the anisotropic behaviour of metals.6. identify and read the microstructures of various common metallic systems, relate the microstructures tothe corresponding phase diagram and interpret these microstructural features in terms of a selectedgroup of material properties.

7. describe dislocations, dislocation movement, dislocation interactions with other dislocations, lattice (e.g.solute atoms, grain boundaries) defects and precipitates in fundamental terms.

8. explain plastic deformation of metals using dislocation theory.9. illustrate the origin and multiplication of dislocations10. describe the strengthening mechanisms for metals: solute and precipitation strengthening, work

hardening, grain size effect (Hall-Petch relation)11. explain the difference between nucleation and growth during solidification.12. explain the different growth modes13. formulate the effect of cooling rate on the phase transformation and the resulting microstructure.14. explain and apply the principle of constitutional undercooling to actual solidification situations.15. formulate the occurrence of segregation during solidification.16. formulate the different heat transfer modes during solidification.17. explain the occurrence of different morphologies by applying principles of heat and mass flow.18. identify the main materials engineering aspects of solidification and casting.19. appraise the influence of the welding thermal cycle on material structure and properties20. recognise corrosion mechanisms and their dependence on microstructures.21. apply all of the above in problems representing simplified and real cases.



Course material:D.A. Porter and K.E. Easterling Phase Transformations in Metals and Alloys, Chapman and Hall, 2nd Edition, 1992.D. Hull and D.J.Bacon Introduction to Dislocations, 4th Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2001.G. den Ouden Lastechnologie, Delftse Uitgevers Maatschappij, 3rd Edition, 1993. (English translation in progress). Chapter 5 &

of 186



6D.A. Jones Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Prentice Hall,1996J. Beddies and M.J. Bibby, Principles of Metal Manufacturing Processes, Arnold, 1999.

Prerequisites - MS4041 Structure of Materials,- MS4021 Structure Characterisation,- MS4061 Thermodynamics and Kinetics


Special Information Laboratory project(s): 2 x 1/2 days, Casting / Solidification (5th and 6th week)

Remarks 3 hours examination, closed book


MS3031 Computational Materials Science 4

Responsible Instructor Dr. M.H.F. Sluiter

Instructor Dr. A.J. Bottger

Instructor Prof.dr.ir. J. Sietsma


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45


Required for MS4131NS Solid State Physics IIExpected prior knowledge Undergraduate physics, mathematics, and thermodynamics. Basic familiarity with fluid dynamics and some materials science

(atomic structure, defects).

Summary Computer modeling of materials. Length and time scales. Modern modeling techniques. Simulation of materials structure,change, and properties. Student computer projects.

Course Contents 1. Introduction to materials modeling.2. Phase field methods.3. Background statistical mechanics.4. Quantum-level modeling.5. Molecular dynamics.6. Ising model, Cluster Variation Method, Monte Carlo techniques.7. Finite volume methods.8. Discrete dislocation dynamics.9. Computer lab classes.

Study Goals The student is able to differentiate between the possibilities of the principal computer modeling techniques in materials science,and design and execute a modeling strategy for a given problem.

More specifically, the student is able to:1.recognize that the properties and behavior of materials are determined by interrelated phenomena on widely different time,length, and energy scales2.explain why and how different modeling approaches (ab initio methods, molecular dynamics, Monte Carlo methods, clustervariation method, phase field modeling, discrete dislocation dynamics, finite volume methods) each have their strengths over adifferent subrange of these scales3.formulate criteria for selecting the most appropriate method for a given problem4.indicate what type of information can be obtained from the different techniques and how these pieces of information canpossibly be combined5.explain the main algorithms and the underlying theories of the different techniques6.use these algorithms and theories to predict the behavior of modeling methods for different cases7.implement small parts of self-designed code in an existing or new program8.apply a number of modeling techniques to small but realistic materials problems, by executing different computer simulationprojects9.critically analyze the simulation results and give written and oral presentations of the results

Education Method Lectures, computer projects.


Extensive lecture notes are available on Blackboard.

Prerequisites MS4031 Waves, MS4041 Structure of Materials, MS4051 Physics of Materials, MS4061 Thermodynamics and Kinetics,MS4081 Properties of Materials, MS4101 Production of Materials, MS3011 Semiconductor Devices and Magnetism, orequivalent courses.

Assessment Written exam + project presentation.

Remarks In addition to the written examination, short written reports of the computer projects are required. Also, a mini-conference willbe held at which the students present the results of one of their computer projects in more detail.

Design Content Students should design modelling plans.


of 186



MS3221 History of Materials Production and Usage 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. J. Dik

Instructor Drs. N.C.F. Groot


x/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1



Summary Culture, art, archaeology, history, materialsCourse Contents This course studies the development of materials and production techniques in the visual arts. From the early stone age to the

contemporary art, artists and craftsmen have been on a continuous quest for new materials and innovative production techniquesto realize artistic concepts. The main focus of this course is the relation between the introduction of new materials on one handand immaterial developments in the form of stylistic changes in the visual arts.

Study Goals The student is able to:- give a general overview of materials in art and archaeology; he can describe the timeline of materials used from 9000BC tillpresent- relate between material innovation on one side and economical, social and cultural changes on the other



yet to be defined



MS3252 Materials Degradation and Countermeasures 3



x/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1



Summary Culture, art, archaeology, history, materials, degradation

Course Contents Precious historical artefacts are subject to degradation through time. This course studies the effect of various degradation factorson artworks, including temperature changes, moisture and UV radiation. The course has a focus on the diagnosis of degradationphenomena through materials analysis. It also includes a range of (passive and active) countermeasures that can be undertaken.

Study Goals The student is able to:- give an overview of important inorganic degradation mechanisms on artworks- describe degradation mechanisms that have already occured but can also outline possible future threats to the artwork- relate between degration phenomena and environmental influences- formulate countermeasures and discuss and their pros and cons



Literature

Assessment Yet to be defined


of 186



MS3401 Primary Metals Production 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. R. Boom

Instructor Dr. Y. Yang

Assistent J.A. Woelders-van der Burg


0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 4


Summary Primary metals production, primary metals refining and recycling

Course Contents Extractive metallurgy, production, refining and recycling of the primary metals iron and steel, aluminium, magnesium andtitanium.

Study Goals The student is able to describe the characteristic features of production from ore and secondary sources (scrap) for the followinggroup of technically important metals: iron and steel, aluminium, magnesium and titanium. The student can reproduce the mostcommonly used production methods for these metals and understands why these are industrially applied. what technologies areinvolved, which developments are ongoing, and what impact these processes have on energy consumption and environment.

More specifically, the student is able to reproduce:- the thermodynamics of extractive metallurgy;- the chemical reactions relevant for the metals extraction from ore or scrap;- the mass and thermal balances of the most common production processes;-the slag/metal equilibria as a function of composition and temperature of slag and liquid metal;

- the material flow in the iron and steel production chain;- the kinetics of steelmaking in the basic oxygen furnace (BOF);

- the process control modelling of steelmaking;- the dynamic measurement of process progress in the BOF;- the removal of sulphur from liquid iron by CaO and Mg;- slag formation in the BOF and its relevance for dephosphorisation and refractory lining life;- gas/metal mixing and homogenisation by gas injection and stirring;- the secondary metallurgy of steelmaking (deoxidation, vacuum degassing, desulphurisation, calcium injection);- the electric arc furnace (EAF) process for steel scrap melting and refining;- the Hall-Heroult process of primary aluiminium production;- the important parameters for aluminium recycling;- the Pidgeon and EMF production processes for magnesium;- the Kroll process for tiatanium production;- the Fray/Cambridge development to produce titanium, aluminium and magnesium.


Computer Use The student will be explained and demonstrated how to use the webbased learning methods of the International Iron and SteelInstitute (steeluniversity.org) in which TU Delft is being involved.


Brahma Deo and Rob Boom, Fundamentals of Steelmaking Metallurgy, avilable from the lecturerHandouts of the lectures in the form of powerpoint presentations

Assessment Oral exam

Remarks A plant visit to a production site for iron and steel or aluminium in The Netherlands is part of the course.


MS3412 Processing of Metals 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. M.J.M. Hermans


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12

Course Language EnglishRequired for MS4101 - Production of Materials, MS3031 - Computational Materials Science

Summary heat flow, fluid flow, dimensional analysis, boundary conditions

Course Contents Subjects covered include transport phenomena in metals processing. The module will focus on quantitative descriptions of processes using physical and material models in terms of fundamental and essential building blocks. Numerical approximationmethods are discussed to obtain quantitative results and are related to process conditions and process performance.Microstructural evolution models are also included. These concepts are illustrated with selected case studies.

Study Goals The student is able to understand and to apply general principles of metals processes.

More specifically the student is able to:- analyse metal process problems- apply (transport) equations to practical cases and problems- formulate a process problem in terms of mathematical equations- solve simplified problems in materials processing


Literature and StudyMaterials Course Material: D.R. Poirier and G.H.Geiger, Transport Phenomena in Materials Processing, TMS Warrendale USA, ISBN 0-87339-272-8: Chapters 2,3,4,7,8,10.

References from literature: numerous books on Transport Phenomena

Prerequisites MS3021 - Metals Science

Assessment 50 % Written examination with problems (open book), 50 % course work, students have to pass both parts to pass the course


of 186



MS3421 Developments in Production and Processing 2

Responsible Instructor Dr. J. Zhou

Instructor Dr. J. Duszczyk


3/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12

Course Language EnglishSummary Particular materials production, rapid solidification, compaction, sintering, powder injection moulding, full-density processing,

and porous materials for biomedical applications.

Course Contents The course concerns the fundamentals of the non-conventional materials production and processing technology to prepareparticular metals and alloys of almost any compositions and to consolidate these materials into near-net-shape products forengineering applications or control the porosity of sintered materials for the bio-functionality of implants in the human body. Itintroduces the methods to produce advanced materials through atomisation, melt-spinning or spray deposition, thecharacterization of the initial materials such as particle size, size distribution, morphology and density, and the methods toconvert the initial materials into engineered shapes such as compaction and powder injection moulding and to provide structuralintegration such as sintering. It details the mechanisms operating during full-density processing to enhance mechanical propertiessuch as extrusion and isostatic pressing. It also explains the techniques to control porosity to tailor the physical and mechanicalproperties and allow tissues to grow into the porous implant. Qua materials, it covers a wide range of metals and alloys forengineering and medical applications.

Study Goals Upon satisfactory completion of the course, students should be able to:

1. recognise the capabilities and limitations of the advanced materials processing technology in comparison with the

conventional technology;2. select processing routes and process parameters for the end product meeting the specific performance requirements forengineering or medical applications;3. predict microstructural evolution and dimensional changes occurring during each processing step and the performance of theproduct at the end of the processing chain, on the basis of a fundamental understanding of process physics and relatedmetallurgy;4. identify the faults as a result of improper material selection and processing and to propose solutions to the problem;5. evaluate the gains in product performance against processing complexity.

Education Method Lectures, plus a case study and plant tour


Dictaat MS3421, lecture notes and recommended research articles

Prerequisites MS3021 - Metals Science, MS4011 - Mechanical Properties, MS4101 - Production of Materials

Assessment Closed-book written examination


of 186



MS3432 Determination of Microstructure 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. W.G. Sloof


0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3



Summary Electron Back Scatter Diffraction, EBSD, Orientation Imaging Microscopy, Kikuchi diffraction patterns, Scanning ElectronMicroscopy, Texture, Misorientation, Coincidence site lattices, Grain boundaries, Sterographic projection, Pole figures,Orientation Distribution Functions.

Course Contents A modern technique to determine the microstructure of crystalline materials is Orientation Imaging Microscopy which is basedon Electron Back Scatter Diffraction in a Scanning Electron Microscope. This technique enables to determine the microstuctureof materials quantitatively in terms of: (i) spatial distribution of phases, (ii) size, shape and orientation of crystallite grains, (iii)misorientation between neighbouring grains, and (iv) texture. The course covers fundamental aspects of EBSD measurements,evaluation of collected data and analysis of results.The principles of Electron Back Scatter Diffraction and the generation of Kikuchi patterns. Methods of indexing the diffractionpatterns and the determination of crystal orientation. Definitions of coordinate systems and their relation with Euler angles andspace. Stereographic projection and representation of crystal orientations in pole figures. Construction of phase and Euler maps.Representation of grain orientions in Rodrgues-Frank space. Determination of misorientation between neighbouring grains.Special orientation relations: coincidence site lattice. Methods to determine grain size and shape, and texture.

Study Goals The student is able to use the physical principles of Electron Back Scatter Diffraction (EBSD) to explain quantitativedetermintion of materials microstructures.

More specifically, the student is able to:Explain the principles of EBSD and the formation of Kikuchi patterens.

Show how electron microscopes equipped with EBSD are built and operated.Describe how diffraction patterns are sampled, indexed and processed to crystal orientation images.Formulate how texture of materials is reperesented using pole figures.Explain the use of Euler angles and Euler space to characterize crystal orientations.Compute misorientations and orientation relations between neighboring grains.Illustrate the representation of EBSD data with the Rodrigues vector in Rodrigues-Frank space.Describe how orientation maps are constructed and how grain size and shapes are quantifiedShow how electron microscopes equipped with EBSD diffractometers are built and operated.Apply all the above to analyse the microstructure of a material from an EBSD measurement.

Education Method Lecture and laboratory project.

Computer Use Operation of an electron microscope equipped with EBSD. Processing and analysis of EBSD measurement data.


Instructions and guides are available on blackboard.

References from literature: V. Randle, Microtexture Determination and its applications, 2nd edition, Maney Publishing, London,2003; ISBN 1-902653-83-1.

Assessment Oral exam (project, written report and oral exam).

Remarks Hours per week: 2 lectures.Other hours: self study, lab project and report writing.

The course includes a laboratory project (2 EC) involving an EBSD measurement of a material. Next, a set of diffraction patternsis collected. Then, the data are processed and analysed to determination the microstructure with great detail. The results of thisproject are presented in a written report and discussed at the oral examination. The assignments can be found on blackboard.


of 186



MS3442 Relation between Properties and Microstructure 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. J. Sietsma

Instructor Dr.ir. M. Janssen


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12

Course Language EnglishSummary microstructure, mechanical properties, fatigue, magnetic properties

Course Contents The module consists of two parts: mechanical properties and magnetic properties. In the mechanical part a selection will beconsidered of properties such as strength, (fracture) toughness, fatigue and creep.

The magnetic properties concern the following subjects: magnetic moments in materials, magnetic measurements, ferro-, para-and diamagnetism, hysteresis, Barkhausen effect, magnetostriction, domains, domain walls, kinetics of domain-wall processes,soft and hard magnetic materials, magnetic recording, magnetic methods in materials evaluation.

Study Goals The student is able to explain the effects of various different microstructural parameters on the mechanical and magneticproperties of metals.

More specifically with respect to mechanical properties, the student is able to:- describe how microstructural barriers affect the growth of short fatigue cracks and categorise the effect of crack length onfatigue limit- identify initiation sites for fatigue cracks: locations, loading conditions and development- identify the different stages in short fatigue crack growth and indicate effects of the microstructural unit size (e.g. grain size),corrosive environments and notches

- illustrate the complexity of multiaxial fatigue in comparison with uniaxial fatigue and the effect of loading order on damageaccumulation during mixed mode loading- explain different models for analysing short fatigue crack growth- elaborate on the significance of short fatigue cracks for lifetime predictions- explain the role of the deformation character (i.e. wavy or planar slip) on the fatigue limit and the consequences this has forvarious ultra fine-grained metals and metal alloys- elaborate on the microstructure of metals subjected to severe plastic deformation and on the subsequent effect of cyclicdeformation (i.e. softening and hardening)- explain the nature of stress-strain hysteresis loops for ultra fine-grained metals on the basis of friction stresses and back stresses- identify the development of fatigue damage in ultra fine-grained metals, both on a macro-scopic and on a microscopic scale,and methods to delay this damage- describe current models for fatigue mechanisms in ultra fine-grained metals- interpret results from scientific journal papers, which means extracting principal ideas from extensive texts while dealing withincomplete and sometimes conflicting information

More specifically with respect to magnetic properties, the student is able to:- describe the character of magenitisation of materials- explain the background and mechanism of magnetic measurements- identify the main types of magnetism

- describe the magnetic processes determining the hysteresis loop and identify the main parameters describing the hysteresis loop- explain the occurrence of the Barkhausen effect- explain the characteristics of ferromagnetic domains, domain walls, and domain-wall motion- describe the most important charateristics of soft- and hard-magnetic materials, and the main applications- explain the mechanisms used for magnetic recording and storage- explain the mechanisms underlying the application of magnetic methods in materials research and characterisation



Course material:- Mechanical properties: Review articles provided on demand- Magnetic properties: D. Jiles, Introduction to Magnetism and Magnetic Materials, ed. Chapman & Hall, 2nd edition, 1998,chapters 2.3-2.5, 3-8, 12-15

Prerequisites MS4041 - Structure of Materials, MS4081 - Mechanics of Materials, MS4011 - Mechanical Properties, MS3021 - MetalsScience.

Assessment Oral exam for the part on mechanical properties; written exam, open book, for the part on magnetic properties;


of 186



MS3452 Total Performance Approach: Case Studies 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. J.M.C. Mol


2/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 2

Exam Period 12


Required for MS4161 (Designing (with) Materials)Summary Materials in Design, Materials Processing in Design, Materials Selection, Process Selection case studies, Materials Processing,

Materials Engineering.

Course Contents Materials in Design - Evolution of engineering materials - The design process - Engineering materials and their properties -Materials selection charts-Materials selection: case studies; Materials processing and design - Materials Processing SelectionCharts - Case studies: process selection - Data sources.

Study Goals The student is able to develop a systematic procedure for selecting materials and processes with best matches the requirements of a design

More specifically, the student is able to:Integrate materials selection with other aspects of designDevelop materials indices and/ or value functions to model design requirementsIdentify the main materials engineering aspects of materials and process selection.Apply all of the above in case studies representing simplified and real designs.


Computer Use Cambridge Engineering Selector (CES) Software Package


Materials Selection in Mechanical Design, Michael F. Ashby, Butterworth-Heinemann ISBN 0 7506 4357 9Lecture notes made available through Blackboard after class

Prerequisites MS3021 (Metals Science); CH4011MS (Polymer science); CH4021MS (Ceramic Science); MS4011 (Mechanical Properties)

Assessment - Presentation- Written report on 2 case studies (assignments)- Oral feedback session

Design Content Materials and Process selection


of 186



MS3461 Corrosion and Protection against Corrosion 3


Instructor Prof.dr. J.H.W. de Wit


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12

Course Language EnglishSummary corrosion, protection against corrosion, corrosion principles, corrosion prevention, galvanic corrosion, intergranular corrosion,

pitting corrosion, crevice corrosion, coatings, surface layers

Course Contents - Relevance of corrosion, costs to society- Definitions and electrochemical character of corrosion- General corrosion vs local forms of corrosion- Electrochemical Thermodynamics- Electrochemical Kinetics- Passivity- Galvanic Corrosion and intergranular corrosion- Pitting and Crevice Corrosion- Protection against corrosion

Study Goals The student is able to describe the electrochemical nature of corrosion processes, in his professional life to understand the riskshazards and costs due to corrosion phenomena and act upon it in making decisions on metals applications and to make anargumentative selection of materials classes ( steel, stainless steel, aluminium alloys, copper alloys) for given applications.

More specifically, the student is able to:

1.derive and produce qualitative and semiquantitative polarisation diagrams for a corroding metal from a1.simple set of data2.compose polarisation diagrams for galvanic corrosion and for passive materials from a set of data3.compose and use Pourbaix diagrams in making decisions on metals applications4.calculate the corrosion current density of metals from quantitative polarisation diagrams5.transform the corrosion current density into practical corrosion rates like mm/year6.list the most important corrosion localised phenomena7.describe the mechanisms of the most important localised corrosion phenomena8.criticize a given description of a corrosion mechanism9.select the technical best protection measures to prevent attack of metals in a given surrounding10.criticize and judge a given materials application11.discuss in a balanced way applied protective measures taking into account, risks for health, environment and costs



Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Second Edition 1996, van Denny A. Jones, ISBN 0-13-359993-0


Remarks In case of too few participants the written exam will be replaced by an oral exam.


MS3471 Modern Analysis Techniques & Authenticity Research 4



x/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1



Summary Authenticity research, art objects, historical artefacts, materials analysis

Course Contents Precious historical artefacts have always been the subject of falsification. Forgeries can be identified as such by analysis of the

materials used. This course studies the proces of materials analysis of artworks, including the sampling of the object, theanalytical identififcation of materials and the historical interpretation of analysis results. The course has a highly practicalorientation and usually includes a questioned art object from the art world.

Study Goals The student is able to:- give a general overview of archaeometric approaches in material cultural heritage- identify the archaeometric component of archaeological or art historical research questions- describe relevant analytical techniques in archaeometry- interprete analytical data in the archaeological and art historical context and discuss the findings with specialists from thecultural heritage domain



Literature

Assessment Presentation


of 186



MS4011 Mechanical Properties 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. M. Janssen

Instructor Dr.ir. L. Nicola


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34

Course Language EnglishRequired for MS3442 - Relation between Properties & Microstructure

Summary crack growth, fracture toughness, fatigue, environmentally assisted cracking, creep, mechanical properties

Course Contents - Stable Crack Growth: R-curve concept, R-curve determination, J-R curve- Fracture Toughness: Ductile and brittle fracture, Microstructural aspects of fracture toughness- Fatigue: Fatigue crack growth, Fatigue crack initiation- Environmentally Assisted Cracking: Mechanisms in metals and polymers, Test methods- Creep: Creep in crystalline solids, Creep fracture in metals

Study Goals The student is able to identify a number of common mechanical phenomena that cause material failure in terms of themechanisms that underly these phenomena and the conditions for which such behaviour can be expected.Moreover for a number of phenomena the student can identify experimental techniques for determining material behaviour and / or can make simple failure predictions.

More specifically, the student is able to:1. explain the rising R-curve concept and the methods for R-curve determination2. compute the maximum amount of stable crack growth and the critical K, G or J value3. distinguish the microstructural aspects of brittle and ductile fracture mechanisms

4. identify the principal toughening mechanisms in metals, ceramics and polymers5. explain the effect of anisotropy on toughness6. explain the effect on toughness of the cleanliness of a number of specific metal alloys7. illustrate effective toughening strategies for a number of ferrous alloys, non-ferrous alloys, ceramics, polymers andcomposites8. identify the effects of delta K and load ratio (crack closure) on fatigue crack growth rate9. predict fatigue lifetime for constant amplitude loading10. illustrate the effect of peak loads on fatigue crack growth rate11. explain methods to predict fatigue lifetime under variable amplitude loading12. describe the relation between the fatigue limit and the fatigue threshold13. describe the effect of notches on the growth of short fatigue cracks14. describe the square root area parameter model for predicting fatigue limits15. list the principle models for environmentally assisted cracking of metals16. illustrate the mechanisms for physical and chemical environmentally assisted cracking in polymers17. explain the principle of time-to-failure testing of environmentally assisted cracking18. explain crack growth rate testing of environmentally assisted cracking and identify experimental pitfalls19. calculate lifetime of environmentally assisted cracking under constant load20. indicate the practical significances of the threshold stress intensity and growth rate data for environmentally assisted cracking21. select the relevant experimental data and use this to calculate a creep activation energy22. identify the different mechanisms by which creep can occur in crystalline solids, including the conditions that lead to thiscreep23. explain the conditions for which superplastic deformation can occur24. explain the principle and the use of deformation mechanism maps25. perform extrapolations of creep rupture data



- Fracture Mechanics, M. Janssen, J. Zuidema and R.J.H. Wanhill, 2nd edition, DUP (2002)- Collection of Exercises on Fracture Mechanics, available on Blackboard- Reader based on the book Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials, R.W. Hertzberg, available onBlackboard and the online ordering system- Slides (including notes) on Blackboard

Prerequisites MS4081 - Mechanics of Materials

Assessment Written examination during which the book Fracture Mechanics, the reader and the hand-outs provided may be consulted. Otherforms of information, such as notes or worked-out problems, are not allowed!


of 186



MS4021 Structure Characterisation 5


Instructor Dr. A.J. Bottger


4/4/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period 23


Summary Crystallography, Composition and Microsctructure, X-ray diffraction, electron diffraction, electron microscopy, X-raymicroanalysis, Auger electron spectroscopy, X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy, Secundary Mass Spectroscopy, RutherfordBackscattering Spectroscopy.

Course Contents Microstructure characterization of materials through interaction between x-ray photons, electrons and ion beams and solids.Emission of element characteristic x-ray radiation. Auger electrons and photoelectrons. Phenomena such as: absorption, elasticand inelastic scattering. Sputtering with ions and depth profiling. Concepts such as depth, spectral and lateral resolution anddetection limits. Various analytical techniques and their applications: electron microscopy, x-ray microanalysis, Auger electronspectroscopy, photoelectron spectroscopy, ion scattering spectroscopy, mass spectrometry and Rutherford backscatteringspectroscopy.

X-ray and electron diffraction to determine the crystallographic structure and lattice defects of materials. Laue equations andBraggs Law. Real and recipical space. Structure factor. Wave propagation of electrons.

Methods to determine microstructure and chemical composition of materials from diffraction data and emission spectra.

Study Goals The student is be able to apply the physical principles of diffraction and X-ray, electron and ion spectroscopy to explainmaterials analysis techniques.

More specifically, the student is able to:Explain X-ray and electron diffraction methods to determine the crystal structures of solids.Formulate the relation between the lattice structure in real space and recipical space.Describe the elastic and inelassic interaction between X-ray, electron, and ion beams with solids.Formulate how X-rays, electrons and ions are generated from a solid.Demonstrate how the enery, wavelength or mass of the paricles generated from a solid is used to characterize the chemistry andmicrostructure of materials.Show how electron microscopes, diffractometers, and X-ray, electron and mass spectrometers are built and operated.Apply all the above to practical cases inwhich analysis the chemical composition and microstructure of materials are determined.


Computer Use Operation of surface analysis instruments and data acquisition and processing.


Extensive lecture notes are available on Blackboard.

References from literature: T.L. Alford, L.C. Feldman, J.W. Mayer, Fundamentals of Nanoscale Film Analysis, Springer NewYork, 2007, ISBN 13: 978-0-387-29260-1

Assessment Written exam. Two parts written exam (you may use your book during the exam). Mean of the marks for both parts; lab classesreporting should be sufficient.

Remarks Hours per week: 4 lectures, practicals in 2nd education period. Other hours: self study. Course includes lab classes (1 EC).


of 186



MS4031 Waves 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. I.M. Richardson


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Expected prior knowledge A knowledge of differential equations and methods for their solution.Summary Vibrations, waves, reflection, refraction, diffraction, tranmission, propagation, damping, fourier analysis

Course Contents An introduction to wave behaviour is given focusing on important physical aspects of relevance to materials science. The courseis mathematically based and covers aspects of wave structure, propagation and attenuation in different media. The transmissionof energy and mass are discussed. Reflection, transmission refraction, and diffraction are addressed and an introduction toelectromagnetic waves is given. The course provides a grounding in the basic concepts employed in wave descriptions of physical phenomena.

Study Goals The student is able to recognise and describe the properties and behaviour of vibrations and waves and where appropriate, torelate thee descriptions to material properties and behaviour.

More specifically, the student is able to:1. recognise and describe the essential features of vibratory systems2. describe the influence of damping on wave and vibratory behaviour3. indicate the validity of approximations for light and heavy damping of wave and vibratory systems4. recognise and reproduce the essential features of wave equations5. derive general solutions for the wave equation and specific solutions subject to prescribed boundary conditions6. recognise and explain the physical meaning of functional components of such solutions

7. apply Fourier analysis to the components of a periodic disturbance8. describe electromagnetic waves and their features9. explain reflection, refraction and diffraction phenomena10. recognise vibratory and wave descriptions in material behaviour

Education Method Lectures / self study


Iain G Main, Vibrations and Waves in Physics, 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, 1994, ISBN: 0 521 44701 1.

Assessment Course assignments (50%) and written examination (50%). Students must pass both the examination and the assignments to passthe course.


of 186



MS4041 Structure of Materials 5

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. S.E. Offerman


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 23


Required for Properties of Materials (MS4081), Production of Materials (MS4101)Summary The module provides fundamental and emperical knowledge about the characteristics of the structure of materials and the

evolution of the structure during the production process and the application of the materials that are part of the material classes of metals, polymers, and ceramics. Furthermore, the module concerns the application of this knowlegde to the design of newmaterials and the optimization of the production route of materials.

Course Contents The contents of this course related to the three material classes of metals, polymers, and ceramics is as follows:

Contents Metals:* The theories describing the nucleation, growth, and coarsening kinetics of grains during diffusional phase transformations andduring the precipitation reactions in metals.* The application of these theories to describe the evolution of the structure of steel and aluminium during the productionprocess and the application.

Contents Polymers:* Polymerisation - free radical and condensation polymerisation, Shultz-Flory distribution, Mol. weight averages* Characterisation - solution properties, Flory-Huggins equation, chain statistics, endpoint distance, persistence length and chainstiffness, viscometry, intrinsic viscosity, osmotic pressure, GPC* Structure - amorphous and crystalline structures, DSC, DMA, volume temperature diagram, Glass transition and melting point,

lamellar thickness, crystallisation kinetics, relation to molecular structure

Contents Ceramics:* Structure of crystalline ceramics and glasses* Electronic structure - metals, semiconductors, insulators* Optical transitions, doping, charge carrier statistics* Point defects in ceramics, defect reactions and equilibria* Transport and mobility of electrons and ions in solids* Synthesis methods for ceramics and thin films

Study Goals The student is able to identify the governing physical principles of the formation of the structure of materials, and is able to applythese principles in the design and optimisation of the processing routes for the production of materials. This includes identifyingthe most important quantities describing the structure of a material, the basic mechanisms for (micro)structure formation, and therelation between the structure and selected properties.

For the Structure of Metals the student is able to:1.formulate expressions for the activation energy and rate of nucleation during homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleationprocesses for different geometries of the critical nucleus.2.determine the driving pressure for nucleation and the equilibrium concentrations of the phases from a molar Gibbs free energy

diagram.3.formulate expressions for the diffusion-controlled growth rate of a grain depending on the shape of the grain and the type of interface, i.e. (semi-)coherent or incoherent4.apply the concepts of the molar Gibbs free energy, phase diagrams, nucleation mechanisms and growth mechanisms to thephase transformations kinetics during the processing of a metal, and use Temperature-Time-Transformation diagrams andContinuous-Cooling-Transformation diagrams in relation to phase transformations.5.describe the principle of the Gibbs-Thompson effect and apply it in calculating the phase transformation kinetics6.apply the physical concepts for phase transformations to the microstructural formation processes that take place during theproduction and heat treatment of steel7.apply the physical concepts for precipitation reactions to the microstructural formation processes that take place during theproduction and heat treatment of aluminium alloys

For the Structure of Polymers the student is able to:1. understand the possibilities and limitations of various polymer synthesis techniques.2. know and recognise some of the standard polymer chemical structures.3. be able to explain what impact synthesis and chemical structure has on polymer material properties & selection forapplication.4. gain insight in the characterisation of polymers via various methods and the relation with the underlying polymer chainstatistics.5. be able to explain how crystalline and amorphous structures are formed, how this can be modified and controlled, and torelate this to the thermo-mechanical properties of polymers.

For the Structure of Ceramics the student is able to:1. identify and draw hcp- and fcc-based crystal structures of ionic materials and perform simple geometric calculations2. formulate defect-chemical reaction equations for ionic solids using the Kröger-Vink notation3. calculate reaction equilibria and discuss the factors that affect these equilibria4. describe the differences between the electronic structures of metals, semiconductors and insulators5. explain how defects affect optical properties, mass transport and charge transport6. discuss pros and cons of various synthesis methods for ceramic materials



D.A. Porter, K.E. Easterling, and M. Sherif, Phase transformations in metals and alloys, Chapman & Hill, 3rd edition, 2009,chapter 5Introduction to Polymers, R.J. Young and P.A. Lovell, 2nd Ed., Chapman & Hall 1997Y.-M. Chiang, D.P. Birnie and W.D. Kingery, Physical ceramics: Principles for ceramic science and engineering, Wiley & Sons,2nd edition, 1996, ch. 1 except pp. 52-67, ch. 2.1, ch. 3 (only parts treated in class, up to pag. 236)Slides used during ceramics classes and handout "An Introduction into the Electronic Structure of Semiconductors"

Prerequisites Thermodynamics and Kinetics (MS4061)Assessment Written exam. Open book. Lecture notes may be used during the exam, but not worked out examples or old exams


of 186



MS4051 Physics of Materials 6



4/4/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period 23


Required for MS3011 - Semiconductor Principles and Devices

Summary physics of materials, Schroedinger equation, operators, uncertainty relations, transitions, atoms, bonds, metals, magnetism

Course Contents Introduction quantum mechanics, particle-wave dualism, Schroedinger equation, operators, uncertainty relations, hydrogen atom,chemical bond, free electron theory, Maxwell-Boltzmann and Fermi-Dirac distributions, magnetism

Study Goals The student is able to understand the basic principles of quantum mechanics and to apply these basics to the physics of materials.

More specifically, the student is able to:1. set-up and solve the Schoedinger equation for simple cases (amongst others for a free particle and a particle in

a square well)2. describe the underlying principles that lead to electron configurations (atoms)3. understand the relation between operators, physical properties and uncertainty relations4. determine density of states for systems of identical and non-identical particles5. predict selected properties of metals on the basis of the free electron model (for instance specific heat of

electrons, Fermi level)6. describe selected processes on the basis of the free electron model (for instance Schottky effect, thermionic

emission)

7. understand physics behind magnetism (macroscopic, microscopic description): paramagnetism, (anti)ferromagnetism,domains, hysteresis loop



Textbook: J.R. Hook and H.E. Hall, Solid State Physics, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons.

Prerequisites MS4031 - Waves



of 186



MS4061 Thermodynamics and Kinetics 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. J. Sietsma


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Required for Structure of Materials (MS4041)Properties of Materials (MS4081)Production of Materials (MS4101)

Summary thermodynamics, Gibbs free energy, binary alloys, phase diagram, chemical potential, diffusion, Fick's laws,(semi-)coherent interfaces, incoherent interfaces

Course Contents The module introduces concepts of thermodynamics and kinetics in materials that are essential for understanding the formationand behaviour of materials. Thermodynamical subjects are, a.o.: Gibbs free energy, chemical potential, ideal and real solutions,phase diagrams, Gibbs phase rule, Gibbs-Thomson effect, ternary systems, phase transformations. Kinetics subjects are, a.o.:atomic mechanism of diffusion, substitutional and interstitial diffusion, high-diffusivity paths, diffusion in ternary alloys. Relatedsubjects that are treated are crystal interfaces and microstructural phenomena.

Study Goals The student is able to explain the essential features of thermodynamic quantities, kinetic phenomena and interface characteristicsrelevant to metallic microstructures, and to apply these to the processes that determine the microstructure.

More specifically, the student is able to:1. formulate the essentials of the concepts of Gibbs free energy and chemical potential, and to formulate their

relevance to the atomic behaviour in crystalline structures2. apply the models for ideal and regular solutions to problems concerning the behaviour of binary alloys

3. read binary phase diagrams and to explain the relation between phase diagrams and free energy vs.composition curves4. apply the Gibbs phase rule5. identify the main features of ternary phase diagrams6. formulate the process of atomic diffusion in a crystalline structure7. apply Ficks first and second laws, formulated either in terms of concentration gradients or in terms of

chemical-potential gradients to diffusion- and transformation-related problems8. formulate the essentials of interdiffusion in substitutional binary alloys, and relate these to the Kirkendall

effect9. identify the significance of high-diffusion paths for the kinetics processes in metallic microstructures10. formulate the essentials of different types of interfaces between grains of either the same of different

crystalline structures11. involve the effects of local strains in the description of the characteristics of interfaces12. apply the characteristics of interfaces to the formation of second-phase particles13. formulate the role of interfaces in the kinetics of mixed-mode phase transformations



D.A. Porter and K.E. Easterling, Phase transformations in metals and alloys, Chapman & Hill, 3rd edition, 2009, chapters 1,2,3

Assessment Written exam, open book


of 186



MS4071 Materials in Art and Design 3



Assistent J.A. Woelders-van der Burg


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 1


Summary Culture, art, archaeology, history, degradation, authenticity

Course Contents In recent years materials science is increasingly applied to the study of art and archaeological objects. This field is known asarchaeometry and it includes three research directions. First of all, authenticity studies on art objects rely on material analysis of the object. Second, artworks suffer from degradation studies that need to be understood at a materials science level. Third,stylistic developments in art history can often be related to the development of new materials or production techniques.

The main challenge in this field is to bridge the interface between the humanities and the sciences. Interpreting the findings of materials science in a non-scientific, historical context is the crucial skill in this course. Besides literature study and lecturing, thecourse includes excursions to art and archaeological collections.

Study Goals The students is able to:- give a general overview of archaeometric approaches in material cultural heritage- identify the archaeometric component of archaeological or art historical research questions- describe relevant analytical techniques in archaeometry- interprete analytical data in the archaeological and art historical context and discuss the findings with specialists from thecultural heritage domain



After an introductory part, the class will work on a case from the cultural heritage field, usually provided by a museumconservator or curator.


Remarks Laboratory work: depending on the case different analytical techniques may be applied (light microscopy, electron microscopy,x-ray powder diffraction).


of 186



MS4081 Mechanics of Materials 4


Instructor Prof.dr. S.J. Picken



2/2/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period 23


Required for MS4011 - Mechanical Properties of Materials

Summary Elasticity, plasticity, viscoelasticity, strain rate, fracture mechanics, orientation, melt, entanglement, ageing, polymer glass,liquid crystallinity, mechanical properties, polymer properties, material properties

Course Contents Part on Mechanical Properties- Multiaxial stress and strain, elastic and plastic material behaviour, strain hardening, plastic instability, effects of strain rate andtemperature, super plasticity- Lineair-elastic fracture mechanics: stress intensity, effects of crack tip plasticity and stress state, energy release rate,determination of critical values- Elastic-plastic fracture mechanics: J integral, crack tip opening displacement, determination of critical values

Part on Polymers- Mechanical Properties: modulus, strength, Time-temperature superposition, WLF equation, Maxwell, Kelvin-Voigt andBurgers' model, Bolzmann superposition principle, brittle-ductile behaviour, DMA, secondary relaxations- Introduction to processing: injection moulding operation window, extruder-diagram, thermal conduction

Study Goals Part on Mechanical PropertiesThe student is able to employ mechanical quantities such as stress, strain and basic fracture mechanical quantities to describeelastic and plastic deformation and the onset of crack growth in solids. Furthermore, the student is able to calculate basic elasticand plastic material response and fracture behaviour based on the relevant material properties and understands how toexperimentally determine these material properties.

More specifically, the student is able to:1. explain the concepts of stress and strain, distinguishing normal and shear components on the one hand and principalcomponents on the other2. transform multiaxial stress and strain states to a rotated set of axes, both analytically and using Mohr's circle3. formulate the concepts of engineering stress and strain and true stress and strain4. quantify the relation between stress and strain for an elastically deforming isotropic material5. predict the stress state that leads to the onset of plasticity and calculate the subsequent direction of plastic strain for isotropicmaterial using the flow criteria of Tresca and Von Mises6. formulate the concepts of effective stress and effective strain7. explain experimental methods to quantify plastic material behaviour for different stress states, more specifically the strainhardening behaviour of the material8. predict plastic instability for uniaxial and biaxial stress states

9. identify the principles and limitations of the fracature mechanical concepts stress intensity, energy release rate, J integral andcrack tip opening displacement10. explain the effects of crack tip plasticity and stress state on fracture behaviour11. explain accepted experimental procedures to obtain critical values for fracture mechanics parameters12. analyse a basic fracture mechanical problem on the basis of material properties, geometry and mechanical load

Part on Properties of PolymersThe student is able to:1. describe the complex mechanics of polymers and how this is based on polymer dynamics2. explain the ingredients of the Maxwell, Kelvin-Voigt and Burgers model and their application for modelling of polymermechanics3. explain the principles of dynamic mechanical analysis, and how the obtained results are related to the underlying polymerdynamics and structure4. apply time-temperature superposition, and to explain how this arises from free-volume considerations5. apply the Boltzmann superposition principle to describe polymer behaviour under complex loading situations6. understand the specific nature of polymer processing, how this is related to viscosity, molecular mass, thermal conduction,and how it relates to the mechanical properties of the resulting product

Education Method Lectures (including exercises)Literature and StudyMaterials

- Chapters 1 - 4 of Metal Forming by W.F. Hosford and M. Caddell. provided as a reader- Fracture Mechanics by M. Janssen, J. Zuidema and R.J.H. Wanhill, 2nd edition, DUP (2002)- Collection of Exercises on Fracture Mechanics, available on Blackboard- Introduction to Polymers, R.J. Young and P.A. Lovell, 2nd Ed., Chapman & Hall 1997

Suggested additional literature on polymers:- Materials Science of Polymers for Engineers by T.A. Osswald and G. Menges, Hanser Publishers, Mï¿½nchen- Gert Strobl, The Physics of Polymers, 2nd ed.

Assessment Written examination during which the study material may be consulted. Other forms of information, such as notes or worked-outproblems, are not allowed!


of 186



MS4091 Material Connections 4


Instructor Dr.ir. M.J.M. Hermans


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12

Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge Basic knowledge of the structure of metals.

Summary Welding, NDT, Adhesive bonding, Mechanical Fastening, Joining, Fusion Welding, Heat Flow, Arc

Course Contents Joining technologies are of critical importance to construction and assembly of virtually all components, and structures found inmodern society. This module provides an introduction to the engineering aspects of joining techniques including mechanicalfasteners, fusion welding, brazing and soldering and adhesive bonding. The influence of joining on material properties and thesuitability of the choice of joining techniques for selected applications is addressed. Methods for assessing the quality of jointsare also discussed, with a focus on the non-destructive methods most commonly employed for welded and adhesively bondedstructures.

Study Goals The student is able to describe the basic principles, advantages and limitations of different joining processes, indicate appropriatetesting techniques and describe the influence of welding thermal cycles on common structural materials.

More specifically, the student is able to:1.describe available joining methods including welding, brazing, soldering, mechanical connections and adhesive bonding2.tell on common engineering applications for joining technologies3.describe common none destructive testing techniques and assess their suitability for a range of joining related tasks4.describe the main features of common joining methods

5.identify advantages and limitations pertaining to different joining methods and apply such an appraisal to process selection6.identify and explain the influence of thermal and mechanical actions pertaining to the joining of common engineering materials7.describe common types of joining defects and be able to describe potential influences on the resultant connection8.identify causes and describe the affects of residual stresses generated during fusion welding9.explain the variable nature of common thermal joining methods and identify factors contributing to process variance10.describe the basic chemistry of common adhesives and recognise the influence of surface condition on bond formation

Education Method Lectures / self study


ï¿½lecture notes for the course are available through blackboardï¿½den Ouden, G. and Hermans, M.J.M. Welding Technology, VSSD, Delft, 2009.

References from literature:ï¿½Kou, S. Welding Metallurgy, Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition. ISBN 0-471-43491-4ï¿½AWS Welding Handbook, American Welding Society, Volumes 1 to 5.ï¿½Norrish, J. Advanced Welding Processes, IOP Publishing Ltd., 1992, ISBN 0-85274-326-2ï¿½Lancaster, J. The Physics of Welding, 2nd Edition, Pergamon Press, 1986, ISBN 0-08-034075-X

Assessment 50% by project50% by examination (written exam)

The examination will be 2 hour closed book. Students must pass the examination to pass the course.Department 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering

of 186



MS4101 From Ore to Plate: Production of Materials 3


Instructor Dr.ir. R.H. Petrov


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23

Course Language EnglishRequired for MS3021 (Metals Science), MS4011 (Mechanical Properties), MS3412 (Processing of Metals)

Summary Aluminium, steel, aluminium production, steel production, aluminium alloys , hot rolling, casting, casting technology.

Course Contents Casting Technology of (semi)-continuous casting of aluminium alloys; Hot rolling technology of steels; Insight in metallurgicalprocesses during casting of aluminium alloys and hot rolling of steels.

Study Goals The student is able to understand and to explain general principles of metals production processes

More specifically, the student is able to:1. describe relationships between process parameters and microstructure and their properties2. apply those relationships3. link the relationships to material models4. identify steps to optimise process conditions with regard to quality, properties and energy consumption



Course material:Syllabus Continuous Casting of Aluminium Alloys (made available on Blackboard)Selected papers and review articles from literature (made available on Blackboard)

Lecture notes made available through Blackboard after class

References from literature:J.Beddoes, M.J. Bibby, Principles of Metal Manufacturing Processes, Arnold, ISBN 0340 73162 1

Prerequisites MS4081 (Properties of Materials)

Assessment Written examination.


of 186



MS4111 Thin Film Materials 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. G.C.A.M. Janssen


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45


Summary thin films, coatings, low friction coatings, film deposition, film microstructure, film stress, microelectronic structure, MEMSstructure

Course Contents The course Thin Film Materials consists of 14 lectures:

1.Introduction, PVD2.CVD, reactive sputterdeposition3.Adsorption4.Thermodynamics5.LEED, RHEED etc.6.Surface diffusion7.STM hands on (lab class)8.AFM- nano indenter demo (lab class)9.Thin film growth

10. In-situ diagnostics11. Hard coatings + assignments12. Low friction coatings +assignments13. Semiconductors14.Stress in coatings

Study Goals The student is able to discuss the relations deposition parameters - microstructure and microstucture - properties.

More specifically, the student is able to:1. reproduce the various vacuum deposition technologies2. apply thermodynamics to surface tension and adsorption3. explain nucleation and film growth in UHV4. describe the various techniques used for surface characterization5. reproduce, and comment on the prevailing ideas on hardness of coatings6. list several low friction coatings and the measurements on these coatings7. describe the fabrication techniques used in micro-electronics and MEMS and explain the needs and limitations of thesetechniques8. reproduce the prevailing theories on size effects in thin films9. reproduce the prevailing theories on stress in thin films and is able to discuss the research literature on stress in thin films


Computer Use for information retrieval


Chapter 2 of "Thin Film Materials" by L.B.Freund and S.Suresh, pp 1-85.Key references quoted by Freund and Suresh will be anounced on Blackboard prior to the course.


Remarks Includes a visit to the thin films deposition lab.


of 186



MS4131NS Solid State Physics 2 3



x/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1



Expected prior knowledge Computational Materials Science MS3031 or equivalent (1st year MSc level courses covering quantum mechanics, statistical

physics, and solid state physics).Summary Computer modelling of materials. Quantum mechanical basis for materials properties and behaviour. Explanations for trends in

materials properties. Modern modelling techniques. Simulation of materials structure, change, and properties. Student computerprojects.

Course Contents 1. Universal equation of state for metals.2. structure maps.3. The diatomic molecule.4. Real space tight-binding electronic structure models.5. Band gaps: origins and consequences.6. s-p bonding and a case study in silicon.7. Free electron theory; Properties of free electron metals.8. The transition metals; Structural stability of compounds.9. Modern quantitative theory; Where band theory breaks down.10. Individual computer lab.

Study Goals The student is able to predict and explain basic physical properties of solids based on real space electronic structure models.


1.reformulate the equation of state in terms of dimensionless parameters, and relate to each other the cohesive energy, bulkmodulus, and volume per atom for the elemental solids2.explain the interatomic bonding in terms of tight-binding Hamiltonian and relate it to the concepts of covalency, ionicity, andbond order3.explain and derive the Bloch theorem for the linear chain and ring configurations4.derive the band structure and density of states of simple crystals in terms of tight-binding parameters5.relate band energy to bond energy and stability, such as relevant for Jahn-Teller and other distortion effects in molecules andcrystals6.apply the moment theorem to predict whether ordering or clustering will occur in solid solutions7.explain Friedel oscillations and relate these to the RKKY model for magnetic coupling and the occurrence of long periodsuperstructures in certain alloys8.explain and predict the occurrence of band gaps in crystalline solids9.apply the free electron model for the prediction of the properties of "normal" metals10.apply the Friedel tight-binding model to the properties of transition metals and alloys11.use the basic properties of s-p-d hybridization to explain and rationalize the occurrence and stability of compounds and theirmost likely crystal structures12.identify situations in which band theory is likely to fail

Note: The grade is the average of homework assignments that test the learning objectives.

Education Method Lectures and computer projects.

Computer Use Extensive. Some of the exercises will benefit from the ability to use a computer algebra program of your choice (maple,mathematica, octave, etc.) or some low-level programming (C, fortran, basic, etc.)


Some lecture notes are available on Blackboard/hand-outs.References from literature: "Electronic Structure of Materials", by A.P. Sutton (Oxford Science Publishers 1996), ISBN 0-19-851754-8.

Assessment Oral exam + project presentation (oral examination, short written reports of the computer projects, one short presentation in frontof fellow students for effectively communicating the results of one of the computer projects).

Design Content Students should design modeling plans.


of 186



MS4141TU Fracture Mechanics 3




Non, self study

Education Period None (Self Study)

Start Education 1



Summary Stress Intensity Factor, Energy Release Rate, J integral, Crack Tip Opening Displacement, Fatigue, Sustained Load Fracture,Fracture behaviour

Course Contents Linear-elastic fracture mechanics: Concepts Stress Intensity Factor K and Energy Release Rate G; Test Methods

Elastic-plastic Fracture Mechanics: Concepts J integral and Crack Opening Displacement; Test Methods

Crack growth concepts: Fatigue, Sustained Load Fracture, Stress Corrosion

Fracture Mechanics in Metals: Effect of Material Behaviour

Study Goals The student is able to select a suitable approach for a basic fracture mechanical problem and can analyse this problem on thebasis of material properties, geometry and mechanical load. Furthermore, he is able to interpret results of accepted fracturemechanical test procedures.

More specifically, the student is able to:1. formulate the significance of fracture mechanics2. identify the principles, application ranges, limitations and interrelations of the fracture mechanical concepts stress intensity,energy release rate, J integral and crack tip opening displacement

3. explain standardised experimental procedures to obtain critical values for the fracture mechanics parameters stress intensity,energy release rate, J integral and crack tip opening displacement4. select stress intensity solutions for basic geometries, taking finite specimen size and free surface corrections into account5. explain the effects of crack tip plasticity and stress state on fracture behaviour6. explain the rising R-curve concept and the methods for R-curve determination and compute the maximum amount of stablecrack growth and the critical K or G value7. explain the Feddersen concept for plane stress testing and compute plane stress residual strength8. analyse a basic fracture mechanical problem on the basis of material properties, geometry and mechanical load9. identify the effects on fatigue crack growth rate of load, load ratio and load variations10. predict fatigue lifetime for constant amplitude loading and explain methods to predict fatigue lifetime under variableamplitude loading11. explain the principles of time-to-failure and growth rate testing for environmentally assisted cracking, identify experimentalpitfalls and indicate the practical significance of this testing12. predict lifetime for environmentally assisted cracking under constant load

Education Method This module should be done by self study, i.e. no lectures are scheduled. Contact the lecturer if you have any questions.


-) The book "Fracture Mechanics" by M. Janssen, J. Zuidema and R.J.H. Wanhill, 2nd edition, DUP (2002), available at VSSD.This course covers chapters 1 to 7, 9 and 10, with the exception of:ÂÂ- The Weight Function Method (p. 52);

ÂÂ- Section 7.5: The KIc Specimen Size Requirement;ÂÂ- Stress Ratio Effect on Fatigue Threshold Stress Intensity Range (p. 221-222);ÂÂ- Section 9.8: Fatigue Crack Initiation.

-) A collection of "Exercises on Fracture Mechanics", available on Blackboard

Assessment Written examinations are scheduled twice a year. During the examination the book Fracture Mechanics may be consulted. Otherforms of information, such as notes or worked-out problems, are not allowed!


of 186



MS4151 Recycling Engineering Materials 3

Responsible Instructor Dr. Y. Yang


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23


Expected prior knowledge General knowledge of materials science and engineeringInorganic chemistry

Summary Engineering materials, materials cycle, materials scarcity, sustainability, secondary resources, materials recycling, recyclingtechnology and processes, metals, metal scrap, polymers and plastics, composites, ceramics, glasses, end of life (EOL) products,waste, waste management, environment.

Course Contents Recycling of engineering materials from secondary resources is important both for environment protection and for a sustainablematerials supply, and it closes the loop of the whole materials cycle. The main objective of this module is to give students withboth engineering and science background a proper understanding of recycling as part of complete materials production andsupply chain, and a general overview of available technologies and current practice. This module will cover the recycling issuesof the common engineering materials such as metals (ferrous and nonferrous metals, alloys), polymers/plastics, composites,ceramics, and glasses. In the module five aspects of materials recycling will be discussed: (1) overview of common engineeringmaterials, (2) resources and pre-treatment technologies, (3) recycling processes and best available technologies, (4) productquality, energy consumption and economic analysis, (5) environmental impacts and waste management.

Study Goals The students are able to obtain an overview about the importance and key steps for recycling of major engineering materials, andto explain in general why and how to recycle major engineering materials.

In particular the students should be able to:

(1) understand the loop of the materials cycle and the role of recycling to close the loop of the cycle.(2) describe how major engineering materials are recycled: the best available technologies and industrial practice.(3) identify the sources and destinations for materials recycling.(4) analyse the economics and social and environmental impact of recycling.

Education Method Lectures complemented by case studies and industrial excursion to a Dutch metals recycling company.


Compilation of selected books chapters and papers, handouts.

Reader Compilation of various book chapters and journal/web articles in digital pdf form.

Assessment 70% written exam and 30% case studies and an industrial tour.


MS4161 Engineering with Materials 10


Contact Hours / Weekx/x/x/x x/x/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1



Expected prior knowledge Wiskunde: analyse, differentiaal vergelijkingen, lineaire algebraMechanica: sterkteleer, staticaNatuur- en Scheikunde: VWO-niveauMateriaalkunde op "Callister niveau"

Summary Materials: properties, structure, processing, selection and application, in the context of an assignment.

Course Contents â¢Assignments are carried out in groups of 2 to 4 students.â¢Projects can involve any aspect of materials science and engineering, including material design, the link between structure andproperties, material characterisation and/or material application, with emphasis on design or engineering applications.

â¢The assignments begin in the first period and run concurrently with subjects which provide necessary background information.â¢Assignments are designed to stretch the knowledge and understanding of important aspects of materials science andengineering. Aspects cover materials under extreme conditions, such as high temperatures (e.g., power generation), lowtemperatures (arctic and cryogenic materials), bio materials or materials with special properties (e.g. fire resistant or lightweight).â¢Projects and groups are assigned based on the background of students. Groups may change projects with the agreement of others and the project supervisors.â¢Each project group is expected to deliver a report describing the project content, execution and outcomes, highlightingmaterial science and engineering aspects of the project. The reports represents 80% of the course assessment and will be markedby the project supervisor. In addition, each group will be expected to make a short (~5 minute) presentation at the start of thesecond period and a longer (~15 minute) presentation at the end of the study. The presentation will be assessed by MSE staff andrep-resents 20% of the assessment.

Study Goals Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:â¢determine appropriate materials and selection procedures for a specific application, on the basis of material structure andproperty criteria.â¢relate knowledge gained to material structure and properties, material selection methods and, where applicable, applications toa specific function.â¢describe relevant material production routes and the factors influencing material suitability for their chosen application.

â¢explain material treatment(s) necessary for the chosen applicationâ¢understand the environmental impact of the production and recycling of relevant materials.

Education Method Project

Assessment - Presentation (20%)- Written report (80%)- Oral feedback session


of 186



MS4171 Lifetime Performance of Materials 3




4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents This course comprises several aspects that negatively affect strength, appearance, function and/or integrity of material classes

metals, polymers and ceramics. Relevant phenomena are described such as:- Corrosion- Degradation- Fatigue- Creep

Introduction (4 lectures)Definitions of sustainability and durability in context of materials applicationMaterials as part of a systemFrom design to end of lifeEnergy, raw materials, safety, costs and environmental issues.Degradation of materials: various physical and chemical phenomenaFocus on increasing life time of materials in constructions

Materials classes (2 lectures)Special issues for the four groups

Metals: e.g. sensitivity to corrosionPolymers: e.g. UV influenceCeramics: e.g. brittlenessCombinations : incompatibility (example automotive)

Degradation of materials (2 lectures)Loss of functionIntegrity of constructions, corrosion and mechanical issuesReliability of devicesAppearance, esthetics, gloss, colour in architecture and automotive etc

Prevention, self-healing and retarding of degradation processes.Optimised design of constructionNew materials, thermomechanical treatmentSurface treatmentCoatingsCathodic protection

Corrosion and durability (8 lectures)

IntroductionA need for mechanistic information on corrosionRetard the corrosion process by thermal and surface treatmentsRetard the corrosion process by coatings and Cathodic Protection

Forms of corrosion, phenomena and mechanismsGeneral corrosion vs local coorsionLocal corrosion forms : pitting, crevice, galvanic.High temperature corrosion and oxidation including ceramicsBlistering and adhesion of coatings, filiform corrosion

Electrochemical mechanisms of corrosion phenomenaPolarisation diagramsPassivity, anodic protectionCathodic protectionCoated materials1.Metallic layers2.Conversion layers3.Polymer layers

Mechanical properties and durability (8 lectures)FatigueIntroduction: S/N curves, fatigue limitMetals: cyclic deformation, low and high cycle fatigue, initiation and propagation, types of S/N curves, effect of inclusions,methods to avoid fatigue damagePolymers and polymer composites: S/N curves, mechanisms of initiation & crack growth, thermal softening, polymer composites

CreepIntroduction: strain vs. time, stress vs. rupture timeMetals & ceramics: extrapolation procedures, suitable materialsPolymers: effect strain rate and temperature on stress-strain behaviour, creep compliance, Poisson's ratio, creep rupture

Environment-assisted crackingIntroduction: definitionMetals: hydrogen embrittlement, stress-corrosion cracking, liquid-metal embrittlement, neutron embrittlementPolymers: physical EAC, chemical EAC

Study Goals yet to be defined



Handouts



of 186



MS4181 New Trends in Materials 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. L. Nicola


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2



Course Contents In this course the students are actively involved to discover the new technological horizon in the field of applied mesoscopic

materials. Fundamental physical and mechanical aspects involved in these new technologies shall be addressed. Examples of the topics are: self-healing materials, photonic crystals for optical communication, solar cells, holographic data storage, singleelectron electronic devices, biomedical materials and drug delivery systems.

Study Goals The student is able to:- have a basic understanding of the physics and mechanics of mesoscopic materials- extract and order information from open literature and the internet- write concise reports- communicate orally and give a presentation- generate new creative ideas to innovate current technological developments

Education Method Project based learning in small groups.


Students will be helped in finding the relevant journal papers and material from the literature when necessary.

Assessment The assessment will be based on oral presentations, a progress written report and active participation of students in thediscussion of the topics during classes.


MS4191 Materials for Conventional Energy Production 2



x/x/x/x


Start Education 1



Course Contents Assessment of materials for conventional energy production. This may include hydrocarbon recovery, refining, transport, orpower generation. Materials for nuclear power generation may also be examined.

Study Goals Focus on materials requirements for a selected aspect of conventional energy production.

Education Method Self study


Review of open literature

Assessment Written report


MS4201 Art History and Archaeology 4




x/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period Different, to be announcedCourse Language English

Summary Culture, art history, archaeology, history, materials

Course Contents This course provides a general overview of art history and archaeology. It is intended for students with a technical background.Prior knowledge in the humanities is not required. The course is an introduction to the main style periods of the visual arts,ranging from the early Stone Age to Contemporary Art. The course also covers the main themes of artistic representation indifferent periods.

Study Goals The student is able to:- give an overview of the cultural heritage of mankind from the Early Stone Age to Contemporary Art and name crucial momentsin its development- globally describe the main style periods in art and archaeology, define their visual charactertistics and approximately dateimportant style periods- perform a basic stylistical analysis of a given artefact and classify the object into major style movements of art history andarchaeology- identify the main topics of artistic representation in the period of Prehistory, Classical Antiquity and Christian Art



Yet to be defined



of 186



MS4211 Materials at High Temperature 3




0/x/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2



Required for Specialisation Course Materials for Energy and Environmental ImpactExpected prior knowledge MS3021 Metals Science

MS4011 Mechanical PropertiesWB4438 Energy, Society and SustainabilityWB4422 Thermal Power Plants

Summary This module gives a thorough introduction to the use of materials in systems for energy conversion. The pivotal role thatmaterials play in the efficiency with which primary energy can be converted into electricity or other energy carriers and hence onthe environmental impact. The role of materials in the life time expectancy of energy conversion systems will be elucidated sothat the student will be able to use this knowledge for the design of new systems and for maintenance and repair of existinginstallations. Also the consequences of changes in operational modes of the energy systems can be assessed.

Course Contents This module presents the role that materials play in energy systems on the basis of fact sheets, figures and tables. The followingsubjects are treated:First an overview will be given of the materials used in- conventional systems such as steam boilers, turbines and combustion turbines- advances steam systems operating under extreme conditions, new designs such as externally fired gas turbines and hightemperature fuel cells- nuclear systems both fission and fusion, covering radiation damage to fuels and structural materials

The systems and components will be analyzed in terms of the processes that have influence on the behavior of the materials. Themost important influences for short term and long term behavior will be treated. Processes such as creep, fatigue, thermo-mechanical fatigue, corrosion and the methods for assessment, avoidance and repair of the effects of these processes will betreated.

Study Goals Insight into the role of materials in design and operation of conventional and advanced energy conversion systems involvingelevated temperatures

Education Method Lectures, presentations by students

Computer Use Search of information on the Internet


Lecture notes and sheets

Assessment Active participation during all lectures and to give a presentation

Department 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering3mE Department Process & Energy

MS4221 Materials for the Hydrogen Economy 2

Responsible Instructor Dr. A.J. Bottger


0/0/2/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Expected prior knowledge Basic knowledge of materials science i.e. microstructural features (grain, texture, defects), materials transport (diffusionprocesses), crystal structures.Thermodynamics basics.

Course Contents New technologies require new materials. This course starts with a brief overview on renewable energy sources. Within thatframework the effect of a hydrogen economy on production processes, transportation and storage will be discussed. In particular

materials' requirements and behaviour are addressed: how do materials interact with a hydrogen containing environment,microstructural stability, membrane technology for gas separation from molecular sieves to atomic separation, and the state of the art of hydrogen storage materials.

Study Goals After following this course students should1.have insight in the available renewable energy sources and their pro and cons2. have insight in the role of hydrogen in view of energy supply2.have knowledge on the main failure mechanisms evoked by a hydrogen containing environment3.be able to describe processes and principles used to produce hydrogen gas4.know the principles and mechanisms used to separate hydrogen molecules from a gas mixture5.know the materials used for H-gas separation and and their behavior (lifetime)6.know the principles and mechanisms used to store hydrogen7.know the materials used for storage and their behavior (lifetime)

Education Method Combined class room teaching and self study


Handouts, recent papers

Assessment The assessment consists of two parts a written exam (open book) and a presentation about selected topics.

Enrolment / Application Please enroll through BlackboardDepartment 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering

Contact Questions or more info? Contact dr. A.J.BÃ¶ttger email: [email protected]

of 186



MS4232-09 Biomaterials 6

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. E.L. Fratila-Apachitei

Instructor Dr.ir. I. Apachitei

Instructor Dr. J. Duszczyk


0/0/4/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period 45


Expected prior knowledge MS3421-Developments in production and processing

Course Contents In improving patient care, especially in relation with tissue loss or dysfunction, the use of proper biomaterials plays a key role.The shift from tissue removal to tissue replacement and at present, tissue regeneration is driven by the (i)evolution of biomaterials from bioinert to bioactive and bioresorbable associated with advances in molecular biology, and (ii) the increasinglycomplex biomedical problems of an aging and more active population. As an example, the existing total joint replacements havea 75 - 85 % survivability at 15 years. However, since they were first introduced in the 1960s, average life expectancy increasedby at least ten years impacting on the quality of the bone and implants survivability that deteriorate with age. As a consequence,improved implant survivability by 10 - 20 years and alternative treatment methods that delay or eliminate the use of prosthesesare badly needed.

The Biomaterials course covers in an interdisciplinary approach (biomaterial engineering and biology) the backgroundinformation on type, composition, processing and properties of biomaterials along with their evolution. Metallic, polymeric andceramic materials are included and their properties are described and compared with those of biological materials. The mainmethodologies for biomaterials characterization are covered as well as the procedures for biomaterials standardization and

regulation. Further, the interactions between biomaterials and specific biological environments are explained and used fordefining the specific requirements and selection principles for biomaterials. Here, biomaterials and medical devices fororthopedics, cardiovascular system, tissue engineering, regenerative medicine are covered. Finally, the research directions andapproaches for development of novel biomaterials are outlined. Next to lectures, the students will be involved in mini-researchprojects where they will have to solve biomaterials related problems for various biomedical devices/applications. In this respect,they will interact with producers and suppliers of biomaterials/devices or with clinicians.

Study Goals At the end of the course the students will be able to:1. List and identify the type of biomaterials used in biomedical applications that include: orthopedics, cardiovascular system,tissue engineering, regenerative medicine2. Define the properties of biomaterials and their property map (range of property values)3. Describe structure-property relationships for various biomaterials4. Describe the methodologies for biomaterials characterization and regulation5. Compare and contrast biomaterials and biological materials6. Explain the main interactions between a biomaterial and a biological environment7. Describe the principles for biomaterials selection and design8. Describe the processes and approaches used for functionalization of biomaterials9. Identify, analyse and describe a biomaterial problem10. Set biomaterials requirements for a specific medical device based on communication with clinicians11. Search, judge, find and present sound and innovative materials solutions to biomedical problems

Education Method Lectures, case studies and mini-research projects

Assessment Written exam together with oral presentation and written report from research projects


of 186



MT113 Design of Advanced Marine Vehicles 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. J.W. Frouws

Instructor Dr.ir. J.A. Keuning

Instructor Prof.ir. D. Stapersma

Instructor Prof.dr.ir. T.J.C. van Terwisga


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45


Course Contents An introduction in advanced marine vehicle types.The basic principles of the different types of advanced marine vehicles will be explained, supported by data of recently buildvessels.Several types of propulsion systems such as but not limited to waterjets, cavitating and non cavitating propellors.Energy supply by means of high speed diesels and gasturbines.A basic introduction in the application and aspects of normal and advanced materials in designing and building these vessels.Hydrodynamic aspects, the contradiction between resistance and propulsion and on the other hand ships movements will be dealtwith.Safety aspects and possible fault aspects in the design and building processes.Design strategies in the design of advanced marine vehicles.Ship owner requirements and the economical evaluation of these vessel types, future development expectations looking to thedifferent types.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.list characteristics of advanced, fast and unconventional vessels

2.describe resistance and powering aspects of fast vessels3.describe and explain selection of power generation options on board of advanced and fast vessels4.describe the basics of the behaviour of fast vessels in a seaway5.describe design aspects and principles of advanced and fast vessels

Education Method Lectures 0/4/0/0


J.W. Frouws, "Design of advanced marine vehicles.", 2000, including appendices.

Prerequisites mt112, mt215



Design Content Design strategy of advanced marine vehicles and design methods for the basic components. Synthasis of the total design.

Department 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology

MT1401 Law for MT 3Responsible Instructor Prof.ir. J.J. Hopman


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Course Contents The course aims to provide students of Maritime Technology with an introduction into the basics of Maritime Law and ShippingLaw. The following topics are discussed during the course:

- Defining the ship and ship components and and the legal implications involved.- Regulating the ship. International and national law, Registration of ships, Ship Nationality,- Supervision of ships. Flag-State and Port-State Control. Role of Classification Societies.

- Ship-building contracts- Operation and commercial exploitation of the ship. Charter-parties, contracts of carriage.- Maritime Casualties. Collision, salvage, limitation of liability. - Risk management and insurance- Case study: The Otapan.

Study Goals The aim of the course to raise the awareness of the students of main legal issues in maritime law, to enable students to accesslegal sources independently, to foster a basic understanding of how maritime law is structured and what it entails and to enablestudents to access sources of maritime law directly.

Education Method The Course is taught in Lecture-format with active particaption from students being required in preparation in advance andparticipation during the lecture. Legal sources will be made available through a reader, additional materials will be madeavailable through Blackboard.

Assessment Students will be required to write a paper on a subject to be announced within a fixed time-frame.


of 186



MT213 Marine Engineering C 2

Responsible Instructor Nabestaanden van H.T. Grimmelius


0/0/2/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Course Contents Maintenance:Maintenance as part of the ship's life cycleMaintenance cost evaluationRisk based maintenanceReliability and availability:Failure mode and effect analysisFailure rate and fault distributionsMake a graphic estimate of a Weibull fault distributionsReliability and maintainabilityCalculation of availabilityEvent trees & fault trees: operational approach to systemsFault & event tree analysisCondition Monitoring:Concept of (intelligent) Condition MonitoringSome techniques for intelligent condition monitoringCondition monitoring of diesel engines

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.explain the different maintenance concepts: preventive, corrective, condition based.

2.explain the impact of different maintenance concepts on a ship's Life Cycle Costs3.explain the difference between an fault tree and an event tree4.perform a fault and event tree analysis5.perform and interpret a Failure Mode and Effect Analysis6.calculate reliability and availability from simple failure rate distributions7.use and interpret Weibull distribution applied to failure rates8.explain several suitable techniques for conditions monitoring of diesel engines9.interpret condition monitoring concepts



Course material:H.T. Grimmelius: Reader EuroMTEC (on BlackBoard).Selected papers.

References from literature:Vuèiniæ, B.: "MA-CAD, Maintenance Concept Adjustment and Design", PhD thesis Delft University of Technology, ISBN 90-370-0112-2, Delft, 1997.

Prerequisites mt219

Assessment Written examPercentage of Design 10%

Design Content System lay-out optimisation with regard to maintenance and reliability


of 186



MT216 Introduction Combustion Engines 3



0/2/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23


Course Contents Basic thermodynamic principles.Piston engines both Diesel and Otto principle.

Working & construction principle: 4 stroke, 2 stroke, trunk piston, crosshead construction, low/medium/high speedIndicator diagram: work, mean indicated and effective pressureIgnition and combustion: mixture formation, ignition methods, ignition delay, premixed and diffusive combustionPerformance: efficiency, power and torque, fuel consumption, air consumptionPressure charging: turbocharging, single stage and two stageOperating envelope: naturally aspirating, turbocharged enginesPower densityThermodynamic analysis: air standard cycles, Otto, Diesel and Seiliger cycle

Gas turbines

Working principleIdeal simple Brayton cycle with and without lossesRegenerative cycleAdvanced cycles

Operating envelopeConstruction and installation

Fuel characteristics

EmissionsSourceMethods to reduce emissions: internal & end of pipe

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.describe the main characteristics of diesel and otto engines and gas turbines2.describe the main characteristics of fuels3.describe the working principles of the 2-stroke engine and of the 4-stroke engines and sketch the associated indicator (p-V)diagram4.define and apply the thermodynamic concepts power, work, heat, mean effective pressure and efficiency5.define compression ratio, stroke-bore ratio, specific fuel consumption, air-fuel ratio, air excess ratio and mean piston speed6.explain the purpose and working principle of turbocharging and to distinguish the different types7.explain the limits of the operating envelope of a diesel and otto engine and the influence of turbocharging8.explain methods to broaden the operating envelope

9.explain the limits to power and power density10.describe the pollutant emissions of combustion engines, the measures to reduce these and methods of exhaust gas cleaning11.describe for Otto engines the methods of mixture formation (carburettors and fuel injection), the requirements with regard toafr, the advantages of injection systems compared to carburettors12.describe for diesel engines the differences between direct injection (DI) and indirect injection (IDI) systems with theiradvantages and disadvantages13.explain the influence of design parameters to engine performance by using air-standard cycles14.apply the Otto cycle to calculate/predict Otto engine performance15.apply Seiliger cycle, also called dual cycle, to calculate/predict diesel engine performance16.describe the working principles of the gas turbine17.apply the Brayton cycle to calculate/predict gas turbine performance for simple and advanced gasturbine cycles18.explain the influence of the pressure ratio and of the temperature ratio on efficiency and power density19.explain the influence of compressor, turbine and heat exchanger losses on gas turbine performance (efficiency and powerdensity)20.explain the operating envelope of a twin-shaft gas turbine and the influence of power on sfc21.describe the effect of ambient conditions and intake and exhaust losses on power and fuel consumption22.describe the necessary measures for installation on board: acoustical enclosure, air filtration, up- and down-takes and fueltreatment

Education Method Lectures 0/2/0/0Course Relations wb4408A, wb4408B, wb4420, wb4421


Marine Engineering. Design of Propulsion and Electric Power Generation Systems. J. Klein Woud and D. Stapersma. Institute of Marine Engineering, Science and Technology, London, 2003. ISBN 1-902536-47-9. The book can be obtained from GezelschapLeeghwater with a considerable discount.Some prints will be provided.

Prerequisites wb4100



Design Content Application and installation of piston engines and gas turbines


of 186



MT218 Mechatronics in MT 5


Instructor P. de Vos

Exam Coordinator E.H.M. Ulijn


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 3

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents Theoretical background:

Signal conditioning* Analogous and digital signal processing, amplifiers, filtering

Measurements techniques* Analogue and digital equipment, applicability, implications of sampling, D/A and A/D conversion

Sensors* Working principles, interpreting sensor specifications

Actuators* Working principles DC drives, servo acuators, determine and interpret characteristics

Dynamics* Modelling manoeuvring of ships, control requirements for weather vaning dynamic positioning and dynamic tracking

Practical application:

Determine characteristics of available sensors and actuators and the available scale model. Design and implement a weathervaning DP/DT controller for use on the scale model in the towing tank. Demonstrate the controller in the towing tank.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.describe the basic principles of mechatronics: the combination of mechanical, informatical, electronical aspects into onesystem2.describe sensors principles and to apply sensors for suitably measuring position (6 d.o.f.), speed, acceleration, force, torque,rpm, flow speed, sine/cosine, acoustics etc) by different means (electrical, optical, acoustical etc.)3.describe actuator principles and to apply actuators for marine purposes (load characteristics, response speeds, geometricalparameters, durability)4.apply the basics of signal processing relevant to mechatronical systems (sampling, filtering, transformation, functionalprocessing, A/D and D/A conversion)5.apply the basics of computer based measuring and control6.analyse and interpret the performance of a simple mechatronical system7.apply the ergonomical aspects of mechatronic systems (safety, operation, access) and the organizational impacts (workingconditions, lay-offs, educational requirements etc)8.evaluate the strength and weakness of a mechatronical system

Education Method Lectures 0/0/3/0, laboratory projects

Computer Use Matlab / Simulink, Humusoft real time toolbox


Course material:'Dynamic positioning of vessels at sea'; Pinkster'A Study on Weather Vaning Dynamic Positioning System`; Pinkster, Hagiwara, Shoji, FukudaAdditional material to be determined

References from literature:`Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems`; Franklin, Powell, Emani-Naeini`Onboard Experiments on Weather Vaning Dynamic Positioning System`; Pinster, Hagiwara, Shoji, Fukuda

Assessment Written report, practical results

Remarks The project assessment is based on:* Theoretical analysis and solution (report)* Practical results of the controller (from experiments conducted in flume tank)

Laboratory project(s):

Implementation of the DP/DT controller in a real-time environment to control a model in the towing tank.Experiments in the towing tank to demonstrate the solution.

In order to participate you should enrol as soon as possible for mt218 (typically round Christmas). In preparing the assignmentswe need to know total number of participants. Also the number of participants is limited by available hardware and if you did notregister in time you might have to wait several weeks before you can actually start!


of 186



MT313 Shipping Management 3

Responsible Instructor E. Vandevoorde

Responsible Instructor H. Meersman

Course Coordinator Ir. J.W. Frouws


0/0/2/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3


Course Language EnglishSummary Shipping management

Maritime economics

Course Contents In this course an individual assignment will be carried out on a subject chosen by the student in consultation with the professor.At the start of the course the student will be guided by the professor and supplied with bibliography and links with (international)research on the subject. During a few "hearing" classes problems can be discussed.

A written report and an oral presentation will conclude this assignment.

Study Goals The student is able to make a sound judgment of various problems in shipping management from economical point of view andto propose feasible solutions at minimum cost and at maximum efficiency.

More specifically, the student is able to:1.demonstrable knowledge and understanding of the most important comprehensions of maritime economics2.apply managerial concepts in a shipping company or a related maritime business environment3.find, gather and work on maritime-economic databases4.carry out economical analyses of empirical applications5.interpret correctly maritime-economic data and results of related research

Education Method Assignment


Course material:Suggested by the professor depending on the subject

References from literature:Suggested by the professor depending on the subject


Remarks Professors will be available on the day of the course as given in the schedule. For further contact phone or email us.


MT514 Ship Movements and Steering 3 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. R.H.M. Huijsmans


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45

Course Language Dutch (on request English)

Course Contents See Dutch description

Study Goals The student is able to determine, analyse and evaluate the motion of a ship or any other floating structure in waves and also themaneuvering of a ship in calm water.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.apply the equations of motion to a single rigid non-elastic body in order to describe the motion of a ship sailing in waves ormaneuvering in calm water2.deduce the relevant linear equations of motion in the frequency domain for a ship lying still or sailing in waves

3.deduce the linear, time domain equations of motion for a body floating in waves4.analyse the motions of a ship in irregular waves and predict the probability of extreme values of ship motions and forcesworking on the ship5.determine the motions of a ship when executing different maneuvers, eg. turning circle, crash stop etc6.select, on basis of motion criteria, ways and means to reduce extreme roll motion of a ship in waves7.explain the different non-linear hydrodynamic effects that play an important role in the motion response of floating structuresmoored at sea8.explain the main theoretical backgrounds regarding linear and non-linear wave forces acting on floating structures9.Explain the main theoretical backgrounds regarding hydrodynamic calculation methods such as the strip-theory for shipssailing in a seaway and the 3-dimensional diffraction theory for stationary, floating structures in waves



See Dutch description

Prerequisites mt513


Remarks See Dutch description

Percentage of Design 25%Department 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology

of 186



MT515 Resistance and Propulsion 3 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. T.J.C. van Terwisga


0/2/2/0

Education Period 23

Start Education 2

Exam Period 3Different, to be announced


Course Contents Cavitation nuisance and propulsors, Propellers in service conditions, Drag reduction through air lubrication

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.reproduce the main lines in a selection of the latest developments in the field of Prop & Res. Hydrodynamics, where thecurrent selection of Propulsion and Resistance topics includes unsteady hydrodynamics of the flow over a foil, cavitation forms,problems and tools for analysis and design, propulsion systems in a service environment and ship drag reduction by airlubrication2.analyse a hydrodynamic problem in the propulsion and resistance area, into well defined subproblems that can be analysedwith state of the art knowledge and tools3.select the appropriate theory or tool (either numerical or experimental) for an analysis of the identified problem4.reproduce and present to an audience, the main lines in a contemporary publication from the field of Propulsion and Resistancehydrodynamics5.understand, interpret and react to questions from the audience and the lecturer and in doing so, stimulate the scientific debate



Course notes, distributed during classes


Remarks Attendance during lectures is compulsory, marks on presentation, no written examination


of 186



MT523 Numerical Methods for MT 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. H.J. de Koning Gans

Instructor Ir. T.N. Bosman


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2



Expected prior knowledge Requirements: all BSc-courses Analysis, Linear Algebra and Differential Equations plus mt518, mt519 and mt520Course Contents Explanation of several flow models and their fluid mechanics properties (pressure, velocity, mass and volume flow, momentum,

energy flow etc.) and fluid domain in contrast with aerodynamics

Modeling flow models into numerical flow models.

Elementary solutions for potential flow and how to use them for panel codes which used these elementary solutions. Greens'function theory.

Grid generation techniques and how to use them. Several numerical error in the developing stage, desing and applications stage

Application for numerical method: Viscous flow Diffraction, Wave making pattern.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.explain the description of a mesh of a ship hull and to produce a file which is readable for computational tools2.describe different type of griding techniques and several spacing distributions3.describe the Greens function and the Greens identity4.use elementary solutions for potential flow in the Green function and how to use the elementary solutions to transform the

Greens identity to a Fredholm equation of the second kind5.use the Fredholm equation for a potential flow model and to discretise it into panel codes6.define which numerical application has to be used for a specific problem (e.g. a given flow around ships with or without freesurface flow (pressure distribution, constant velocity, area's etc.)7.define which simplifications or linearization have to be used and which physic phenomena is used8.define which boundary conditions have to be used9.explain the numerical models based on potential flow with or without free surface flow and it's linearization10.indicate when a specific application is used, what kind of flow model it is based on11.determine the range of the most important parameter(s), which for the method is used12.determine the grid size for the specific problem13.make a grid14.analyse the output data which the specific program has generated15.describe the higher order method and truncation error and the von Neumann condition


Computer Use Three different numerical tools (Navier-stokes, Delffrac and Delkelv) have to be used.


Course material:Koning Gans, Dr. Ir. H.J. de "Numerical Methods in Ship Hydromechanics"Koning Gans, Dr. Ir. H.J. de "Manual of Numerical Methods in Ship Hydromechanics"

References from literature:Katz, J. & Plotkin, A."Low Speed Aerodynamics from Wing Theory to Panel Methods"


Remarks Entry requirements:All courses mathimatics, fluid dynamics and Resistance and Propulsion of ships of MT01,MT02,MT03


Design Content Optimalisatiom of hull forms.


of 186



MT524 Hydromechanics of Special Ship Types 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. J.A. Keuning


0/0/2/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 3


Expected prior knowledge Basic B.Sc (Naval Architecture) or equivalent

Course Contents Hydromechanics of Special Shiptypes, such as fast ships, advanced marine vehicles, (sailing) yachts. Topics calm waterresistance, side force production and induced resistance, aerodynamics of sails, Velocity Prediction, (nonlinear) motions inwaves, operability of fast ships, maneuvring, motion control and large motions.

Study Goals The student is able to understand, determine and analyze the particular points of interest and the differences in thehydromechanics involved between regular ship types and special ship types such as in particular sailing yachts and fast ships.


1.list the various computational techniques ranging from CFD to regression based empirical formulas that are being used for thedetermination of the forces and moments involved in the equilibrium of a sailing yacht under way2.apply the various methods and techniques that are being used for the determination of the specific problems encountered withsailing yachts in in-stationary conditions (i.e. motions and added resistance due to wind waves)3.describe the differences between linear and non linear approaches to ship motion calculation techniques for both sailing yachtsand fast ships4.describe the special conditions, forces and moments that come into play when dealing with fast ships sailing in calm water andwaves5.apply the different calculation techniques used on the fast ships with their strong non linear behavior and to understand andanalyze their differences

6.describe (the need for) the various different experimental techniques used in fast ship towing tank experiments7.explain the special problems associated with fast ships in waves with respect to; the strong non linear behavior, high encounterfrequencies and vertical accelerations, large motions and special events like surfing and broaching in following waves8.describe the various aspects with fast ships with respect to safety9.apply the various aspects with respect to ultimate stability



Course material:WEGEMT Courses on Advanced marine Vehicles, Sailing Yacht Design and other Course notes are distributed during theclasses (lectures)

In addition a number of relevant publications on the subjects discussed during the lectures will be handed out.

Other references to public literature:See course material

Assessment A limited number of assignements (commonly 2) must be made by the students. These have to be submitted in english on paperto the teaching staff. When found of sufficient quality no further examination is required and a mark will be awarded.

Remarks Attendance during lectures is compulsory,Final marks are given on basis of the handed in results from the assignements.No further written examination necessarry.

Laboratory project(s):Possibly towing tank workshops with yachts and fast ships.


Design Content Application of shiphydrodynamics in the design of these special types of ships is prominent


of 186



MT525 Marine Propulsion Systems 2


Responsible Instructor T. van Beek


0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents Subject:

This course describes the main properties of marine propulsions systems. After the course students have to be able to select asuitable propulsion system, define the main criteria, evaluate interfaces and dynamic behaviour. A rough cost review will beincluded.

Contents:

1. Introduction to propulsion systems1.1Introduction1.2 Ship types and propulsors1.3 Design and selection of fixed pitch propellers

2. Design and application of CP Propellers2.1 Application of CP propellers

3. Design and application of steerable thrusters and pods

3.1 Steerable thruster3.2 Podded propulsors

4. Design and application of waterjets and tunnel thrusters4.1 Waterjets4.2 Tunnel thrusters

5. Hydraulic systems and controls5.1 Hydraulic systems and its characteristics5.2 Controls for propulsion system

6 General topics: class requirements, rudder interaction and material aspects6.1 Class requirements and service experience6.2 Interaction with the rudder6.3 Material aspects

7 Cost effective propulsion and system integration7.1 Cost driving factors in propulsor systems

8 System integration and package optimisationStudy Goals After the course the student should have profound knowledge of the propulsion systems described in the course. They should

understand the mian working principles, the critical design issues, the cost drivnig factors and be able to make comparison of various types and make for desing purposes.



Course material:readers will be available prior to every course

References from literature:references will be presented per course

Assessment Written exam.


Design Content Content is design related using normal laws of physics.


of 186



MT724 Shipfinance 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. J.F.J. Pruyn

Instructor Dr.ir. R.G. Hekkenberg

Instructor E. Stroo-Moredo


0/0/2/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 3

Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge For academic students: 3rd year Shipbuilding courses : mtp302, mtp305; For INHolland-students: completed 3rd year of studies.

Course Contents The course consists of the following elements:1) Classes by (mostly) guest lecturers;2) Several group and individual assignments during the classes;3) An individual exam;

Course subjectThe course is organised by the Delft University of Technology (DUT) together with Stichting Nederlandse Scheepsbouw ExportCentrale (NESEC), a high-end financer of dutch shipbuilding projects. The subject of the course is such that a high level of expertise is needed and this is achieved by inviting a large number of speakers from the industry. These are chosen in such a waythat the whole spectrum from pre-financing by the shipyard till the repayment of a loan by the ship owner is treated, albeit notchronological.

Any ship that is build is financed two times; Firstly the yard will need to finance the production of the vessel, to ensure a positivecash position during its construction. Secondly the owner needs to finance the purchase of the vessel including the paymentsmade to the yard before delivery. While both types of financing differ greatly, a lot of elements are shared between them as well.

This course will treat the view of the yard, the ship owner and the bank on this, as well as provide the students with tools toassess the financial status of a company.

Study Goals 1.The student will be able to understand and explain the similarities and differences in financing for a shipyard and a ship owner.2.The student can qualify and quantify the effects of financing on:a.the contract price of a shipyard.b.on the future cash flow of the ship owner3.The student can analyse the health of the balance of a company by using at least the following indicators: solvability, liquidity,rentability, working capital, quick ratio, current ratio and debt ratio.4.The student will be able to construct a simple new year statement consisting of a year result and balance based on cash flowdata and the previous statement5.The student can explain the effects of changes on the balance and year result.6.The student can evaluate an investment by constructing cash flows for the investment and applying Pay-back, Net PresentValue, Discounted Cash Flow and Internal Rate of Return techniques to that.7.The student will be able to identify which costs are present in the contract-forms used in shipping (time charter, voyage charter,bareboat charter).8.The student can quantify the effects of market movements in exchange rates, freight rates and second hand value on thefinancing of ships, cash flow prognoses and the balance.


report assignmentsLiterature and StudyMaterials

Course material:

To be supplied during the course.

References from literature:

· General literature on finance (terminology, definitions, main concepts) and methods for evaluating investments.

· Specific publications on ship finance. Books by Peter Stokes, Sloggett, Stopford and others. Report on UNAS (UNiformeAdministratie in de Scheepsbouw), etc.

· Sources such as accountants and banks, e.g. KPMG, PriceWaterhouse, ArthurAndersen, ING, NIB Capital, etc;

· Shipping consultants such as Drewry, Ocean Shipping Consultants, etc;

· Sector representatives such as KVNR and VNSI;

· Internet;· Material of Cambridge course on Ship Finance.

Assessment Complete the questionnaires at the end of each guest lectureComplete the group and individual assignments during the lecturesA written Exam

Grading is a weighted average of the following:- Presence and participation of each student in class;- Quality of the assignments;- Written exam, partly multiple choice and partly ship finance cases.

Remarks Remarks1.Students must register at least two weeks before start of the course. Registration only by means of BlackBoard. INHollandstudents may register with the secretary of the Ship Production Department, Mrs A. Nieuwland-Jobse,[email protected] view of the guest lecturers a minimum number of participants may also apply. If the number of registered participants isbelow this number the course may be canceled.3.Since the course is organised in co-operation with the NESEC and Dutch industry and banks, preferential admittance is givento students of Marine Technology.4.The NESEC awards a price to the best student (over-all), this consist of a paid international course in ship finance atCambridge University, England.5.Classes are obligatory and each student is expected to follow all of them. To promote participation by the students, they willreceive an extra 0.5 point for following all courses and lose half of that for each of the missed courses.


of 186



MT725 Inland Shipping 2

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. R.G. Hekkenberg


0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 4


Summary The student is introduced to inland shipping in Europe, it's position in the intermodal transport chain and the complications of

intermodal transport compared to road transport.Emphasis is put on the special challenges posed by the inland waterway infrastructure, which often pose limitations and/orrequirements on the type of ship used. Also various ship types and the latest technological developments in inland navigationwill be discussed.

The course consists of a single 2-hour lecture, after which students will be asked to complete an assignment related to specificaspects of inland navigation and/or the economic feasibility of providing inland waterway transport. research questions in recentyears have included:" What is the smallest inland ship that can still compete with trucks?""How far can scale enlargement of inland ships be taken?""What options do the latest improvements of the infrastructure on the danube offer inland navigation?""Which European cities can be supplied by inland waterway from which seaport?"

Assignments will be carried out in groups of 2 or 3.Grading will be based on a written report, oral presentation and discussion of the contents of the report.

Course Contents The student is introduced to inland shipping in Europe, it's position in the intermodal transport chain and the complications of

intermodal transport compared to road transport.Emphasis is put on the special challenges posed by the inland waterway infrastructure, which often pose limitations and/orrequirements on the type of ship used. Also various ship types and the latest technological developments in inland navigationwill be discussed.

The course consists of a single 2-hour lecture, after which students will be asked to complete an assignment related to specificaspects of inland navigation and/or the economic feasibility of providing inland waterway transport. research questions in recentyears have included:" What is the smallest inland ship that can still compete with trucks?""How far can scale enlargement of inland ships be taken?""What options do the latest improvements of the infrastructure on the danube offer inland navigation?""Which European cities can be supplied by inland waterway from which seaport?"

Assignments will be carried out in groups of 2 or 3.Grading will be based on a written report, oral presentation and discussion of the contents of the report.

Study Goals 1.The student shall be able to explain the position of inland shipping in the logistic chain as well as the advantages anddisadvantage of inland shipping in relation to rail and road transport, taking into account the properties of the inland waterwayinfrastructure2.The student shall be able to apply the knowledge from learning objective 1 to a specific problem, related to logistics and/or(semi-)technical aspects of inland shipping by generating possible solutions and assessing these solutions, using methods andcriteria that are commonly used in the field

Education Method LectureAssignmentoral presentationdiscussion of results

Computer Use wordprocessing and spreadsheet if necessary


Course material:S.Hengst, "Binnenvaart in beeld" (in Dutch) Delft University PressC.J. de Vries Goederenvervoer over water, Van Gorkum en Comp. , Assen

References from literature:C.J. de Vries, Goederenvervoer over water (in Dutch), van Gorcum, 2000

Assessment written report, oral presentation and discussion of report


of 186



MT727 Shipyard Process, Simulation and Strategy 4

Responsible Instructor Ir. A.A. van der Bles

Assistent E.H.M. Ulijn


0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4



Parts Modelling is integral part of the project work, but may start from other existing models. The deliverable will be thedocumentation of a mathematical model and the interpretation of results. The instructor will specify typical functionalrequirements of a working model. Examples of functional requirements could be:· Change the available resources (e.g. personnel) and determine the consequences;· Change the delivery time for certain objects of the specified structure and determine the consequences;· Change some of the product parameters and determine the consequences;· Change the logic linking the activities by means of specifying different scenarios;· Change the parameters of the available facilities and determine the consequences, e.g. of a crane with smaller liftingcapacity;

To this end the students must structure the model to describe the activities involved and investigate (part of) these activities interms of necessary preconditions, resource usage, work time and product parameters. Subsequently the student is expected tomodel them in suitable relationships and integrate the model into a working simulation program.

Course Contents This course is directly linked to the ongoing research programme of the Chair of Ship Production and covers capita selecta of this subject. The binding theme is that of simulation, notably that of engineering and production processes. In view of the linkwith research, guest speakers will present (part of) their research. This also implies that the subject material may vary with theprogress of that research. This set-up of the course requires an active interest on behalf of the student and a willingness to beexposed to new and sometimes still experimental developments.

Classes:Contents and order of lectures are indicative and subject to change without notice. Subjects are taken from:¨ Introduction to course, introduction to planning of the course, expected deliverables, evaluation criteria, learning goals,introduction to project work, group division;¨ Introduction to process simulation, introduction to process modelling tools (EM-Plant), activity trees, modelling;¨ Production simulation at Flensburger Schiffbaugesellschaft, introduction, demonstration¨ Robotisation, introduction to subject, robot technology and corresponding requirements, analysis of cost and benefits,capacity balancing, discussion;¨ Engineering processes, introduction to subject, process modelling techniques (e.g. IDEF0), engineering process simulation,problems in concurrent engineering, relationship between product & process;¨ Data reuse in design and engineering, standardisation and modularisation in ship engineering, problem statement, pastachievements, analysis of engineering processes, pros and cons of standardisation and modularisation based on case studies;¨ Data exchange in shipbuilding, integral product modelling, different forms of ship representation such as functions, zones,system, etc; international standards, shortcomings and current developments.

Project work:The project comprises work of the students in groups of 2 to 4 students. They will all work on a similar project although oncompletely different parts of the shipbuilding process. These parts may e.g. cover pipe fitting, accommodation assembly, steelpre-fabrication or section assembly.

Objective of the project is to analyse and model the specified part of the shipbuilding operation. The goal of such a model wouldbe: To be able to analyse and visualise the specified shipbuilding process in terms of cost, throughput time, employed resourcesand corresponding risks. Data provided for the project case could be a drawing of a (limited) part of the ship with correspondingproduct parameters. Alternatively it may cover a set of production drawings with relevant parameters. The team may furtherreceive constraints relative to the available resources (personnel and equipment). The students will have to analyse the activitytree, the required resources, the corresponding events, etc.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.Understand, analyse, investigate and evaluate the cause and effect relations which influence the building process and logisticsfor (a part of) the production and assembly process;2.Model (part of the) shipyard building process in terms of tasks, activities and events; and in terms of task duration, resourceuse and logical relations; and expressed as functions of product parameters, available facilities and resource constraints;3.Devise a simulation model or part thereof on the basis of the developed shipbuilding production process model;4.Understand the potential of robots for welding and evaluate the pros and cons of robots for ship production;5.Understand the role of engineering for ship production and qualitatively analyse potential improvement options offered bystandardisation and modularisation;6.Understand the background to and evaluate the use and limitations of integral product modelling.

Education Method Project work


To be supplied during the course.

Assessment Report + presentation + participation


of 186



MT728 Salvage 3

Responsible Instructor Ing. J.C. van der Wagt

Instructor E. Stroo-Moredo


0/0/x/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Summary Ship salvage, emergency responce, damage repairCourse Contents Salvage is an uncertain business and requires an organisation which can bring together the required material and expertise in a

very short time. Sometimes unconventional technical solutions have to be applied.Environmental issues do play an important role.

Damage repair is a highly competitive business with strong fluctuations in contracted work and requires a high level of flexibility of the organisation.

The course consists of:1. Case study carried out by groups of 3-4 students2. In depth study3. Lectures on salvage and emergency response

Study Goals Student is able to apply knowledge of the Marine Salvage business in order to know how to approach a salvage job, taking intoaccount international contract procedures, technological aspects, planning and logistics of equipment and personnel and cost.

For a limited amount of students damage repair can be addressed, requiring the student to gain knowledge of the Ship Repairbusiness.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.indicate the activities of marine salvage in terms of market, world wide competition, contractual and legal matters, salvagetechnology, organization, planning and logistics2.interpret the differences between shipbuilding and ship repair in terms of market, world wide and regional competition,facilities, organization and working methods3.analyse a specific practical problem either on marine salvage or ship repair (technique, organization, planning and logistics)4.generate possible solutions for the problem defined in learning objective number 35.evaluate the possible solutions and to give an underpinned recommendation for the final solution

Education Method Case study and lectures


Course material:To be supplied during the course

Assessment Written report, presentation

Remarks Blackboard enrollment 2 weeks in advance as well as presence at first lecture (kick off) are mandatory


of 186



MT729 Maritime Business Game 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. J.F.J. Pruyn


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4



Summary Strategy, investment decisions, product mix, international differences, exchange rates, interest rates and market prediction are all

elements you will encounter in this course. You will find yourself at a management position in one of the companies present inthe game and represent either a shipping company or shipyard. Youll fight with competitors for orders in a market that can turnaround completely in a single month. Long term strategy, is hard to follow in an environment as dynamic as this.

At the end of at least five years of management, youll have to confront the General Assembly and defend your course of actionover these years and give some insight into the future of the company.

Course Contents Course ContentsContents and order of lectures are indicative and subject to change without notice. Typical contents are:Introduction to course, expected deliverables, evaluation criteria, learning goals, work division into functional areas, introductionto maritime business game, explanation of game procedures, introduction to the gaming system, group division and companyassignment, designation of cross-reading studentsFamiliarization with game procedures, trial roundsFundamentals of financial reporting, explanation of financial reports generated during the gamePreparation for game, development of own strategy, formulation of long-term goals including 1 A4 with summary statementsFundamentals of strategy in the maritime contextPlaying the Maritime Business Game (at least 80% of the time)Preparation of annual report and outlookGrand Annual Meeting and completion of course

Game ContentThe game comprises an interactive effort of all participating students: they will all work in the same situation. The participantswill be divided in teams of one to three students, representing shipyards and ship owners. Each team will be supplied with arelevant initial situation stating such matters as financial structure, products, organisational structure, market information, etc.Within the teams the tasks may be split along functional lines, e.g. finance; production; commercial or similar.

Objective of the game for each team is to optimise the companys performance. Typically the teams can do any of the followingto that end:Set the price for offered ships, supplies or financing;Hire & fire personnel;Set the offered delivery time for any ship or its components;Invest in facilities (docks, slipways, quays, cranes, ships, etc);Negotiate with clients;Request market surveys to be performed;Assess his/her business results.

The MBG is played in a number of rounds. The environment may change, e.g. by:Changing exchange rates;

Altering labour costs;Introducing subsidies;Affect the macro-economical developments;Seasonal fluctuations in trade;Changing the base interest rates;Changing material prices (fuel, steel, port fees).

During each round, each team is expected to analyse the market, analyse their own financial position, determine the course of action, negotiate, perform litigation, formalise binding agreements and adjust company parameters online.

Each round of the game thereby results in a new financial position with corresponding information on e.g. market, product andclients. Everything is to be reported by means of an Annual Report at the end of the game, over the entire length played.

The game period (the "round") is a 1-month period which is variable in real team, due to experience of the participants. It willrange between 30-60 minutes of gaming per round. The game is set to run continuously from 8:30 in the morning to 17:30 in theevening. Decisions may be made continuously but will be registered as final at the end of the round.

Study Goals Study GoalsThe student must be able to:

1. develop and execute a sound company strategy2. analyse and interpret financial statements3. synthesise a consistent marketing plan and modify and execute it under changing circumstances4. negotiate with potential clients and formalise agreements5. describe the procedures and obstacles in litigation6. evaluate investment possibilities and make sound decisions relative to their adoption7. evaluate the dynamics and regional differences involved in the maritime business environment and optimise decision makingaccordingly8. make rational evaluations of business opportunities and decide accordingly, e.g. relative to the product mix, order book filling,pricing, etc.9. describe the conflicts between short-term and long-term objectives and mediate between them10. describe the workings of the maritime business dynamics and the interactions between different stakeholders

Education Method LecturesBusiness game/Computer Use/Simulation

Computer Use Game simulation tool, based on business process simulation tool


To be supplied during the course

Assessment Annual report + presentationRemarksA maximum number of 50 students applies for this course. Admittance will be in the order of registration by means of BlackBoard.

Assessment will be on the basis of:

Annual report.

of 186



The report must include a survey of the financial results, a discussion of the most relevant decisions taken during the game andtheir outcomes, a projection for the near future of the company and the resulting strategy and strategic changes, if any. The reportto be submitted in threefold, in the English language:One for the lecturers present during the Grand Annual MeetingTwo for designated fellow students from other teams

Presentation at the Grand Annual MeetingEach team gets 10 minutes (depending on the number of teams) to present its companies views relative to strategy, competition,market, results and future outlook. After this the audience gets 5 to 10 minutes for Q&A. The cross-reading students are expectedto each pose one critical question. Remaining Q&A-time is available to the floor and the lecturers.


Judgement Grading is done in the following way.

10% of the grade is based on the average Return on Equity over the last five periods of the game, calculated in a standard way.The maximum RoE receives maximum credit, the minimum RoE gets minimum credit. Cooking the books or other types of criminal behaviour, when discovered, results in negative credit, the severity of which is to be decided by the GameAdministrator.10% of the grade is based on the judgement of the fellow students relative to the future plans of the company. This is based on

the number of shares bought of your company by the other participants.The remaining 80% of the grade is based on the judgement of the lecturers.

Department 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology (20% presentation, 30% report, 30% participation during thegame)

MT815 Construction and Strength, Special Subjects 2

Responsible Instructor X. Jiang



0/2/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 2


Expected prior knowledge Probability and statistics analysis, computational method or equivalent.

Course Contents The course aims at establishment of methods for probabilistic modeling and analysis of structural behavior and safety applyingto ships, offshore platform, pipelines and other marine and/or civil engineering structures. Different methods for calculatingreliability of components, including FORM and advanced FORM, SORM and Monte Carlo simulation methods are discussed.Systems reliability method and updation of reliability based on inspection and maintenance are introduced. Properties of andsolution to different reliability problems, ultimate strength reliability and fatigue reliability are illustrated.

Study Goals After successfully completing the course, students will be able to:1.To explain theoretical basis for reliability analysis of structures.2.To identify properties and applicability of different reliability methods.3.To choose and apply reliability methods properly4.To analyze real time engineering reliability problem

Education Method Lectures, in class exercises and discussions, homework assignments.


Course materialsR.E. Melchers: Structural Reliability Analysis and Prediction (second edition), John Wiley&Sons, New York, 1999.References from literature:Journal of reliability engineering &system safety, Journal of engineering failure analysis among others.

Assessment 50% assessment report and 50% home assignment.


Design Content Reliability analysis of a real time engineering structure


of 186



MT816 Composit Materials 2

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. M.L. Kaminski



0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45

Course Language Dutch (on request English)Course Contents The course aims primarily at the possibilities and limitations of fibre reinforced plastics (FRP's) in ship structures.

The pros and cons of FRP's with respect to conventional materials are discussed and related to current applications.Fabrication, supply and properties are discussed with respect to basic components (matrix, reinforcement and core material) aswell as with respect to the final product (laminate and sandwich). The course deals with the relevant production methods andstructural concepts of maritime structures and structural components. Attention is given to the mutual relationship and the effecton costs and properties of the final product.Subsequently the course continues with structural design and the response and capability of structure and components underappropriate loadings. Special attention is given to the effect of structural design concept and of composition and properties of material components on the response and capability. Also the influence of time and environment will be considered. Lastly rulesand regulations of classification societies are considered with respect to structural design, choice and application of materials,dimensioning of scantlings, maintenance, repair and daily use.

Study Goals The course is designed as an introduction on the structural properties of composite materials and their possibilities andlimitations in their application in primary and secundary structural parts of maritime structures.



Course material:Summaries; course-book in preparation.

References from literature:Composite Materials in maritime structures, edited by R.A. Shenoi and J.F. Wellicome, Vol. I and Vol. II, Cambridge OceanTechnology Series 4 and 5, Cambridge University Press 1993, ISBN 0 521 45153 1, ISBN 0 521 45154 X, combined ISBN 0521 458765.

Assessment Case

Remarks Please contact the lecturer for an English alternative, whenever needed.


Design Content Inter-relationship between material properties, structural design concept and the response and capability (strength and stiffness)of maritime structures and components under appropriate loading.


MT830 Applications of the Finite Element Method 3

Responsible InstructorX. Jiang



0/2/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23


Expected prior knowledge Structural Mechanics, Material Mechanics, Computational Methods or similar.

Course Contents The course gives the theoretical framework for the finite element method, formulates elements for beams, plates, shells andassembly structures. Element properties, symmetric and asymmetric issues, convergence requirements and modeling errors arediscussed. The course emphasizes rational modeling, choice of element type, discretization, introduction of loads and boundaryconditions and results control. Further, an introduction to geometric modeling of simple two- and three-dimensional structuresand typical structural details is given.

Study Goals After successfully completing the course, students will be able to:1.To identify different finite element types and properties2.To explain structural behavior of finite elements3.To establish and validate a FEM model4.To analyze simple two- and three-dimensional real life structures

Education Method Lectures, in class exercises and discussions, homework assignments.

Computer Use computer demonstrations and exercises during the course, assignment to be completed and reported


Course material:Finite Element Modeling for Stress Analysis, Cook,R.D., ISBN 0-471-10774-3

References from literature:Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, Cook, R.D. et al, ISBN 0-471-50319-3

Assessment 70% Assessment report and 30% homework assignment.


Design Content finite element analysis of structures


of 186



MT835 Hydro Elasticity 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. T.N. Bosman


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 1


Course Contents Contents planned for the course:

o Response superposition in view of hull girder bending stresses in regular waves.o Local response due to outside pressures at the shell, intermitted wetting.o Stress responses due to regional structural response.o Combining local response and global hull responses.o Long term distribution of stresses in view of fatigue damage of structural components.o Integral structural finite element model of ship to determine stress response functions.o Hydroelasticity: Working definition. Springingo Hydrodynamic interaction between floating structures and mechanical coupling: MOBs.o Vortex induced vibrations, VIV.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.apply response superposition in view of hull girder bending stresses in regular waves2.calculate local response due to outside pressures at the shell, and assess pressures in the splash zone, using output of aDiffraction calculation for a ship hull in regular waves3.derive a mathematical model to assess variations of internal pressures on tank walls due to ship motions for tanks which are100% filled with liquid4.identify the problems in combining global hull response with response from local in- and external pressures5.illustrate the principles of a two-step stress response analysis with a FEM-model for rigid ship hulls, based upon ship motionsand external hull pressures as calculated with 3D-diffraction methods

6.explain the phenomenon of hydrodynamic coupling/interference between floating rigid bodies, to formulate the relevant matrixequation, to apply it for simple cases, make a simulation of the resulting motions in regular waves and evaluate the results7.formulate the additional transformations in the matrix equation for hinge linked rigid bodies including hydrodynamic coupling(MOB), to apply it for simple cases, make a simulation of the resulting motions in regular waves and evaluate the results8.describe the phenomenon of Hydro-elastic response of relatively elastic floating structures, e.g. VLFSs, to explain thedifferential equation for e.g. a flexible thin plate in regular waves, to apply it for a flexible barge composed of 12 segments andevaluate the results9.explain the phenomenon of springing of ships in regular waves10.explain the differential equations for the transient response of a flexible beam (hull girder) due to impact, e.g. slamming,whipping etc11.describe the phenomenon of Vortex Induced Vibrations (VIV) and apply engineering solution methods to simple cases

Education Method Lectures, weekly exercises


Course material:

Hand outs will be available for each subjectReferences from literature:

Ship Hydromechanics, part I, Journee, Pinkster

Ship Hydromechanics, part II,Offshore Hydromechanics, Journee, Massie, DUTStructural design and Strength 2, Boon, VinkStructural Design and Strength 3, Boon, VinkHydroelasticity in Marine Technology, Proceedings of conference 1994, Trondheim


Remarks Mark will be based upon results of weekly exercices.


Design Content Advanced topics for response evaluation and structural design to judge viability of unconventional concepts og floatingstructures


of 186



OE4601 Survey of Offshore Engineering Lectures 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema


8/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Course Contents This course consists of a number of familiarization classes on Monday and Thursday afternoons during the first quarter.Individually, the classes provide the minimum technical knowledge base for a specific subject. Collectively, the series of classesform a general, fairly broad introduction to the oil and gas industry and to the offshore engineering master studies in particular.In total the classes cover, in addition to a general course introduction, some 14 ï¿½ 15 different subjects. A major portion of these subjects are delivered by specialists from renowned firms or companies from the offshore industry.Lecture notes from all speakers are made available, normally after the delivery of the classroom sessions. Materials andclassroom discussions will be in English.This group of classes is scheduled universally in the first three hours of each Monday and Thursday afternoon during the firstquarter (7 weeks), while the 4th hour of the afternoon is generally used to amplify information presented by videos / DVD.

Study Goals Participants successfully completing this course can expect to:Be aware of the diversity and range of building blocks potentially applicable in the offshore field development of hydrocarbonreservoirs and the facets thereoff involved in the design of structures for offshore production. This includes key parameters andother essential criteria applicable to dredging engineering and renewable energy developments well.Additionally, students will know how and where to find more information on any of the topics covered and will able to makemotivated choices for additional relevant courses necessary to collate their course requirements in support of their industrialpractice phase and thesis selection.

Education Method lectures

Literature and StudyMaterials recommended other materials:Several (15 - 20) note segments that complement the first quarter Tuesday and Thursday afternoon classes, made available viaBlackboard.

"Glossary of Offshore Terms" by Prof.dr.ir.J.H. Vugts et al.Available at BookShop Civil Engineering.

Assessment Written multiple choice-type exam in the examination period at the end of the first quarter, with a re-sit / 2nd change in a similarperiod at the end of the second quarter.

Remarks Summary

Survey of a variety of topics from Petroleum Engineering, Chemical Engineering, Geodesy, Marine and Steel Technologythrough Subsea and Dredging Engineering that contribute to the development of an offshore oil and gas field or landreclamation. The course is taught by a team of roughly 16 teachers led by the Offshore Engineering Curriculum Leader.


Judgement Grades are assigned upon the result of a written exam.

OE4603 Introduction to Offshore Structures 3

Responsible Instructor Prof. C.A. Willemse

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. C. van Rhee


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23


Course Contents The course explains design principles of jacket platforms, gravity structures, offshore ships, spars, TLP's and semi-submersibles,

as well as the basics of dredging equipment. The level is introductory.Study Goals Understanding of which type of offshore and dredging structures exist and how their preliminary design is achieved.



obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s):

Syllabus for OE 4603; syllabus for OE 4651 by prof Vugts;

Assessment written exam (open questions)

Remarks Summary

Review of design principles of Offshore and Dredging Structures


Judgement Single mark based on written examination

of 186



OE4610 Survey of Offshore Engineering Projects 8


Instructor Ir. G. Tol


0/0/0/x

Education Period 4

Start Education 4



Expected prior knowledge The course OE4610 is applying the knowledge of most preceeding courses; in order to join / sign-up, it is mandatory to havefollowed the lectures for OE 4601 and OE 4603 including participation of at least one (written) examination.

Course Contents This course â in its full form â is divided into a number of elements that are fully integrated with the Project work.These elements include the following:-A series of classroom sessions (mandatory attendance for all participants).-Frequent project team plenary meetings, virtually daily.

Team meetings with the coach held (often) at weekly intervals.- Occasional methodology activities in conjunction with the lectures..-Project Team presentations.

The participating student population is divided into teams of 4 â 5 people max, consisting of a mix of various disciplines,backgrounds and cultures. Each team will be assigned with a senior university staff member or PhD student, who will act as theircoach for the duration of the Project. Each team works with the same general information and each serves as a design consultantto the same external company on the same project. A bit of good-natured competition between the teams makes their activitieseven more interesting!

The Project is designed into 3 phases during which the teams have to transfer a hydrocarbon discovery somewhere in the worldinto a field development plan defined by a number of technical and economical parameters.

The teams will work with the same general information during this process which is provided in a number of lectures deliveredby the Curriculum Leader on the topics of Project Management and Field Development, spiced up by talks on effective meetings,communication and working as a team in addition to dedicated lectures including a training session on oil & gas economics.The immediate overall objective of these sessions is to increase the effectiveness of each participantsâ project work activity andto âpaint the big pictureâ thereby assisting the student in putting more specific material from the informational classes in a properperspective for adaption into their project.Specific field data is provided by an external company from the oil & gas industry.

Each Project team (as a group) is required to hold scheduled meetings with the coach, usually no more than once per weekstarting. These sessions serve as âfixed pointâ in the Project teamâs activities. It is here that subgroups within a team canexchange information and the coach can discuss activities and progress with the team. An occasional session can be devoted to amethodology topic; additionally, students are free to use any source for data, expertise and / or experience gathering.

Study Goals Participants successfully completing this course can expect to:

-Be aware of the diversity of facets involved in the development of an offshorehydrocarbon discovery, the wide range of issues governing decision making including a focus on the major building blocksrequiring design of structures for offshore oil and gas production.-Know how and where to find more information on any of the topics involved.

-Be able to make a motivated choice for future career including the graduation specialism and for additional relevant (elective)courses prior to graduation.-Have experienced how conflicting requirements must be accommodated in an offshore design environment.-Be somewhat skilled with the use and integration of knowledge gained from this and companion OE curriculum courses.-Be a more affective worker in teams and individually.-Be able to utilize simple project analysis and management techniques.-Be more actively involved in one's own learning process.-Be aware of the economic constrains imposed on industrial projects.

Education Method Classroom lectures, exercises, training and preparing & delivering presentations.


recommended other materials:

A PC or laptop running a recent, Englisch Language version of EXCEL will be needed for QUE$TOR computations at home - if so desired.Much project background material will have to obtained from the university library system and internet.recommended lecturenote(s)/textbook(s):

Software: QUE$TOR - All of this information is or will be made available when needed via the Curriculum Leader.

Assessment Team reports including presentations (3 off) followed by an individual oral exam.Remarks Summary: Application of a variety of topics from Petroleum Engineering, Chemical Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, Civil

Engineering, Geodesy and Marine Technology for the conceptual development and evaluation of an offshore hydrocarbon (oiland gas) discovery. Participants work in multi-background teams.


Judgement Each phase of the Project is concluded by a team report which in its turn is defended by a (team) presentation. Grades areassigned to both components by a panel, resulting in one âteam gradeâ for such a phase.While for the first 2 phases one single reward for each phase is determined, for the third and final report & presentation twoseparate grades will be established.By applying a predetermined weight distribution to the 4 obtained grades, an average grade is established for each teamreflecting some 90% of the final grade.

The final individual grade will be established by the Curriculum Leader after an oral exam rounding off the obtained team grade.This grade is assigned to the entire 8 credits.

of 186



OE4623 Drive System Design Principles 3



4/0/0/0 (in 2nd master year)

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Required for MSc Offshore EngineeringExpected prior knowledge None

Course Contents An overview of possible drive systems:Diesel, gas-turbine, electromotors, generators, nuclear energy, fuel cells, transmissions, etc.An overview of drive systems used in offshore & dredging applications.The Multi Criteria Analysis

Assignment in groups of 2 or 3.Learn to choose the optimal drive system for an offshore application based on argumentsMake a global design of a drive systemLearn to use the Multi Criteria Analysis

A Powerpoint presentation showing the results of the assignment

Study Goals Get an overview of possible drive systemsLearn to choose the optimal drive system for an offshore application based on argumentsMake a global design of a drive systemLearn to use the Multi Criteria Analysis

Education Method Lectures/AssignmentComputer Use Powerpoint


H. Klein Woud & D. Stapersma, Design of Propulsion & Electric Power Generation SystemsK. v/d Werf, Aandrijfsystemen

Assessment Powerpoint presentation of a global drive system designThe Powerpoint presentations will be converted to websites and published on www.drivesystemsdesign.org.


Design Content Global design of a drive system


Contact Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema

of 186



OE4624 Offshore Soil Mechanics 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. J.P. Oostveen

Instructor Prof.dr.ir. F. Molenkamp


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23

Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge OE4624 uses CT2090

OE4624 uses CT4399

Course Contents This course brings successful participants to a superior knowledge level in the following geomechanics areas for application tooffshore structures:

Soil investigations:All kind of site observation as well as soil investigationsmethods to support the topics below are discussed.

Pore pressure enhancement:The build-up of pore pressures under large foundations subject to cyclic loads as well as in the sea bed as a response to oceansurface waves is derived.

Lateral and vertical support of pipelines:Bedding of pipelines and their protection are discussed.

Axially loaded piles:The behavior of piles under alternating tension and compression. Non-linear responses as well as numerical solutions are

handled.

Laterally loaded piles:The behavior of piles under alternating horizontal forces is handled. Non-linear responses as well as numerical solutions areprovided.

Large spread footings:The behavior of spread footings using the Brinch Hansen theory are discussed.

Suction achorage:The behavior of suction anchorages are discussed based on the theory.

Study Goals Offshore Soil Mechanics extends ones basic knowledge of soil mechanics so that successful participants are prepared to designoffshore foundations for fixed offshore structures at a superior knowledge level. They also become aware of the geotechnicalproblems associated with pipelines and other seabed structures.

Education Method lecturesexercise


obligatory lecture note(s)/textbook(s):Offshore Soil Mechanics by prof.dr.ir. A. Verruijt.Also avialable on the internet: geo.verruijt.netAvailable at BookShop Civil Engineering.recommended other materials:Lecture notes will be provided.


Remarks Summary

Successful participants can design offshore foundations at a superior knowledge level. This course makes this possible byextending ones basic knowledge of soil mechanics to include a number of typical offshore applications. Topics include:Axially and laterally loaded piles: linear and nonlinear behavior and computations,Shallow spread footings for large structures: linear and nonlinear behavior and computations,Influences resulting from cyclic pore pressure in the sea bed.Field (at sea) and lab studies.


Judgement grade is determined on the basis of a written examination.The exercises must be finished before this can take place

of 186



OE4626 Dredging Processes 4



0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 2


Expected prior knowledge OE4626 uses CT4399

Course Contents The course focuses on 3 main dredging processes:The cutting of sand, clay and rock;The sedimentation process in hopper dredges;The breaching process.These are explained in detail. Exercises allow participants to apply the knowledge gained in practical situations.

Study Goals Understand and reproduce the Mohr circle;Understand and reproduce the theory of passive and active soil failure;Understanding the soil mechanical parameters important for cutting processes;Understanding and make calculations regarding the 2-D cutting theory in water-saturated sand;Understanding and make calculations regarding the 2-D theory in clay;Understanding and reproduce the settling of grains in water;Understanding and reproduce the loading cycle of a hopper dredge;Being able to determine the loading cycle of a hopper dredge, base on the modified Camp model by Miedema and Vlasblom;Understanding and reproduce the basic cutting theory of rock cutting;Understanding and reproduce the breaching process.


Literature and Study

Materials


The course material is downloadable from:http://www.dredgingengineering.com and from BlackboardAvailable at as download from blackboard .

Assessment Written exam (open book)

Remarks SummaryThe course focuses on 3 main dredging processes:The cutting of sand, clay and rock;The sedimentation process in hopper dredges;The breaching process.Participants succesfully completing this course will be equipped to make predictive quantitative determinations related to theseprocesses.



OE4630 Offshore Hydromechanics 8Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. P. de Jong

Responsible Instructor Ir. P. Naaijen



Course Coordinator Ir. G. Tol


8/4/4/0

Education Period 23

Start Education 2

Exam Period 234

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents See respectivily modules D1 - D4

Study Goals See respectivily modules D1 - D4

Education Method See respectivily modules D1 - D4

Assessment See respectivily modules D1 - D4Module D1 is not required for students with a Maritime background (BSc).All modules D1-D4 have to be passed ( grade larger than 5.5) in order to get a final mark of OE4630 through a weighted averageof the modules D1-D4


of 186



OE4630 D1 Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 1 1.5

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. P. de Jong


2/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Expected prior knowledge CT4320, CT5316 and basic fluid mechanicsSummary Summary

Offshore Hydromechanics includes the following modules - all of which are normally required for OE MSc Degree participants:

Hydrostatics, static floating stability, constant 2-D potential flow of ideal fluids, and flows in real fluids. Introduction toresistance and propulsion of ships.Review of linear regular and irregular wave theory. One lab session accompanies this module in combination with module 4.

Analytical and numerical means to determine the flow around, forces on, and motions of floating bodies in waves. One labsession and a few exercises accompany this module.

Higher order potential theory and inclusion of non-linear effects in ship motions. Applications to motion of moored ships and tothe determination of workability. One exercise accompanies this module.

Interaction between the sea and sea bottom as well as the hydrodynamic forces and especially survival loads on slenderstructures. One lab session accompanies this module along with module 1. One exercise is also involved.

Course Contents Basic principles: Hydrostatics, constant flow phenomena and waves

The treated theory includes :

Stability computations for all sorts of floating structures - including those with partially filled water ballast tanks, etc.

Bending of a free-hanging drill strings

Constant 2-D potential as well as real flows and the forces which they can exert on structures

Wave theory and wave statisticsModule 1 (text chapters 1 trough 5) provides basis knowledge for all the succeeding modules. Classes on this module are heldduring the first three weeks of the course; this is usually soon followed by a quiz covering this module

Study Goals Course Objectives:Participants who have successfully completed the course will be able to carry out computations at a superior knowledge levelinvolving:Module 1 (1,5 EC): Hydrostatics, floating stability and 2-D potential flows, as well as regular and irregular waves and theirspectra.Module 2 (2 EC): Computations relevant for first order forces on and resulting motions of ships.

Module 3 (3 EC): Nonlinear forces on and resulting ships motions; workability prediction.Module 4 (1,5 EC): Hydrodynamic forces on slender structures including marine pipelines.In addition, successful participants completing module 1 will have a basic awareness of ship propulsion systems and theircomputations. Those completing module 4 will have an advanced knowledge of sea bed morphology.

Education Method Lectures, exercise


obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s):"Offshore Hydromechanics" by Journee and Massie"Offshore Hydromechanics" Exercises by Journee

Both are available by P.W. de Heer (3mE room 7-0-117, besides towing tank) or may be downloaded off the internet address:www.shipmotions.nl

"SEAWAY" by Journee available at teacher and the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl

Prerequisites PrerequisiteAll participants are required to have succesfully completed a basic university-level course in Fluid Mechanics before starting onOffshore Hydro-mechanics

Assessment Written exam (open questions)Written assignmentsPractice(s)Quizzes

Remarks Offshore Hydromechanics Module 1 is not required for students with a Maritime Engineering Bachelor. However, these studentsneed to compensate the ECTS with (an)other subject(s).


of 186




Responsible Instructor Ir. P. Naaijen


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23


Summary Summarypart 2 of offshore hydromechanics (OE4630) involves the linear theory of calculating 1st order motions of floating structures inwaves and all relevant subjects such as the concept of RAOs, response spectra and downtime/workability analysis.

Course Contents Floating Structures 1: Wave forces & motions

Upon completion of this segment participants will have superior knowledge of:

Application of linear (wave) potential theory to ships and other floating structures for the computation of external and internalforces as well as ship motions.Module 2 covers chapters 6, 7 and parts of chapter 8. It prepares the student for the further development of this project in module3.

A few computational exercises as well as a lab session complement this module.

Study Goals Course Objectives:Participants who have successfully completed the course will be able to carry out computations at a superior knowledge levelinvolving omputations relevant for first order forces on and resulting motions of floating strucures.

knowledge / know-how is obtained on:

-definitions of ship motions in 6 DOF-RAO's and phase angles of harmonic properties (motions, forces, wave elevations, etc)-General motion equation: how to determine all the terms in the equation, how to solve the equation in order to obtainRAOs/phase angles-potential flow due to undisturbed wave-numerical potential flow due to wave radiation and diffraction-combine motion RAOs and derive RAOs of related properties-calculate probability of exceedence-carry out downtime/workability analysis

Education Method Lectures, exercise


obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s):"Offshore Hydromechanics" by Journée and Massie"Offshore Hydromechanics" Exercises by Journée

Both are available by the teachers or may be downloaded off the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl

Prerequisites PrerequisiteAll participants are required to have succesfully completed a basic university-level course in Fluid Mechanics before starting on

Offshore Hydro-mechanics

Knowledge obtained in module 1, especially on hydrostatics (ch 2) and wave theory (ch 5) is frequently used in module 2

Assessment Written exam (open questions)


of 186






0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Summary SummaryOffshore Hydromechanics includes the following modules - all of which are normally required for OE MSc Degree participants:




Introduction to the use of Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) for the determination of extreme loads on moored FPSO inextreme seas.

Interaction between the sea and sea bottom as well as the hydrodynamic forces and especially survival loads on slenderstructures. One lab session accompanies this module along with module 1. One exercise is also involved.

Course Contents Floating Structures II: wave forces & motions, nonlinear problems, applications

Participants completing this segment succesfully will have a superior knowledge of and be able to predict the motion of floatingbodies in the sea. They will be familiar with first order ship motions in irregular waves as well as drift forces, resulting fromnonlinear phenomena. They can also apply this to applications such as station keeping and the determination of offshoreworkability.

Module 3 (text chapers 9 through 11) builds upon knowledge gained in modules 1 and 2.

One computational exercise is related to this module.

Study Goals Course Objectives:Participants who have successfully completed the course will be able to carry out computations at a superior knowledge levelinvolving:Module 1 (1,5 EC): Hydrostatics, floating stability and 2-D potential flows, as well as regular and irregular waves and theirspectra.Module 2 (2 EC): Computations relevant for first order forces on and resulting motions of ships.Module 3 (3 EC): Nonlinear forces on and resulting ships motions; workability prediction.Module 4 (1,5 EC): Hydrodynamic forces on slender structures including marine pipelines.In addition, successful participants completing module 1 will have a basic awareness of ship propulsion systems and theircomputations. Those completing module 4 will have an advanced knowledge of sea bed morphology.

Education Method lectures, exercise


obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s):"Offshore Hydromechanics" by Journï¿½e and Massie"Offshore Hydromechanics" Exercises by Journï¿½e

Both may be downloaded off the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl

"SEAWAY" by Journï¿½e available on the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl


Assessment Written exam (open questions)Written assignmentsPractice(s)

QuizzesDepartment 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology

of 186



OE4630 D4 Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 4 1.5



4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Summary SummaryOffshore Hydromechanics includes the following modules - all of which are normally required for OE MSc Degree participants:




Interaction between the sea and sea bottom as well as the hydrodynamic forces and especially survival loads on slenderstructures.

Course Contents Slender Cylinder Hydrodynamics and Sea Bed MorphologyThis module gives succesful participants a superior knowledge of:

The Morison equation and its extensions as well as with methods to determine its coefficients and approximate methods forpredicting the survival loads on an offshore tower structure.

The computation of hydrodynamic forces on pipelines.

In addition, these persons will also have an advanced knowledge of the morphology interaction between the sea bed andpipelines and other small objects. The erosion process of particles at the sea floor is covered extensively.

Module 4 covers text chapters 12 through 14; module 1 provides the necessary prerequisite knowledge for this.

Study Goals Course Objectives:Participants who have successfully completed the course will be able to carry out computations at a superior knowledge levelinvolving:Module 1 (1,5 EC): Hydrostatics, floating stability and 2-D potential flows, as well as regular and irregular waves and theirspectra.Module 2 (2 EC): Computations relevant for first order forces on and resulting motions of ships.Module 3 (3 EC): Nonlinear forces on and resulting ships motions; workability prediction.Module 4 (1,5 EC): Hydrodynamic forces on slender structures including marine pipelines. An advanced knowledge of sea bedmorphology.In addition, successful participants completing module 1 will have a basic awareness of ship propulsion systems and theircomputations.



obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s):"Offshore Hydromechanics" by Journee and Massie"Offshore Hydromechanics" Exercises by Journï¿½e

Both are available by the teachers or may be downloaded off the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl

"SEAWAY" by Journee available at teacher and the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl

Additional lecture notes by Miedema on the erosion processes.


Assessment Written exam (open questions)Department 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology

of 186



OE4651 Bottom Founded Structures 6


Instructor Prof.dr.ir. J. Wardenier


0/0/3/3

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period 45


Expected prior knowledge OE4651 uses CT4130OE4651 uses OE4601OE4651 uses OE4624OE4651 uses OE4603

Course Contents This course includes several related segments as follows:

General introduction and general design considerations such as material choice in relation to design, loads and relevant loadcombinations, construction and later inspection as well as removal of the structures at the end of their economic life.

Fixed steel support structures are given the most significant attention in this course. Quantitative design of steel structuresincluding the dimensioning of individual members strength as well as stability is covered as is the design analysis for joints insuch structures. Dynamics and fatigue is being discussed as well. Participants become familiar with construction, transport andinstallation aspects to the extent that these factors dictate the design. More limited atttention is given to inspection, and repair of existing structures.

Compliant Towers and their specific design characteristics are also discussed .

Structural design aspects of decks to provide space the drilling, production, power generation and life-support systems arediscussed.

The analysis modeling of elevated jack-up rigs is discussed in relation to that for fixed steel tower structures.The failure modes and design codes for fixed steel offshore structures are discussed briefly.

Platform decommissioning and removal is given special attention.

Various guest lecturers from the industry are invited to present some practical cases.

Study Goals The objective of this course is to integrate knowledge from hydromechanics, probabilistic design, dynamics and structural designso that participants are albe to carry out the design and related analysis of fixed steel structures in the sea at a superior knowledgelevel.An exercise enhances each participant's skill and understanding.

Education Method lecturesexercisesite visit (compulsory)



Books: "Handbook of Bottom Founded Offshore Structures" by prof.dr.ir. J.H. Vugts is available via the OE offices in the CivilEngineering building.

Specific notes: Handouts for exercises are available in class and on Blackboard; powerpoint presentation slides of all lectures areposted on Blackboard.

Software: Participants may check their exercise computations using SESAM on a university computer.

recommended other materials:

English-language EXCEL software will be convenient for carrying out some of the exercise computations.

Assessment Grades are based upon a combination of a grade for the written examination as well as grades earned for the exercise work. Thecombined exercise grades provide 30% of the final grade; the remaining 70% is from the exam.

Remarks Summary

Treatment at an advanced to superior knowledge level of fixed steel structures ad complaint towers and their superstructures aswell as jack-up platforms in their working (elevated) position.The course covers the entire range of the design cycle from concept evaluation through abandonment, although primary attentionfocuses on those factors most important to the structure's design. Design analysis steps are applied primarily to fixed stellplatforms in the sea.Participants complete a series of exercises during the course in order to reinforce their understanding and skill with the use of theconcepts taught.


Judgement Grades are based upon a combination of a grade for the written examination with open questions as well as grades earned for theexercise work. The combined exercise grades provide 30% of the final grade; the remaining 70% is from the exam

Contact Secretariat of OE, Mrs. Marysa Dunant (3mE)

of 186



OE4652 Floating Structures 4

Responsible Instructor Ir. A.M. van Wijngaarden


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Expected prior knowledge OE4652 uses OE4601OE4652 uses OE4603OE4652 uses OE4630

Course Contents This course first surveys the various hull forms and types of floating structures in relation to the functional requirements placedupon them.A major portion of the course focuses on a specific type of floating structure - such as a FPSO production platform for deepwater - and its design. This design is then discussed in some detail in such a way that the classroom sessions augment the seriesof steps within the design exercises.

Study Goals Participants in this course will become capable - at an advanced knowledge level - of leading the design of a floating offshorestructure. They will be familiar with the (potentially) conflicting requirements resulting from safety, topside processes,deadweight capacity, floating stability, response to waves, structural strength and fatigue, positioning as well the availablemargins for compromise needed to achieve a feasible and responsible design.

The exercises integrate the course topics and reinforce the concepts learned.

Education Method Lectures in theme blocks including industry guest lectures.Integrated exercises


Materials

Recommended textbook:

Floating Structures, a Guide for Design and Analysis, ISBN: 1-870553-357Opportunity will be given to acquire the textbook at student discount through ODE staff.

Assessment 5 individual excercises and written exam (open questions)

Remarks Summary

Design - at an advanced knowledge level - of floating offshore structures and elements thereof: ships, semi-submersibles,FPSOs, spar platforms, hybrid jack-up structures and elements such as mooring sytems and risers. Importance of functionaldesign parameters and adaption of these over the lifetime of a floating offshore structure. Application of methods of analysis andcriteria in design: wave loading and motion in waves, floating stability, (dynamic) positioning, structural strength and fatigue.Safety assessment and codes in relation to design.


Judgement Student grades are determined on the basis of the exercise work and a written examination. The exercises contribute 50% of thegrade.Total course grade is only valid when both the exercises and the exam are undertaken in the same semester.

Contact Secretariat of ODE, Mrs. M.C. Dunant

of 186



OE4653 Marine Pipelines 4



0/0/4/0

Education Period 4

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Expected prior knowledge Knowledge from the following courses is applied in this course (OE 4653):CT 4130, OE 4601, OE 4630, OE 4654

Course Contents Marine Pipelines concentrates on three aspects of subsea pipeline design:

Pipeline Design:The internal and structural design of pipelines for oil, gas and multi-phase (liquid gas) flows. Pipelines are dimensioned basedupon flow in relation to properties of the transported material as well as capital expenditure and operating costs involved. Theneed for and means of providing thermal insulation is discussed including the measures of assuring flow in pipelines.

Pipeline Route Selection:Routing of pipelines through the sea as well as their shore approaches are covered. Special attention is given to sub-sea tie-ins,pipeline and cable crossings, pipeline protection from fishing gear, shore approaches and pipeline trenching. The consequencesof pipeline temperature changes and upheaval buckling are integral aspects of this topic as well as the on-bottom stability(pipelines on or in the sea bed).

Pipelines Installation / Construction:This segment presents current and new technologies for the installation of pipelines in varying water depths, ranging from a fewmeters to depths measured in kilometers coupled with the role which installation plays in the design of a pipeline. Special

attention is given to supporting finite element analysis (FEM) calculations, construction start-up, sea-bed lay-down, tie-ins and towelding technology. A classroom exercise is included as an integral aspect of the knowledge gained.

Study Goals Participants completing this course successfully will be able to function at an advanced to superior knowledge level productivelyand quantitatively in marine pipeline design teams.

Education Method Classroom lectures.


recommended materials:

Lecture material will be made available through the lectures.Students may want to use English language EXCEL for pipeline design computations.

recommended lecture note / textbook:

Subsea Pipeline Engineering, by Andrew C. Palmer and Roger A. King; 2nd edition ISBN 978-1-59370-133-8


Remarks Summary: Marine Pipelines includes three aspects of subsea pipeline design:Flow assurance in pipelines, the internal design and dimensioning of pipelines for oil, gas and multi-phase flow, and the routeselection.Pipeline route selection includes both deep sea and shore approach routing as well as design for on-bottom stability.Pipeline installation / construction methods and their effect on pipeline design.


Judgement Participants are assigned one final grade based upon the results of a written examination that covers all three aspects of thecourse.

Contact Secretariat of OE, Mrs. M. C. Dunant.

of 186



OE4654 Sub Sea Engineering 4



0/6/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23


Expected prior knowledge Knowledge from OE 4601 and up to a certain extent from OE 4603, is applied in OE4654.Course Contents The course Subsea Engineering includes the following elements:

-Introduction and historical survey-Engineering aspects of subsea wells-Subsea oil and gas pumping-Risers and subsea control-Diver less methods of intervention and deep water systems-Subsea installation, maintenance and repair-Subsea exploration-Reliability engineering in relation to subsea work

These elements will be integrated and linked to a subsea field development scenario via a series of short in-class exercisescarried out by teams of participating students.

Study Goals Participants completing this course successfully will be able to function at a advanced knowledge level productively andquantitatively in subsea engineering / marine pipeline design teams.

Education Method Classroom lectures.


Specific notes:"Subsea Engineering" by J. PreedyAvailable at OE secretariat.

recommended other materials:Some students may want to use a laptop computer with English language EXCEL for classroom design computations.


Remarks Summary: Subsea Engineering is concerned with how the need to work in or under the sea affects operations being carried outthere. Topics include drilling and hydrocarbon well maintenance activities as well as control systems, remotely operated vehiclesand their capabilities, installation of hardware on the sea bed, and how all of these are affected by concerns for safety andreliability. A series of short exercises will be carried out during the classes. Because of the breadth of topics covered, only aroutine to advanced knowledge level will be achieved providing a solid base for further individual development.


Judgement Grades are assigned based on the results of a written examination.

OE5662 Offshore Wind Farm Design 4

Responsible Instructor Ir. N.F.B. Diepeveen


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Course Contents This course makes students familiar with the design of offshore wind farms in general and focusses on the foundation design inparticular. The course is based on actual cases of real offshore wind farms that have been built recently or will be built in thenear future.

Study Goals The course gives a general overview to make the student familiar with the different components, equipment and parties involved.It focusses on general wind farm economics, environmental impact, permit acquisistion, layout, grid connection, installationmethodology and support structure design for a specific wind turbine for a specific offshore location.

Education Method Lectures plus exercise

Assessment Exercise report and presentation

Remarks Combining knowledge from the design of bottom founded structures and wind energy conversion systems, the courseconcentrates on the design of an offshore wind farm. Installation and maintenance logistics are discussed as well as thetransportation of electric power to shore. Economics and environmental impact play deciding roles.


Judgement Based on quality, pace and reporting of the exercise work

of 186



OE5663 Dynamic Positioning 3


Instructor Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema


3/0/0/0 (course in 2nd master year)

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 1


Course Contents Dynamic Positioning System Design includes the following subjects, each to be dealt with in 3 hours of class:

Introduction: definition of Dynamic Positioning, short history of its development, areas of application, normal systemcomposition, special devices for special purposes. Physical options for position measurement and their inherentstrengths/weaknesses, equipment involved in position measurement, reliability of the position signal, redundancy in equipmentand principles, dead reckoning modes. The importance of measuring oscillatory ship motions. Design implications of theselected measurement systems.

Design of the control algorithms: basic PID controls, signal/noise ratios and their effect on filter design, consequences of applying digital computers, Kalman optimal control routines, redundancy on the control system side. Ergonomics in the operatorinterface design. Systems available on the market. The 3-D case of ROV control.

Physical options for generating thrust on a floating vessel: Tunnel and azimuthing thrusters. Rudder/propeller interaction.Available thruster sizes. Thruster efficiency. Response times of thrust changes. Mechanical limitations and reliability. Thrustfeed-back modes.

Hydromechanical aspects of DP: wave and current load characteristics. Aspects of thruster allocation. Thruster-hull interaction.System performance analysis in the design phase and in operation.

Shipboard consequences of the installation of a DP system: Central or distributed controls. Interfaces with the power plant.Placing the position reference sensors.

An exercise in capability calculation, demonstration of DP interface and simulation, modelbasin demonstration.

Study Goals The objective of this course is to prepare participants to understand (at a routine knowledge level) and to participate in teamsdoing the design of dynamic positioning systems for a variety of offshore and subsea engineering applications. Successfulparticipants will also be able to work fruitfully with those more expert in supporting disciplines to come to an optimized dynamicpositioning system for a given application.

Education Method exerciselectures


syllabus:Dynamic Positioning System Design


Remarks Summary:

This course unites the disciplines of:Control theory and system designHydromechanicsMechanical EngineeringPosition monitoring

to present theory needed to design a dynamic positioning or tracking system for offshore applications such as work ships on thesea surface and autonomous as well as towed underwater vehicles.


Judgement Written examination with open questions

Contact dr.ir. H.T. Grimmelius

of 186



OE5664 Offshore Moorings 3



4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Expected prior knowledge OE5664 uses CT4399 and OE4630Course Contents The classroom activities are structured around the following 8 elements each taking roughly 3 hours of classroom time:

Anchors:Soil properties are reviewed to the extent that they are important to anchor behavior in the soil. (Note that a significant number of participants usually come from Marine Technology - and outside the IOE MSc curriculum; they have no background in soilmechanics.) Special attention is given to specific anchor-related soil properties such as dilatency. The behavior of a number of different anchor types is demonstrated in a laboratory session.

Anchor Line Mechanics:Catenary line theory is reviewed along with practical ways of solving the resulting equations in an effective way.

Anchor Line Materials and Components:The materials and accessories that make up a mooring system are presented along with their relative merits.

Exercise Introduction:The exercise requirements are explained along with a suggested approach to achieving an optimum mooring design. The mostimportant economic evaluation steps are touched upon.

Study Goals The classes are set up to give the student practical insight - supported by applied theory - in the design and optimization processfor an offshore mooring system. The exercise forces each student to integrate the knowledge gained and to make practicalengineering and economic compromises in a realistic engineering situation. Successfull completion prepares one to functionqualitatively and quantitatively at a superior knowledge level in a mooring design team.

Education Method lectures (to introduce the excersise)exercise



Books:Vrijhof Anchor Manual

Available at the section secretariat.recommended other materials:

Handy background information comes from:

OE4652 Design of Floating StructuresOE5663 Dynamic Positioning System Designrecommended lecturenote(s)/textbook(s):

Deep Water Fiber MooringsBarge Mooring

The website www.offshoremoorings.org

Assessment The students have to create a website on a specific topic in groups of 4. In the last lecture planned these websites will bepresented to all the students, the lecturer and guests. After making corrections, the websites will be published on the internet onwww.offshoremoorings.org

Remarks Summary

The course treats the design of offshore mooring systems literally from the ground up: Starting with the anchor and its soilsmechanics in the sea bed, via the mechanics of a single mooring line and system of lines. The course concludes by touching onother mooring concepts and the dynamic behavior of the moored object as a non-linear mechanical system.

Design Content 40%


Judgement Grades are assigned based on the contents of the website created, based on the presentation, but also based on the technologyused to create the website, such as easy navigation, user interface, etc.


of 186



OE5665 Offshore Wind Support Structures 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. W.E. De Vries


4/0/0/0 (course in 2nd master year)

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Course Contents This course focuses on the design of support structures for offshore wind turbines. It deals with the entire process of design forextreme and fatigue load, soil-structure interaction as well as fabrication and installation issues.

Study Goals Understand the design process of support structures up to the detailed design. The student will be able to make an optimiseddesign of a structure using the current industry standard software and methodologies

Education Method The course consists of 10 lectures and an assignment in which the students will individually develop a complete supportstructure design

Assessment Grading based on the process of the assignment, the assignment report and the final presenation of the assignment.


OE5670-11 Integrating Exercise 11


Exam Coordinator Prof.dr.ir. C. van Rhee

Contact Hours / Week

x/x/x/x

0/x/0/0 (2nd master year)


Start Education 2

Exam Period none


Course Contents Integrated exercises

Study Goals This curriculum element is provided in order to allow a participant to:Further develop his or her skill level in some area of offshore engineering by getting additional practice with the application of methods learned from (other) classes.Polish up his or her research and reporting skills (in a broad sense) as preparation for a thesis project.Some participants find industrial sponsors for this mini-thesis work. This is fine as long as the overall scope can be fit into a timeperiod of about 8 weeks.The integrating exercise can be used as a part of the MSc thesis. For instance literature survey or preliminary investigation, butshould be reported seperately.

Education Method Exercise

Assessment Based on exercise report and oral presentationRemarks summary

Further skill development in a particular area of offshore engineering.Often performed in-house at the TUD, sometimes sponsoredby industry.


Judgement Based on exercise report and oral presentation

Contact Secretariat of OE, Mrs. M.C. Dunant

of 186



OE5671 Dredging Equipment Design 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. C. van Rhee


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Course Contents dredging equipment, mechanical dredgers, hydraulic dredgers, boundary conditions, design criteria, instrumentation andautomotion

Problem definitionBoundary conditionsProcesses of excavating, transport and depositiesEnergy consumption and power requirementTechnical designSpecial subject. Wear, instrumentation and automation

The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledge of thedredging processes.Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment.

Study Goals The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledgeof the dredging processes.Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment.

Study Goals Study Goals The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledgeof the dredging processes.Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment.



Lecture notes Prof.ir. W.J. Vlasblom and Prof. Dr. ir. C. van Rhee

Assessment Report + Oral Exam

Design Content 60%



OE5672 Dredging Laboratory 4

Course Contents dredging equipment, mechanical dredgers, hydraulic dredgers, boundary conditions, design criteria, instrumentation and

automotionProblem definitionBoundary conditionsProcesses of excavating, transport and depositiesEnergy consumption and power requirementTechnical designSpecial subject. Wear, instrumentation and automation

The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledge of thedredging processes.Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment.

Study Goals The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledge of thedredging processes.Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment.



Materials

Lecture notes Prof.ir. W.J. Vlasblom

Assessment Report

Design Content 60%



of 186



SC4010 Introduction Project SC 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. A.J.J. van der Weiden

Course Coordinator Dr. P.S.C. Heuberger


6/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period none


Course Contents To achieve good controller designs it is necessary to connect theory with problems of practical interest. In this project theconcepts and theory of the basic program concerning Control Systems and Signal Analysis will be reviewed. Implementationissues of e.g. PID controllers via continuous-time techniques on real experimental servo-systems are treated. The laboratorysessions use a digital signal processing controller. These controllers are programmed via the Simulink block diagram languagewhich is part of the Matlab control system design software.

Study Goals The goal of this project is to refresh and apply theoretical knowledge gained inprevious classical control courses and to get the ability to tune mechanical servo systems. The concepts and tools to be usedinclude modelling mechanical systems, measurement of the frequency responses and controller design in the time and frequencydomain.The designed controllers have to be implemented on a real experimental servo-system and their performances have to beanalysed.

Education Method Project combined with theoretical lectures to support the students during the exercises


Lecture notes

Prerequisites Undergraduate curriculum, experience with MATLAB could be useful but is not required.

Assessment The results of the exercises and experiments must be summarized in a short report, and will be discussed and examined during anoral examination.The deadline for handing in the report is November 15, 2010.

Department 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control

of 186



SC4025 Control Theory 6

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. P.M.J. Van den Hof


Instructor Prof.dr.ir. P.M.J. Van den Hof

Instructor T. Keviczky


6/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Course Contents ï¿½State-space description of multivariable linear dynamic systems, interconnections, block diagramsï¿½Linearization, equilibria, stability, Lyapunov functions and the Lyapunov equationï¿½Dynamic response, relation to modes, the matrix exponential and the variation-of-constants formulaï¿½Realization of transfer matrix models by state space descriptions, coordinate changes, normal formsï¿½Controllability, stabilizability, uncontrollable modes and pole-placement by state-feedbackï¿½LQ regulator, robustness properties, algebraic Riccati equationsï¿½Observability, detectability, unobservable modes, state-estimation observer designï¿½Output feedback synthesis (one- and two-degrees of freedom) and separation principleï¿½Disturbance and reference signal modeling, the internal model principle

Study Goals The student is able to apply the developed tools both to theoretical questions and to simulation-based controller design projects.More specifically, the student must be able to:

ï¿½Translate differential equation models into state-space and transfer matrix descriptionsï¿½Linearize a system, determine equilibrium points and analyze local stability

ï¿½Describe the effect of pole locations to the dynamic system response in time- and frequency-domainï¿½Verify controllability, stabilizability, observability, detectability, minimality of realizationsï¿½Sketch the relevance of normal forms and their role for controller design and model reductionï¿½Describe the procedure and purpose of pole-placement by state-feedback and apply itï¿½Apply LQ optimal state-feedback control and analyze the controlled systemï¿½Reproduce how to solve Riccati equations and describe the solution propertiesï¿½Explain the relevance of state estimation and build converging observersï¿½Apply the separation principle for systematic 1dof and 2dof output-feedback controller designï¿½Build disturbance and reference models and apply the internal model principle

Education Method Lectures and Exercise Sessions

Computer Use The exercises will be partially based on a Matlab in order to train the use of modern computational tools for model-based controlsystem design.


B. Friedland, Control System Design: An Introduction to State-space Methods. Dover Publications, 2005

K.J. Astrom, R.M. Murray, Feedback Systems: An Introduction for Scientists and Engineers, Princeton University Press,Princeton and Oxford, 2009

http://www.cds.caltech.edu/~murray/amwiki/index.php?title=Main_PageAssessment Written mid-term examination (15%) and written final examination (85%). For the resit examination (January 2011) there will

be a written examination (100%) for which the mid-term result will not count.

Design Content Simulation-based state-space approach to model-based control system design


of 186



SC4026 Control System Design 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. A. Abate



4/0/0/0 (2 hours lectures and 2 hours exercises)

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents State-space description of single-input, single-output linear dynamic systems, interconnections, block diagrams

Linearization, equilibria, stability, Lyapunov functions and the Lyapunov equationDynamic response, relation to modes, the matrix exponentialRealization of transfer function models by state space descriptions, coordinate changes, canonical formsControllability, stabilizability, uncontrollable modes and pole-placement by state-feedbackApplication of LQ regulatorObservability, detectability, unobservable modes, state-estimation observer designOutput feedback synthesis and separation principleReference signal modeling, integral action for zero steady-state error

Study Goals By taking this course, the student- will be able to master the introduced theoretical concepts in systems theory and feedback control designand- will be able to practically apply these concepts to design projects and tasks- will be capable to implement these concepts into model-based controller synthesis procedures through Matlab and Simulink- and will be able to relate the learned concepts and techniques to other more specialized ones, to potentially integrate them bytaking adjacent courses.

More specifically, the student will be able to:

- Translate differential equation models into state-space and transfer function descriptions- Rationalize differences between state-space and transfer function approaches- Linearize a system, determine its equilibrium points, analyze directly its local stability, leverage Lyapunov theory to studygeneral stability properties- Describe the effect of eigenvalue/pole locations to the dynamic system response in time/frequency domain. Contrast step andimpulse responses. Analyze transients and steady-state- Investigate model controllability. Formulate and apply the procedure of pole-placement by state-feedback, as well as LQoptimal state-feedback control- Derive observability properties. Formulate and apply the procedure of state estimation and build converging observers- Formulate the separation principle and employ it for the design of output feedback- Build reference models and achieve zero steady-state error using integral control.

Education Method Lectures 2/0/0/0 and exercise sessions 2/0/0/0

Computer Use The exercise sessions and homework assignments will be in part based on Matlab and Simulink, in order to train the student inthe use of modern computational tools for model-based control system design.


Textbook (its use is strongly recommended):

K.J. Astrom, R.M. Murray, Feedback Systems: An Introduction for Scientists and Engineers, Princeton University Press,

Princeton and Oxford, 2009

Available online for download:http://www.cds.caltech.edu/~murray/amwiki/index.php?title=Main_Page

Assessment Successful completion of - three homework sets (30%) during the course and- a final written examination (70%)

Design Content Simulation-based state-space approach to model-based control system design.


of 186



SC4032 Physical Modelling for Systems and Control 4

Responsible Instructor Nabestaanden van O.H. Bosgra



0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents SC 4032 Physical Modelling for Systems and Control

Contents 2010/2011

1.Formulation of dynamic models for physical plants and equipment. Role of System boundary, choice of input- and outputvariables. Causality and properness of input-output behaviour. Microscopic versus macroscopic conservation laws. Linearizationaround steady-state operating conditions or around trajectory. Linear parameter-varying versus nonlinear and linearized models.Frozen behaviour versus time-varying behaviour.2.Simple process models. Role of residence-time distribution. Distributed-parameter models versus compartmental models.Characterization of flow behaviour with respect to mixing and backflow. Series connection of flow systems.3.Bilateral coupling between subsystems. Causality, exchange of power between subsystems.2-port behaviour. Relationshipswith choice of boundary conditions in distributed-parameter systems. Hydraulic transmission line, heat conduction as examplesof bilateral coupling4.Time scales of dynamic phenomena. Equation ordering and scaling of model equations. Modal approximation, time momentsand Padâe approximation. Singular perturbations.5.Model reduction by projection and residualization Model reduction through ba;lancing and truncation. Role of Hankel singularvalues. Closed-loop relevant model reduction. Examples, finite dimensional approximation of distributed-parameter systems.

Realization theory, approximate realization as model reduction step.6.Rosenbrock's system matrix. System equivalence, interconnection of subsystems. Models in differential-algebraic equations forinterconnected subsystems Index problems as result of interconnection of state variables. Nonproper internal or externalbehaviour, use of Kronecker-Weierstrass form

Study Goals The student must be able to formulate dynamic models on the basis of an understanding of underlying physical principles. Inaddition, understanding major system properties must enable the student to manipulate the models, make them simpler (if desired) and bring them in a suitable format that allows implementation in a software platform. The student must be able toexplain properties and behaviour of the system models under study.

Education Method There will be handouts of course notes, also available electronically, in addition to copies of the course slides.

Assessment A set of Matlab/Simulink/theory exercises will be available. Solving the exercises constitutes the basis for the assessment. Theresults of the exercises must be summarized in a short report, and will be discussed and examined during an oral examination,during which also the contents of the course notes will be the subject of discussion. The report on the exercises has to be handedin ultimately April 15, 2011. The exam can in principle be executed throughout the year, both individually as well as in groupsof 2 students.


of 186



SC4040 Filtering & Identification 6

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. M.H.G. Verhaegen

Instructor Dr.ir. J.W. van Wingerden


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23

Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge BSc-degree in Engineering or Mathematics with basic knowledge of linear algebra, stochastic processes, signals and systems and

control theory.

Course Contents The objective of this course is to show the use of linear algebra and its geometric interpretation in deriving computationallysimple and easy to understand solutions to various system theoretical problems. Review of some topics from linear algebra,dynamical system theory and statistics, that are relevant for filtering and system identification. Kalman filtering as a weightedleast squares problem. Prediction error and output error system identification as nonlinear least squares problems. Subspaceidentification based on basic linear algebra tools such as the QR factorization and the SVD. Discussion of some practical aspectsin the system identification cycle. See also: http:/www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4040.

Study Goals At the end of the course the student should be able to:Derive the solution of the weighted stochastic and deterministic linear least squares problem.Proof the properties of unbiasedness and minimum variance of the weighted stochastic and deterministic linear least squaresproblem.Use an observer to estimate the state sequence of a linear time invariant system.Use the Kalman filter to estimate the state sequence of a linear time invariant system using knowledge of the system matrices,the system input and output measurements, and the covariance matrices of the uncertainty of these measurements.Describe the difference between the predicted, filtered and smoothed state estimates.

Formulate and solve the Kalman filter problem as a weighted stochastic least squars problem.Use the Kalman filter theory to estimate unknown inputs of a linear dynamical system in the presence of noise perturbations onthe model.Use the Kalman filter theory to design filters for detection (sensor, actuator or component) failures in a linear dynamical systemin the presence of noise perturbations on the model.Derive subspace identification methods for different noise models and relate the different subspace identification methods via thesolution of a linear least squares problem.Implement a least squares solution in matlab for elementary linear estimation and subspace identification problems.Apply the filtering and identification methods to derive a mathematical model from real-life data sequences. In this applicationthe students use the systematic identification cyclic approach to refine the model.



Book Filtering and System Identification: A Least Squares Approach by Michel Verhaegen and Vincent Verdult.ISBN: 13-9780521875127

Deliverable by the Studentsociety Gezelschap Leeghwater.

Assessment Written exam (open book) and practical exercise.

Remarks The software package Matlab is needed to solve the practical exercise.


of 186



SC4050 Integration Project SC 5

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. R. Babuska

Instructor Ir. A.E.M. Huesman


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4



Course Contents The course is based on practical laboratory sessions, in which students gain hands-on experience with the application of controltheory to real-world systems. Matlab and Simulink are used as the primary software environment for the design, analysis and real-time implementation of the algorithms. Students work in groups of two in the lab, with a setup of their choice: invertedpendulum (two variants), 'helicopter' model, inverted wedge, rotational double pendulum, crane and a distillation column.

Study Goals The goal of this course is to integrate and apply the theoretical knowledge gained in the courses `Control Theory' (SC4020),`Modeling and System Analysis' (SC4030) and `Filtering and Identification' (SC4040), which are compulsory within the M.Sc.program 'Systems and Control.' The concepts and tools to be used include mechanistic modeling (based on principles like massbalances, Lagrange equations, etc.), filtering and estimation (e.g., Kalman filtering), linear control design and performanceanalysis, system identification in open and closed loop. It is assumed that students already know these concepts or are able tolook them up in the literature. No theoretical lectures are given in this course.



See Blackboard

Prerequisites Control Theory (SC4025)Physical Modeling for System and Control (SC4032)

Filtering and Identification (SC4040)Students who have not followed these courses should contact the lecturer in order to find out whether their control background isat a sufficient level and what literature they should consult.

Assessment There is no written exam. The final grade is determined on the basis of a written report, the discussion of the results with thelecturer and the performance in the lab sessions.

Special Information The laboratory sessions are compulsory in the time slots scheduled for this course - usually on Monday morning (8:45-10:30)and Wednesday morning (8:45-10:30). Besides these slots, other dates and times will be scheduled by the students. Location:DCSC laboratories on the fourth floor and ground floor of block 5A, Mekelweg 2.


of 186



SC4060 Model Predictive Control 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. A.J.J. van den Boom


0/0/3/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Expected prior knowledge Undergraduate curriculumCourse Contents The model predictive control (MPC) strategy yields the optimization of a performance index with respect to some future control

sequence, using predictions of the output signal based on a process model, coping with amplitude constraints on inputs, outputsand states. The course presents an overview of the most important predictive control strategies, the theoretical aspects as well asthe practical implications, that makes model predictive control so successful in many areas of industry, such as petro-chemicalindustry and chemical process industry. Hands-on experience is obtained by MATLAB exercises with academic examples and aindustrial simulation of MPC on a two-product (binary) distillation column. Contents of the course: General introduction.Differences in models and model-structures, advantages and limitations. Prediction models in state-space setting. Standardpredictive control scheme. Relation standard form with GPC, LQPC and other predictive control schemes. Finite/Infinite horizonMPC. Solution of the standard predictive control problem. Stability, robustness, initial and advanced tuning. Robust design inpredictive control. See also: http://www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4060

Study Goals Study Goals:The student should be able to1. Explain how and why MPC has emerged from industry.2. List the five basic items of MPC and discuss their role.3. Identify, recognize and describe different type of models in MPC and explain when a type of model is suited for a specificapplication.4. Show that all models can be transformed into a state-space model.

5. Understand the concept of prediction in MPC.6. Make a prediction in the noiseless and the noisy case.7. Explain why a standard formulation is desirable.8. Transform any MPC problem into the standard MPC problem.9. Derive the steady-state of a system.10. Solve the finite and infinite horizon problem.11. Derive the realization for the LTI-case and for the inequality constrained case.12. Describe two ways to deal with infeasibility.13. Discuss stability for the LTI case and in the inequality constrained case.14. Describe the use of the end-point constraint and the infinite prediction horizon.15. Give the relation of the MPC scheme and the IMC scheme.16. Motivate the rules-of-thumb for initial tuning and use these rules for tuning an MPC controller.17. Describe the concept of robustness in MPC.18. Motivate and use the rules of robust tuning in MPC.19. Derive an MPC controller for various academic and industrial examples using MATLAB.



Course notes "Model Predictive Control" by Ton van den Boom (TU Delft) 2011.

Assessment Written exam and a homework assignment

Remarks Computer use: for the homework assignment, the use of MATLAB on PC is required. The assignment can be done either athome or at the DCSC laboratory.


of 186



SC4070 Control Systems Lab 4



0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Expected prior knowledge Control Systems (SC3020ET) or similar

Course Contents In this course, students have the opportunity to design and implement their own controllers for various laboratory systems(helicopter model, inverted pendulum, inverted wedge, gantry crane). In this way, they gain more insight in the use of controltheory and gain experience with the practical implementation of computer-controlled systems. MATLAB and SIMULINK areused as the basic platform for the design, analysis, simulation and real-time implementation. The control design methods to beused include standard techniques (digital state feedback, output feedback, PID control) as well as more advanced methods(adaptive control, linear quadratic control, systems identification). In the beginning of the course, a refresher is given in whichthe essential topics from theoretical control courses are reviewed. See also: http://www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4070

Study Goals Main objective: make operational and apply in practice the knowledge from control theory and system identification courses.Gain hands-on experience with the design and implementation of a computer-controlled system.

After successfully completing the course, the student is able to:

* Implement in Matlab / Simulink a given mathematical model of a mechatronic laboratory system. Estimate unknownparameters in the model by using experimental data measured on the process. Validate the model against measured process data.

* Linearize the model around an operating point. Assess the accuracy of the linearized model with respect to the nonlinear oneand with respect to the real process. Identify limitations of the linearized model. Choose a suitable sampling period, discretizethe linearized model.

* Define meaningful performance specifications for a control system to be designed for the given process. Selected a suitabletype of controller. Compute the controller's parameters such that the above specifications are met. Verify the closed-loopperformance in realistic simulations.

* Apply the controller to the process in real-time experiments. Evaluate the performance of the control system. Identify reasonsfor possible discrepancies between simulations and real-time results. Suggest possible improvements.

* Demonstrate proficiency in using Matlab and Simulink as the primary tool for the achievement of the above objectives.

* Document the design steps, considerations, choices and the achieved control results effectively in a written report. Present anddefend the results in an oral presentation.

Education Method Lectures, laboratory sessions


Book: Astrom K.J. and Wittenmark B. Computer Controlled Systems Theory and Design (Third Edition). Prentice Hall, 1997.

Assessment Written report, presentation

Remarks Computer use: laboratory assignment. Design content (60%): control design.


of 186



SC4081-10 Knowledge Based Control Systems 4



0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Course Contents Theory and applications of knowledge-based and intelligent control systems, including fuzzy logic control and artificial neuralnetworks:* Introduction to intelligent control* Fuzzy sets and systems* Intelligent data analysis and system identification* Knowledge based fuzzy control (direct and supervisory)* Artificial neural networks, learning algorithms* Control based on fuzzy and neural models* Reinforcement learning* Examples of real-world applications

Study Goals Main objective: understand and be able to apply 'intelligent control' techniques, namely fuzzy logic and artificial neural networksto both adaptive and non-adaptive control.

After successfully completing the course, the student is able to:

* Name the limitations of traditional linear control methods and state the motivation for intelligent control. Give examples of intelligent control techniques and their applications.

* Formulate the mathematical definitions of a fuzzy set and the associated concepts and properties (alpha-cut, support,convexity, normality, etc.), basic fuzzy set-theoretic operators, fuzzy relations and relational composition.

* Explain the notion of a fuzzy system and define the Mamdani, Takagi-Sugeno and singleton fuzzy model. State and apply thecompositional rule of inference and the Mamdani algorithm. Define and apply the center of gravity and the mean of maximadefuzzification method.

* Describe how fuzzy models can be constructed from data, give examples of techniques for antecedent and consequentparameter estimation. Compute consequent parameters in Takagi-Sugeno fuzzy model by using the least-squares method.

* Explain the difference between model-based and model-free fuzzy control design. Give the basic steps in knowledge-basedfuzzy control design. Define a low-level and a high-level (supervisory) fuzzy controller, explain the differences.

* Explain the concept of an artificial neural network and a neuro-fuzzy network, give some examples and explain the differences.Define and apply the back-propagation training algorithm. Explain the difference between first-order and second-order gradientmethods.

* Show how dynamics are incorporated into fuzzy models and neural networks, give examples. Discuss how dynamic modelscan be identified from data.

* Give block diagrams and explain the notions of inverse-model control, predictive control, internal model control, direct andindirect adaptive control. Explain the meaning of the variables and parameters in recursive least-squares estimation.

* Explain the motivation and the basic elements of reinforcement learning. Define and explain the concepts of value function,Bellman equation, value iteration, Q-iteration, on-line reinforcement learning algorithms, actor-critic control scheme.

* Define hard, fuzzy and possibilistic partitions, explain the fuzzy c-means algorithm and its parameters.

* Implement and apply the above concepts to a simulated nonlinear process or a given data set, using Matlab and Simulink.

Education Method Lectures and two assignments - literature assignment and practical Matlab / Simulink assignment.


Lecture notes: R. Babuska. Knowledge-Based Control Systems. Overhead sheets and other course material (software, demos)can be downloaded from the course Website (www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4081) and handed out at the lectures.

Assessment Written exam, closed book.

* SC4081-10 D1 The exam constitute 60% of the final mark* SC4081-10 D2 Literature assignment 20% of the final mark

* SC4081-10 D3 Practical Matlab / Simulink assignment 20% of the final mark.A mini-symposium is organized in order for the students to present the results of the literature assignment.


SC4081-10 D1 Knowledge Based Control Systems, Exam 3



See details SC4081-10

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34

Course Language EnglishDepartment 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control

of 186



SC4081-10 D2 Knowledge Based Control Systems, Literature .5




Education Period Different, to be announced




SC4081-10 D3 Knowledge Based Control Systems, Matlab .5




Education Period 3

Start Education 3




SC4091 Optimization in Systems and Control 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. B.H.K. De SchutterContact Hours / Weekx/x/x/x

4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Expected prior knowledge Basic knowledge about linear state space models and stability, and basic experience with Matlab

Course Contents In this course we study numerical optimization methods, mainly from a user point of view, and we discuss several applicationsof optimization in systems and control. First we discuss the basic characteristics and properties of various optimization methods.We also provide guidelines to determine which algorithms are most suited for a given optimization problem. Next, thepreviously treated optimization methods are used in a multi-criteria controller design application. We also focus on thetranslation of the design constraints into mathematical constraints. Another important topic is the determination of good initialconditions. For more information, see: http://www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4091

Study Goals After this course the students should be able to select the most efficient and best suited optimization algorithm for a givenoptimization problem. They should also be able to reformulate an engineering problem into a (mathematical) optimizationproblem starting from the given specifications. They should be able to reduce the complexity of the problem usingsimplifications and/or approximations so as to augment the efficiency of the solution approach.



Lecture notes "Optimization in systems and control" by T. van den Boom and B. De Schutter, Delft, 2009 + handouts

Assessment written examination (closed book, no calculators) + report on the practical assignment


of 186



SC4110 System Identification 5

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. X.J.A. Bombois



0/0/6/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Course Contents Experimental modelling of dynamic systems; methodology.Discrete-time signal- and system-analysis. Identification of transferfunctions.Representations of linear models; black-box models.Identification of prediction-error-methods; least squares-method.Approximation modelling; algorithms. Experiment design anddata-analysis. Identification in time- and frequency-domain;closed-loop identification; model validation; Matlab toolbox;laboratory assignment.

Study Goals General learning objectives

System identification deduces and subsequently validates mathematical models of real-life dynamical systems (industrialprocesses, mechanical servo-systems, ) based on experimental data collected from those systems. This course can be consideredas a follow up of the course Sc4010 Filtering and Identification where different solutions to identify a model are presented (notenevertheless that Sc4010 is in no way a prerequisite for this course). The course Sc4110 selects two widely-used linearidentification methodologies: Empirical Transfer Function Estimate (ETFE) and Prediction Error Identification (PEI) andprovides the students with engineering and theoretical skills to perform the identification in a suitable way. In particular, afterthis course, the students are able to set up an experiment, identify a nominal model, assess the accuracy/precision of this model,and make appropriate design choices to arrive at a validated model.

Detailed learning objectives:

1)Based on time-domain input-output data collected on the true system in open loop, the student is able to deduce a frequency-domain model of a system using the ETFE identification method2)The student is able to specify the bias and variance properties of models identified by the ETFE identification method.3)For the ETFE identification method, the student is able to interpret the bias and variance properties of identified models, andknows how these properties can be influenced by input signal design and by applying windowing techniques.4)The student is able to specify different linear model structures, and to characterize their computational and statistical propertiesin prediction error identification.5)The student masters the statistical properties (bias, variance, consistency) of prediction error estimators both for the situation of exact plant and noise model sets, and for the situation of exact plant model sets only.6)The student can interpret estimated models as approximations of an underlying physical systems, through the specification of well-defined approximation criteria in the frequency domain, and is able to select design variables so as to arrive at identifiedmodels that have prechosen approximative properties.7)The student is able to specify how experiment design and signal to noise ratio affect estimated models. This includes masteringthe concept of sufficiently exciting input signals, and the design of appropriate input signals.8)The student is able to apply and interpret correlation-based model structure validation tests, and to draw conclusions on the(in)validity of model structures, distinguishing between plant models and noise models.9)For both ETFE and PE identification methods, the student is able to appropriately acquire digital data from a real-life system(choice of sampling frequency, data processing).

Required level for the assignment

1)the student is able to explain in details the presented theory, to demonstrate important properties and to make links andcomparisons between the different parts of the course2)the student is able to use the presented tools in practice on a laboratory setup and to interpret his/her result with a criticalattitude

Education Method Lectures and project 0/0/6/0Assignment form: final project on a laboratory setup followed by an oral examination


lecture notes and slides

Prerequisites Basics in linear algebra and signal theory

Assessment Oral and project

Assignment form: final project on a laboratory setup followed by an oral examinationRemarks Course load: 14 theory courses, 3 exercise sessions and 2 computer sessions


of 186



SC4120 Special Topics in Signals, Systems & Control 3




0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4



Course Contents The lecture has a changing content, directed towards the current developments in signal analysis, system identification andcontrol engineering. It either consists of contributions from different lecturers, and is sometimes organized in the form of aseminar sequence with active participation of students.

Please notice that the course is not offered every year. Check Blackboard for details.

Study Goals Acquire competence to report on a particularly chosen scientific development within signal analysis, system identification orcontrolIdentify essentials in an advanced scientific article or book chapter about signals, systems or controlCompose a summary with a balanced exposition of generic aspects, details, examplesOrally report on results of investigation, including an educated evaluation of the subjectDefend presentation and evaluation in a scientific discussion with audienceEnter a scientific dispute about the particular topic of specialization of a fellow-student

Education Method Lecture 0/0/0/2


Lecture notes or book to be announced

Assessment Appointment


SC4150 Fuzzy Logic and Engineering Applications 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. J. Hellendoorn


3/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Required for Core curriculum

Course Contents Fuzzy logic techniques can be applied in various engineering domains, mainly in fields where reasoning under uncertainty playsan important role. This course provides background in fuzzy set theory, fuzzy logic and related soft-computing techniques withapplications in control, information and data processing, artificial intelligence and decision making. See also:http:/www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4150.

Study Goals Main objective: understand fuzzy logic, fuzzy decision making and fuzzy control, and be able to translate linguistic expressionsinto fuzzy sets and derive conclusions.Understand the difference between fuzziness, probability and possibility.Understand characteristic functions, operations on fuzzy sets and fuzzy relations.Apply the Compositional Rule of Inference and the Generalized Modus Ponens.Analyze the defuzzification procedure.Know fuzzy data bases.Apply Mamdani and Gödel inference for fuzzy control.Understand look-up tables for fuzzy controllers, stability and robustness.Apply sliding mode fuzzy control.Synthesize fuzzy decision making.Know subjectivity and single-step, single-person decision making.Apply measures, weights, and criteria-criteria dependency.Analyze decision operators.

Education Method LecturesLiterature and StudyMaterials

Course notes (sold online via Blackboard)

Assessment Written, open book


of 186



SC4160 Modeling and Control of Hybrid Systems 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. B.H.K. De Schutter

Instructor Prof.dr.ir. B.H.K. De Schutter

Instructor Dr.ir. A. Abate


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 3


Expected prior knowledge basic systems and control course (such as e.g. SC3020ET, SC4020, SC4031, ...), basic experience with Matlab (for the practicalassignment)

Course Contents Hybrid systems are characterized by the interaction of time-continuous models (governed by differential or difference equations)on the one hand, and logic rules and discrete-event systems (described by, e.g., automata, finite state machines, etc.) on the other.In this course we give an overview of the field of hybrid systems ranging from modeling, over analysis and simulation, toverification and control. We particularly focus on modeling, analysis, and control of tractable classes of hybrid systems.

Study Goals After this course the students should be familiar with some basic modeling, analysis and control techniques for hybrid systems,and they should be able to explain in their own words the main ideas of each method and to indicate the major advantages anddisadvantages of each method.The students should also be able to apply these techniques on simple case studies.



Lecture notes "Modeling and control of hybrid systems" by B. De Schutter and W.P.M.H. Heemels, Delft 2009

Assessment practical assignment with report and oral discussion (open book)Department 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control

SC4170AP Inverse Problems & Statistical Signal Processing 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. A.J. den Dekker



0/2/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2



Course Contents Inverse problems, regularization, Bayesian statistical inference andparameter estimation, Kalman filtering, interval estimation andhypothesis testing.

Study Goals General learning objectives:After this course, the student is able toanalyze inverse problems from the perspective of wanting to make inferences about physical systems from experimentalmeasurements.solve inverse problems making use of linear algebra as well as statistical signal processing methods.

Specific learning objectives:After this course, the student is able todefine and identify well-posed and ill-posed inverse problems.differentiate between well-conditioned and ill-conditioned inverse problems.classify linear inverse problems as model fitting problems or indirect imaging problems.solve linear model fitting problems by means of Singular Value Decomposition (SVD) using MATLAB.illustrate the sensitivity of image reconstruction to noise and small singular values.solve linear ill-posed inverse problems using Thikonov regularization and Truncated Singular Value Decomposition (TSVD).illustrate the trade-off between the data misfit and the solution semi-norm by calculating the L-curve and employ this curve to

choose an appropriate value of the regularization parameter in regularization methods for linear inverse problems.efficiently solve large systems of simultaneous equations for regularization problems using MATLAB.describe the role of probability and statistics in inverse problems.employ the concepts forward and inverse probability, Bayes theorem, prior and posterior probability, likelihood function,sufficient statistic, bias, (co)variance and statistical inference to inverse problem analysis.derive the minimum mean-square error estimator, the maximum a posteriori estimator, the maximum likelihood estimator andthe minimum variance that an estimator can have for a given bias (the Cramér-Rao Lower Bound).assess whether or not a given model is appropriate for explaining the data by means of Monte Carlo simulations and by testingthe goodness of fit against carefully chosen statistical standards.quantify uncertainties in estimated parameters.apply standard, numerical, iterative methods for multidimensional nonlinear optimization to nonlinear estimation problemsdescribe regularization in a Bayesian framework.solve (recursive linear) inverse problems using the (recursive) least squares algorithm.apply the (extended) Kalman filter to solve inverse problems with time-varying parameters (using MATLAB).

Education Method 7 lectures or self-study (depending on the number of students enrolled)


Course Notes, available on Blackboard.

Assessment 1 assignment plus oral examDepartment 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control

of 186



SC4180ES Modeling and Control 6

Responsible Instructor Dr.ing. D. Jeltsema



0/0/4/4

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period 45


Course Contents Based on the analogies between the physical laws and energy flows of electrical and mechanical components, a systematicmodelings approach is developed to describe the dynamic behavior of mechatronic systems. The resulting (non-linear) modelsare represented by differential equations or state-space descriptions. The dynamical behavior of the models is determined by thesolutions of the differential equations. These solutions will be analyzed in the phase-space, and qualitative aspects, such asLyapunov stability, will be studied. Special attention will be devoted to linearized models that describe the dynamic behavior ina small area of operation around an equilibrium point.

Model based control design methods are developed for linear dynamical models. The design cycle starts with the specification of control objectives taking into account performance requirements and uncertainty of the linear model followed by the tuning of the classical PID controller based on the frequency-response method. The analysis and design methods will take place in thecontinuous-time and frequency domain. Attention will be devoted to the implementation of the continuous time controller usingdigital hardware. The design method will be applied to realistic case studies with the help of Matlab and Simulink simulationsoftware.

Study Goals To enable the student to derive a mathematical model of physical electro-mechanical systems and to analyse the solution andstability of the derived differential equations. To enable the student to specify a control problem for linear system taking bothtime- and frequency design criteria in account and to derive a PID controller using loop shaping of the frequency response.



Reader: Dynamische Regelsystemen D1, J.M.A. Scherpen and D. Jeltsema, TU Delft;Franklin, et. al, Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems

Students are expected to have basic working knowledge of differential equations, complex variables, linear algebra and Laplacetransform. Consult Appendices A-C of the above book, or other similar literature.

Assessment Written exam.


of 186



SC4190CH Process Dynamics and Control 6

Responsible Instructor Ir. A.E.M. Huesman


0/0/4/4

Education Period 34None (Self Study)

Start Education 34

Exam Period 4


Course Contents IntroductionOverview of the process industry.Design versus operation.Batch and continuous operation.Objectives of process control.

Dynamic modelingMotivation.General procedure.Conservation laws and constitutive equations.Degrees of freedom.Examples of lumped and distributed process systems.Identification.

AnalysisLinearization, non-linearity in process systems.

State space format.Laplace transformation and analysis.The concept of transfer function and block diagram.Common transfer functions; 1st order, integrator, 2nd order etc.Model approximation (first/second order plus dead time).Frequency domain transformation and analysis.Interaction.

ControlFeedback and feedforward.Actuation and sensing; instrumentation.Control in the Laplace domain.Control in the frequency domain.PID control (choice and tuning).Direct synthesis and Internal Model Control (IMC).Extensions; ratio, feedforward, cascade, override etc.Dealing with interaction.

Advanced topicsBatch control (by sequential function charts).Plantwide control; some aspects.Optimization; role during operation.

Study Goals 1. Have a general understanding of process operation.2. Be able to analyze process dynamics (model based).3. Be able to design a control system for a unit operation.4. Understand the control system of a complete plant.

Education Method Lectures and Matlab instruction.


Handouts and Matlab tutorial.

Books Process Dynamics and Control, D.E. Seborg, T.F. Edgar and D.A. Mellichamp, 2nd edition, Wiley, 2004.

Assessment 1 assignment and 2 written tests.


of 186



SC4210 Vehicle Mechatronics 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. E.G.M. Holweg

Instructor Dr. M. Corno


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Course Contents In the modern cars, electronic components, hence mechatronic components and systems are more and more embedded in thevehicle, especially in the areas of entertainment, driving comfort, engine management and active safety. Currently about 30% of the cost of a car can be contributed to electronic components and it is expected that this trend will continue in the years to come,since the car manufacturers are further improving the functionality of these systems. The introduction of electronic stabilityprograms (ESP) has greatly contributed to road safety and more cars will be equipped with ESP and more advanced ESP systemsare being developed. Besides safety, electronics can also contribute to influencing the driving behaviour of the vehicle, creatingan even stronger brand identity (e.g., safety, fun to drive, etc.). In order to accomplish this, new control architectures need to bedeveloped such as Global Chassis Control. It may be clear that by introducing electronics in vehicles it is paramount to focus onthe robustness and reliability of embedded mechatronic components and systems.The Vehicle Mechatronics course will focus on this trend with special attention to the integration of the electrical and mechanicaldomains (mechatronics) and the control aspects of the vehicle and its sub-systems. The following car systems will be reviewed;steering, braking, suspension, engine & powertrain and tires. Special focus will be given to sensors & sensor networks andactuators (e.g., drive-by-wire) within these respective systems. In the design of new vehicle control architectures such as globalchassis control, a proper understanding of vehicle dynamics, robustness aspects such as fail safe and fault tolerant behaviour andthe mathematical modelling and simulation (e.g., Matlab/Simulink) of the vehicle, its components and the controller shall beaddressed.

Study Goals Automotive SensorsSteering Systems (Traditional Mechanical System, Assisted Steering Systems and Steer-by-wire)

Braking Systems (Traditional hydraulic brakes, brake-by-wire, introduction to longitudinal braking dynamics and ABS systems)Suspension (Passive, Semi-Active and Active Systems, Design considerations and control logics)Electric and Hybrid Vehicles (actuation, energy storage systems, engine, powertrain and regenerative braking)Design of new vehicle control architectures such as global chassis controlRobustness aspects (fail safe and fault tolerant behaviour)Mathematical modelling and simulation


Assessment The exam consist of two written assignments and an oral discussion of the written assignments.


of 186



WB1310 Multibody Dynamics A 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. A.L. Schwab


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45


Expected prior knowledge wb1113wb, wb1216Course Contents Multibody Dynamics is about the analysis of the motion of complex mechanical systems as in a robot arm, a railway bogie or a

gantry crane. In this course you will learn about the fundamentals of Multibody Dynamics: the description of the orientation of arigid body in space, the Newton-Euler equations of motion for a 3D rigid body, how to add constraints to the equations of motion, and how to solve such a system of coupled equations. Next you will spend most of the time (80%) in doing theassignments with the ADAMS Software.

Study Goals The student is able to make a complex computer model of a realistic 3-D mechanical system in a standard software package formultibody system dynamics (currently MSC.ADAMS), to perform a dynamic analysis on the model, to draw some conclusionsfrom this analysis, and to identify the limitations of the model.

More specifically, the student must be able to:

1.apply the Newton-Euler equations of motion to a single 3D rigid body2.describe the orientation of a rigid body in 3-D space by means of Euler angles and derive expressions for the angular velocitiesin terms of the Euler angles and their time derivatives3.construct a computer model of a complex mechanical system by selecting the appropriate number of rigid bodies, and numberand type of constraints4.make approximate dynamic calculations for a complex computer model in order to determine for instance the stiffness and the

damping of individual components5.make approximate dynamic calculations for a vehicle system model in order to verify for instance the eigenfrequencies and theequilibrium state in steady motion6.explain the difference between the results from a dynamic analysis on the model and the behaviour of the real system, identifythe limitations of the model7.explain the finite accuracy of the results from a dynamic analysis due to the finite accuracy of the numerical integrationtogether with the constraint violations

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week), computer assignment.

Computer Use The course and the course/lab work are fully computer-oriented. The Lab assignment consists of a number of practical problemsthat have to be worked out with the software package ADAMS. Your findings are to be put down in a Lab Report.


Course material:Lecture Notes and M.Wisse, Introduction to ADAMS, Delft, 1999.

References from literature:A.A.Shabana, ' Dynamics of multibody systems', Wiley, New York, 1998.E.J.Haug, ' Computer aided kinematics and dynamics of mechanical systems, Volume I: Basic methods', Allyn and Bacon,Boston, 1989.

P.E.Nikravesh, ' Computer-aided analysis of mechanical systems', Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1988.M. Géradin, A. Cardano, ' Flexible multibody dynamics: A finite element approach', J. Wiley, Chichester, New York, 2001.

Assessment Written exam + assignment report

Remarks The written exam is of the open book type and has the form of a questionnaire about the findings as written down in your LabReport. This report serves as reference material for your exam. At the end of the exam the questionnaire together with the LabReport are to be handed over, The grading is on both items.

Checkout the wb1310 home-page at http://tam.cornell.edu/~als93/ for up-to-date information.



of 186



WB1405A Stability of Thin-Walled Structures 1 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen


0/4/2/0

Education Period 34

Start Education 3



Required for AE4-534Expected prior knowledge Basic courses on mechanics and finite elements.

Course Contents Detailed description of topics:

Functional descriptionGeneral buckling phenomenaInitial post-buckling behaviourLinear and nonlinear pre-buckling solutionBuckling of discrete systemsBuckling of finite element modelsGeometrical stiffnessGeometrically nonlinear finite element analysisEigenvalue analysisSensitivity analysis

Study Goals The course is designed to give the students a thorough foundation for solving the variety of structural stability problems theymay encounter in practice. Students become acquainted with both analytical and numerical techniques. The course is intended toplace stability problems in a broad context. Therefore nonlinear buckling, post-buckling and design sensitivity analysis are also

included.Education Method Lectures (4 hours per week in period 2A, 2 hours per week in period 2B)

Computer Use ANSYS, MARC or NASTRAN finite element software


Course material:Every student must prepare his own lecture notes. Some handouts will be provided. In addition, references to literature andtextbooks will be given during the lectures.

References from literature:Normal lectures will be provided. For further reading references to textbooks and literature will be given. Exercises will bedistributed that lead to both analytical and numerical training. Several of these exercises require basic hands-on experience withfinite element modeling.

Assessment Take-home exercises + oral exam

Remarks Assignments will be provided during the lectures. The answers must be handed in before the oral exam.

The final grade is based on the quality and completeness of the answers on take-home excersises and the quality of an oral exam.


of 186



WB1408A Shell Structures - Introductory Course 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. L.J. Ernst



0/3/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2



Required for wb1408BExpected prior knowledge wb1212, wb1213-03, wb1214, wb1311

Course Contents Load bearing principles in shell structuresAxi-symmetrical thin shellsMembrane theory versus general theoryStress catogaries and life assessment, background of "design by analysis" in engineering codesThermo-mechanical loadingAxi-symmetric thick-walled shellsFinite Element applications to local shell problemsMechanical design aspects of pressure vessels, flares, tube-plates, nozzles, flanges, etc.

Study Goals The student is able to understand and calculate the mechanical response on mechanical and thermal loading of thin shells of revolution such as generally used in the design of pressure vessels. In addition the student is able to design pressure vesselscomponents such as nozzles, flares, pipe plates, flanges, etc.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.understand general load bearing principles in shell structures2.describe the theory of linear axi-symmetric shells

3.identify the difference in load bearing behaviour according to membrane theory and general theory4.understand the limits of applicability of thin shell theory5.classify stresses in thin and thick shells according to stress categories and perform life time assessment6.perform "design by analysis" of thin and thick pressure vessel parts in accordance with engineering codes and standards7.perform finite element stress analysis to shells and components and to perform the reliability evaluation

Education Method Lectures (4 hours per week), computer exercise

Computer Use ANSYS-exercise


Course material:Lecture notes available via Blackboard

References from literature:S. Timoshenko, "Theory of Plates and Shells", MacGraw-HillS. Schwaigerer, "Festigkeitsberechnung im Dampfkessel, Behalter-und Rohrleitungsbau", Spriger-VerlagTimoshenko and Goodier, Theory of ElasticityV.V. Novozhilov, "Thin Shell Theory", Noordhof R.J. Roark, W.C. Young, "Formulas for stress and strain", McGraw-HillASME-code, NB3000 and A8000


Special Information This course will be discontinued by september 2011

Remarks Oral exam after approval of exercises


Design Content Yes, Designing for reliability of pressure vessels and components


of 186



WB1408B Shell Structures - Advanced Course 5

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. L.J. Ernst



0/0/6/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Expected prior knowledge wb1408ACourse Contents Tensorial description of geometry of surfaces, general nonlinear thin shell theory, simplified shell theories.

Study Goals The student is able to understand the general non-linear theory of thin shells. The student is also able to understand theapplicability (and limits) of simplified shell theories. The student has a good understanding of general load bearing behaviour of thin shells of arbitrary shapes.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.understand the general non-linear theory of thin shells and its limitations2.work with the tensorial description of geometry of surfaces, the general nonlinear thin shell theory and simplified shell theories3.familiarize himself with the backgrounds of the extended field of "Plates and Shells" in order to have good entrance to the vastliterature on the subject

Education Method Lectures (4 / 2 hours per week)


Course material:Lecture notes.


· Y. Basar, W.B. Kratzig, Mechanik der Fluchentragwerke, ISBN 3-528-08685-8.· W.T. Koiter, A consistent first approximation in the general theory of thin elastic shells, Proc.I.U.T.A.M.Symp.on thetheory of thin elastic shells (Delft, August 1959), North Holland Publishing Company, Amsterdam (1960).· W.T. Koiter, A systematic simplification of the equations in the linear theory of thin shells, Kon.Ned.Academie derWetenschappen, Proceedings, Series B, 64, No.5, 1961.· W.T. Koiter, On the non-linear theory of thin elastic shells, Sept 25, 1965.

Assessment Oral exam + assignments

Special Information This course will be discontinued by september 2011

Remarks Examination by appointment.


Design Content Not applicable


WB1409 Theory of Elasticity 3



Instructor Dr.ir. M. Langelaar


2/2/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1



Required for wb1405a

Course Contents COURSE IS NO LONGER PRESENTED AND IS REPLACED BY THENEW COURSE WB1451-05

Study Goals ..

Education Method On appointment:Lectures (2 hours per week), 2 other hours per week.

Assessment Exercises + oral exam

Remarks More information on http://www-tm.wbmt.tudelft.nl/~onck/wb1409.htm


Design Content The theory of elasticity is the foundation for the analysis of stresses and the flexibility in the design of structures andcomponents. This holds for the initial design stages, where "rough" estimates are made based on simple models (beams, etc.), aswell as for the final, detailed designs where advanced numerical tools are used.


of 186



WB1412 Linear & Non-lineair Vibrations in Mechanical Systems 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. P.T.L.M. van Woerkom



0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 34

Exam Period none


Expected prior knowledge wb1216, wi2051wb, wi3097wb

Parts The course consists of two parts:

- presentation of a number of topics selected from the Course Contents (see below), by the lecturer;

- investigation of a specific topic, by the participant. The topic for the assignment will be selected in consultation betweenparticipant and lecturer. The participant will carry out an exploratory study and document his findings in the form of a writtenprogress report and a written final report.Alternatively, the participant can elect to solve a number of standard exercises assigned by the lecturer.

Course Contents - Introduction: review of linear vibration theory, sources of excitation, nonlinear vibrations in mechanical systems.

- Occurrence and types of mechanical vibrations: forced vibrations, self-excited vibrations, stick-slip vibrations, limit cycles, jump resonance, transient response due to impulse excitation, effect of impact, effect of vibrations on humans (hearing, comfort),machine vibrations, machine-tool chatter, vibration of structures due to fluid-structure interaction, intended vibrations in micro-electro-mechanical systems (MEMS), dynamics of buckling.

- Analysis of linear and nonlinear vibrations in discrete systems: phase plane analysis, stability of equilibrium, stability of motion, stability criteria (Routh-Hurwitz, Sylvester, Lyapunov, Mathieu), Duffing's method, method of averaging (Krylov-Bogoliubov, Van der Pol), Poincare perturbation method, Poincare-Lindstedt perturbation method, two-time-variableperturbation method, bifurcations.

- Suppression of vibrations: vibration isolation, passive and active vibration damping.

- Introduction of nonlinear vibrations in continuum systems: nonlinear vibration of a string and of a (possibly buckled)beam.

Study Goals The student is able to model mathematically the dynamics of vibrating mechanical systems (i.e., set up the equations of motion)and to analyse and interpret the dynamic response, also in the presence of mechanical system nonlinearities and of parametricexcitation.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.demonstrate understanding of the essentials of linear vibration theory, for single degree-of-freedom (dof) systems and for multidof systems2.model and analyse four classes of response suppression techniques applicable to multi dof linear systems, namely passiveisolation, passive damping, active isolation, active damping3.identify physical sources of nonlinear dynamic behaviour of multi dof and of continuum systems, occurring in a wide field of engineering endeavour4.analyse system stability under small perturbations (linearisation; Routh-Hurwitz, Sylvester, first method of Lyapunov) andunder large perturbations (global stability, using second method of Lyapunov)5.describe global nonlinear dynamic behaviour single dof systems, using the phase plane6.analyse weakly nonlinear dynamic behaviour (perturbed motion) of single and multi dof systems using general perturbationtheory (Poincarï¿½ expansion, Krylov-Bogoliubov method, averaging methods, two-variable method), to justify equivalentlinearization, and to apply these techniques in the analysis of the dynamics of various physical systems7.analyse periodic behaviour of single dof nonlinear systems (Lindstedt method, Duffing method, averaging methods) and toanalyse stability of periodic behaviour (Floquet analysis, Mathieu analysis)8.discuss physical sources of parametric excitation in linear systems, to analyse resulting periodic motion including presence of viscous damping (generalised Mathieu equation)9.model and analyse the dynamics of nonlinear vibrations in distributed systems - specifically sound propagation, stringvibration, and dynamic buckling of beams

Some items may be given more attention than others, depending on the interests of the participants.

Education Method Lectures, presentation & investigation

Computer Use Matlab, if desired as part of take-home assignment.


Course material:Course notes, on Blackboard (in preparation).

References from literature:- Dimarogonas, A. Vibration for Engineers. Second edition. Prentice-Hall, 1996.- Harris, C.M. and Piersol, A.G. Harris's Shock and Vibration Handbook. Fifth edition. McGraw-Hill, 2002.- Inman, D.J. Engineering Vibration. Prentice-Hall, 1996. See especially chapter 10 on nonlinear vibrations (only in this firstedition!)- Jordan, D.W. and Smith, P. Nonlinear Ordinary Differential Equations - an Introduction to Dynamical Systems. Third edition.Oxford University Press, 1999.- Kelly, S.G. Fundamentals of Mechanical Vibrations. Second edition. McGraw-Hill International Editions, 2000.- Rao, S.S. Mechanical Vibrations, SI edition. Pearson / Prentice-Hall, 2005.- Thomson, J.J. Vibrations and Stability - Order and Chaos. McGraw-Hill, London, 1997.


Remarks The assessment (grading) will be based on the quality of the investigation as documented in the report.


of 186



WB1413-04 Multibody Dynamics B 4




0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period noneDifferent, to be announced


Expected prior knowledge wb1113wb, wb1216

Course Contents In this course we will cover a systematic approach to the generation and solution of equations of motion for mechanical systemsconsisting of multiple interconnected rigid bodies, the so-called Multibody Systems. This course differs from 'AdvancedDynamics', which mostly covers theoretical results about classes of idealized systems (e.g. Hamiltonian systems), in that the goalhere is to find the motions of relatively realistic models of systems (including, for example, motors, dissipation and contactconstraints). Topics covered are:-Newton-Euler equations of motion for a simple planar system, free body diagrams, constraint equations and constraint forces,uniqueness of the solution.-Systematic approach for a system of interconnected rigid bodies, virtual power method and Lagrangian multipliers.-transformation of the equations of motion in terms of generalizedindependent coordinates, and lagrange equations.-Non-holonomic constraints as in rolling without slipping, degrees of freedom and kinematic coordinates.-Unilateral constraints as in contact problems.-Numerical integration of the equations of motion, stability and accuracy of the applied methods.-Numerical integration of a coupled differential and algebraic system of equations (DAE's), Baumgarte stabilisation, projectionmethod and independent coordinates.

-Newton-Euler equations of motion for a rigid three-dimensional body, the need to describe orientation in space, Euler angles,Cardan angles, Euler parameters and Quaternions.-Equations of motion for flexible multibody systems, introduction to Finite Element Method approach, Linearised equations of motion.

Upon request and if time and ability of the instructor allows, related topics are open for discussion.

Study Goals The student is able to find the motions of linked rigid body systems in two and three dimensions including systems with variouskinematic constraints, like there are: sliding, hinges and rolling, and closed kinematic chains.

More specifically, the student must able to:1.derive the Newton-Euler equations of motion for a simple planar system, draw free body diagrams, set-up constraint equationsand introduce constraint forces, and demonstrate the uniqueness of the solution2.derive the equations of motion for a system of interconnected rigid bodies by means of a systematic approach: virtual powermethod and Lagrangian multipliers3.transform the equations of motion in terms of generalized independent coordinates, and derive and apply the Lagrangeequations of motion4.apply the techniques from above to systems having non-holonomic constraints as in rolling without slipping, degrees of

freedom and kinematic coordinates5.apply the techniques from above to systems having unilateral constraints as in contact problems6.perform various numerical integration schemes on the equations of motion, and predict the stability and accuracy of the appliedmethods7.perform numerical integration on a coupled system of differential and algebraic equations (DAE's), apply Baumgartestabilization, the coordinate projection method and transformation to independent coordinates8.derive the Newton-Euler equations of motion for a general rigid three-dimensional body system connected by constraints,identify the need to describe orientation in spacedescribe the orientation in 3-D space of a rigid body by means of: Euler angles, Cardan angles, Euler parameters andQuaternions, derive the angular velocity and accelerations in terms of these parameters and their time derivatives, and theirinverse9.derive the equations of motion for flexible multibody systems by means of a Finite Element Method approach, and extend thisto linearised equations of motion


Computer Use The course is computer-oriented. In doing the assignments you will be using Matlab, Maple or related computer software.


Course material: Arend L. Schwab, `Applied Multibody Dynamics', Delft, 2003

References from literature:A.A.Shabana, ' Dynamics of multibody systems', Wiley, New York, 1998.E.J.Haug, ' Computer aided kinematics and dynamics of mechanical systems, Volume I: Basic methods', Allyn and Bacon,Boston, 1989.P.E.Nikravesh, ' Computer-aided analysis of mechanical systems', Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1988.M. Géradin, A. Cardano, ' Flexible multibody dynamics: A finite element approach', J. Wiley, Chichester, New York, 2001.

Assessment Final Project

Remarks There will be weekly assignments and a final project. You have to make a report on the final project. In doing the assignments Istrongly encourage you to work together. The final project is individual. Check out the up-to-date web page athttp://tam.cornell.edu/~als93/


of 186



WB1416 Numerical Methods for Dynamics 3

Responsible Instructor Prof. D.J. Rixen

Instructor Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen


0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3


Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge Statics and Strength of materials, Dynamics (e.g. wb1418, wb1419), Linear Algebra, Numerical Analysis (e.g. wi3097wb),

Finite Elements (e.g. wb1212-1214)

Course Contents Using engineering tools as black boxes can be dangerous and inefficient. This is especially true when performing dynamicanalysis of structures in a finite element package. Choosing the right finite element types and the suitable solution procedure iscritical to get accurate results and to compute solutions efficiently. In order to discuss basic principles of numerical methods fordynamics and to explain fundamental concepts related to dynamic analysis, the course will cover the following topics:- Elastodynamic equations for a continuous media (short recap)- Discretization techniques: Rayleigh-Ritz and Finite elements (bar, beam)- Linear solvers, storage techniques and singular systems- Free vibration modes, mode superposition techniques and eigensolvers for large systems- Accuracy of modal superposition, modal acceleration, system excited through support- model reduction, including dynamic substructuring- time-integration of linear and non-linear systems- computing senstitivity of modes and eigenfrequency to design parameters, model updating- Parallel computing techniques for fast solversSome topics might be dropped depending on students background. Specific topics might also be discussed if time permits.

In this courses emphasis will be put on understanding fundamental concepts of numerical methods and how they relate to the

mechanics of structures. Therefore, the oral (open book) exam will concentrate on the mastering of concepts rather than onformulation details. A computational project will be included (using Matlab pre-cooked routines and/or Ansys-Nastran).

Study Goals The student is able to grasp the basic numerical concepts underlying the methods used to perform the analysis of models inengineering statics and dynamics. He can choose the appropriate methods in specific applications and analyse the reasons whymethods can result in erroneous solutions. He is aware of computational and programming issues relative to specific numericaltechniques and implementations.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1. understand the assumption underlying the discretization process and the associated limitations in terms of spatial andfrequential accuracy2.describe the solutions steps needed to solve linear systems and choose the proper algorithm according to the problem (LU,Cholesky, LDLT) including storage techniques3.identify singular matrices arising from mechanical systems and compute a generalized inverse of a singular matrix and itsnullspace4.use the concept of eigenmodes to write the dynamic solution as a modal superposition and the system matrices in the form of spectral expansions5.choose the proper eigensolvers and implement standard techniques from the family of the power iteration including shifting6.evaluate the approximations inherent to modal truncation in the mode displacement method and apply the mode acceleration

method to correct for the static truncated part7.solve by mode superposition the dynamics of systems excited by their support and apply the technique of additional mass toreplace imposed displacements8.describe the concept of effective modal mass and explain how it can be used to evaluate the contribution of modes to theapproximation by modal series of the response of systems excited by the support9.describe the concept of model reduction and write the reduced equations and write the reduced dynamic equations according tothe static Guyan-Iron reduction10.outline the idea of substructuring and derive the substructure approximation in the Craig-Bampton method, derive theassociated reduced matrices and describe how accurate the Craig-Bampton approximation is in practice11.solve the normal equations using Laplace transforms and put the solution procedure of the normal equations in a recursivematrix12.discuss the concepts of consistency, stability and accuracy for simple implicit and explicit direct time-integration schemes13.derive the time-integration formulas belonging to the Newmark family and discuss the stability limits and the accuracy of theNewmark schemes14.write the explicit and implicit time-integration algorithms for non-linear systems15.write the sensitivity of eigenmodes and eigenfrequencies of dynamic systems16.describe the basic principles of parallel computing and explain the concept of domain decomposition and write thedecomposed problem in a dual and primal interface problem suitable for parallel computing17.write a small program (in Matlab for instance) to perform a dynamic analysis according to the Finite Element method, andimplement the proper numerical techniques

Education Method Lectures, computer use (16 hours)

Computer Use Use of ANSYS and/or Matlab for assignment and illustration.


Course material:

Lecture notes (available through blackboard)


Mechanical Vibrations, Theory and Application to Structural Dynamics, M. Géradin and D. Rixen, Wiley, 1997.The Finite Element Method: Linear Static and Dynamic Finite Element Analysis, T.J.R. Hughes Prentice-Hall, 1987.Finite Element Procedures, K.J. Bathe, Prentice-Hall, 1996Structural Dynamics: an introduction to computer methods, R.R. Craig, Wiley, 1981, ISBN 0-471-04499-7Matrix Computation, G.H. Golub and C.F. Van Loan, Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996.



of 186



WB1417-05 Fluid-Structures Interaction 4



Instructor Prof.dr.ir. H. Bijl


0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 4

Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge dynamics (e.g. wb1311, wb1418), fluid dynamics (e.g. wb1321)

Course Contents Fluid-Structure interaction is a topic that covers many important and complex problems in engineering where the interactionbetween the mechanical behaviour of a solid structure is significantly influenced by surrounding fluids (water, air, etc ) andwhere, in turn, the aero/hydro-dynamic forces are modified by the deformation of the structure. Although it was pioneered byaeronautics engineers to study the static and dynamic deformation of wings under aerodynamic forces (aeroelasticity), fluid-structure interaction analysis involves also the description of interaction phenomenon in constructions (e.g. wind inducedvibrations), vibro-acoutics, blood flow in elastic arteries or ink flow in an actuated printer head.

In the past, many semi-analytical approaches were developed to describe fluid-structure interaction. Today, complex problemsinteraction problems are investigated using engineering codes that couple structural models to fluid models.

In this course, we will recall the basics of fluid and solid mechanics and discuss some important numerical issues appearingwhen coupling fluid-structure models. In particular we will shortly introduce the Finite Volume Discretization of the fluid,discuss the expression of the fluid equation on moving meshes (Arbitrary Eulerian Lagragian formulation) and discuss timeintegration issues of the coupled problem.Vibro-acoustics will also be introduced as a special linearized case of fluid-structure interaction.

We will go in more details in discussion the issues of time-integration of the coupled problem. Also the issue on sharingforces/displacements across the interface between the fluid and the structural mesh will be handled in more details.

This course is developed in collaboration with the Aerodynamic Research Group from the Faculty of Aerospace.

Study Goals The student is able to build a proper model of a problem exhibiting coupling between fluid and solid mechanics. Using standardnumerical techniques from fluid and solid dynamics he/she can set up a discretized problem and write the coupling conditionsbetween the fields.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.derive the different forms of the Navier-Stokes and Euler equations (integral, local, conservative and non-conservative forms)2.write the coupling conditions between fluid and structure domains (compatibility/equilibrium)3.linearize the fluid equations to obtain the acoustic equations and write the vibro-acoustic coupling conditions and apply theFinite Element method to vibro-acoustic problems4.understand the issues of time integration accuracy and stability of the coupled problem5.write the Arbitrary Lagrangian Eulerian Formulation of the Fluid Dynamics6.write the coupling conditions in time between a finite volume model of a fluid domain and a finite element model of a structure7.outline and apply techniques such as virtual mesh, mesh matching and staggered time integration needed to solve numericalmodels in fluid-structure interaction

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week), seminars

Computer Use Use of ANSYS and/or Matlab for assignment and illustration.


Course material:Lecture notes (available through blackboard)

References from literature:Structural acoustics and vibration; mechanical models, variational formulations and discretization, R. Ohayon, C. Soize,Academic Press, 1998, ISBN 0-12-524945-4A modern course in aeroelasticity, Earl H. Dowell, Kluwer Academic Pub.,1995, isbn 0-7923-2788-8Fluid-Structure interaction: applied numerical methods, H. Morand. R. Ohayon, Wiley ed., 1995, isbn0-471-94459-9


Remarks The lecture are partly organized as seminars prepared by the students. The evaluation will be based on the seminar and on acomputer project



of 186



WB1418-07 Engineering Dynamics 4



4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1



Required for Engineering Dynamics and Mechanicsms (wb1419, extension of wb1418), Multibody Dynamics A (wb1310), Multibody

Dynamics B (wb1413), Numerical Methods in Dynamics (wb1416), Non-Linear Vibrations (wb1412).Expected prior knowledge Statics and Strength of materials (e.g. wb1214), Dynamics (e.g. wb1311), Linear Algebra

Course Contents The dynamic behavior of structures (and systems in general) plays an essential role in engineering mechanics and in particular inthe design of controllers. In this master course, we will discuss how the equations describing the dynamical behavior of astructure and of a mechatronical system can be set up. Fundamental concepts in dynamics such as equilibrium, stability,linearization and vibration modes are discussed. If time permits, also an introduction to discretization techniques to approximatecontinuous systems is proposed.

The course will discuss the following topics:

- Review of the virtual work principle and Lagrange equations- linearization around an equilibrium position: vibrations- Free vibration modes and modal superposition- Forced harmonic response of non-damped and damped structures

Study Goals The student is able to select different ways of setting up the dynamic equations of mechanical systems, to perform an analysis of

the system in terms of linear stability and vibration modes and to properly use mode superposition techniques for computingtransient and harmonic responses.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1. explain the relations between the principle of virtual work and the Lagrange equations for dynamics to the basic Newton laws2. describe the concept of kinematic constraints (holonomic/non-holonomic, scleronomic/rheonomic) and choose a proper set of degrees of freedom to describe a dynamic system3. write the Lagrange equations for a minimum set of degrees of freedom and extend it to systems with additional constraints(Lagrange multiplier method)4. linearize the dynamic equations by considering the different contributions of the kinetic and potential energies (both forsystem with and without overall motion imposed by scleronomic constraints)5. analyze the linear stability of dynamic systems (damped and undamped) according to their state space formulation if necessary6. explain and use the concept of free vibration modes and frequencies7. interpret and apply the orthogonality properties of modes to describe the transient and harmonic dynamic response of dampedand undamped systems8. evaluate the approximations introduced when using truncated modal series (spatial and spectral)9. explain how mode superposition can be used to identify the eigenparamters of linear dynamic systems


Computer Use The assignement will require using Matlab-like software.Literature and StudyMaterials

Course material:Lecture notes (available through blackboard)

References from literature:Mechanical Vibrations, Theory and Application to Structural Dynamics, M. Géradin and D. Rixen, Wiley, 1997.Applied Dynamics, with application to multibody and mechatronic systems, F.C. Moon, Wiley, 1998, isbn 0-471-13828-2.Engineering vibration, D.J. Inman, Prentice Hall, 2001, isbn 0-13-726142-XThe Finite Element Method: Linear Static and Dynamic Finite Element Analysis, T.J.R. Hughes Prentice-Hall, 1987.Structural Dynamics in Aeronautical Engineering, M.N. Bismark-Nasr, AIAA education series, 1999, isbn 1-56347-323-2

Assessment Oral exam + assignment

Remarks An assignment will be given which will make up part of the final mark. SInce the enphasis of the lectures will be onunderstanding concepts in dynamics more than memorizing formulas, the oral exam will be open book to evaluate yourunderstanding of the concepts.


of 186



WB1422ATU Advanced Fluid Dynamics A 6

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. J. Westerweel

Instructor Dr.ir. C. Poelma


2/2/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period 23


Required for wb1424ATU, 1424BTU

Course Contents In this course the fundamental and mathematical principles of fluid mechanics are treated. Point of departure is the conservationequations for mass and momentum. Based on these equations the equations of motion for a incompressible flow are derived. Inorder to close the equation of conservation of momentum a relationship must be prescribed between the stress tensor and thedeformation-rate tensor leading to the constitutive equation for a Newtonian fluid. The result is known as the Navier-Stokesequations. First these equations are simplified for the case of an inviscid fluid which are known as the Euler equations. Thesolution of these equations for the case of a irrotational flow leads to a treatment of potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli. This theory and law are applied to the flow around a sphere and around a cylinder. The flow around a cylinder is twodimensional and it is shown that in this case potential flow theory can be described in terms of complex function theory. Thistheory is applied to the flow around a cylinder in combination with a line vortex and by means of conformal transformations arelationship is derived with the lift force on a airfoil. In the remaining of the course the full Navier-Stokes equations, i.e.including the viscosity terms, are considered and the Reynolds number is defined. The effect of viscosity is coupled todissipation of energy and diffusion of vorticity. As example of a very viscous flow, we discuss the Stokes flow in particular theflow around a sphere. For large Reynolds numbers the boundary-layer theory is derived and the Blasius solution for theboundary layer over a flat plate is discussed.

NOTE:Knowledge of vector analysis is essential for this course. Students not familiar with vector analysis should follow wi3105me inthe first quarter.

Study Goals The student is able to describe the basic fundamentals of classical, incompressible fluid mechanics and to apply the fundamentaland mathematical principles of fluid mechanics.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1. formulate the conservation equations for mass and momentum2. derive the equations of motion for an incompressible flow, based on the conservation equations for mass and momentum3. derive the constitutive equation for a Newtonian fluid (the Navier-Stokes equations)4. simplify the Navier-Stokes equations for the case of an in viscid fluid (the Euler equations)5. solve the Euler equations for the case of an irrotational flow, leading to a treatment of potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli6. apply the potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli to the flow around a sphere and around a cylinder7. derive that in the case of a flow around a cylinder, the flow is two dimensional, and the potential flow theory can be describedin terms of complex function theory8. derive a relation with the lift force on a airfoil by applying the complex function theory to the flow around a cylinder incombination with a line vortex and by means of conformal transformations

9. consider the full Navier-Stokes equations, i.e. including the viscosity terms, and to define the Reynolds number10. couple the effect of viscosity to dissipation of energy and diffusion of vorticity11. discuss the Stokes flow, in particular the flow around a sphere, as example of a very viscous flow12. drive the boundary-layer theory for large Reynolds numbers and discuss the Blasius solution for the boundary layer over aflat plate

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week), computer demonstration

Computer Use Computers are used for demonstrations of the lecture material during the course on the basis of home-made software and on thebasis of the symbolic manipulation program Maple.


Course material:Lecture Notes "Advanced Fluid Mechanics A" in downloadable PDF-format.Book: Fluid Mechanics by Cohen & Kundu, Elsevier Academic Press


Design Content This is a fundamental subject which has only indirect relationship with design.


of 186



WB1424BTU Race Car Aerodynamics 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. G.E. Elsinga


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Course Contents Aerodynamics of Racecars. Focus will be on the aerodynamic design of racecars. The lectures will discuss how to minimize drag

and to optimize downforce. It is expected that students design an aerodynamic shape for the whole car or a part of it. The modelwill be build and experiments will be performed on the models in one of the two wind tunnel of the laboratory for aero andhydrodynamics.

Study Goals The student is able to analyze the flow around a racecar in detail. In this context the connection between flow and carperformance is studied.

More generally, the student must be able to:1. Derive a model to assess the performance of a racecar2. Use such a model to identify the critical factors determining the overall performance3. Describe methods to enhance downforce and reduce drag on a car4. Describe the aerodynamic interaction/ interference between different car components5. Design an aerodynamic experiment6. Measure the performance characteristics (downforce, drag ...) of an aerodynamic car shape in a wind tunnel experiment andassess the results

Education Method Lectures, assignments and a final wind tunnel experiment


As reference material we will use the article written by Joseph Katz in the Annual Review of Fluid Mechanics 2006, 27-63

Assessment Assignments and written reportDepartment 3mE Department Process & Energy

of 186



WB1427-03 Advanced Fluid Dynamics A 5

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. C. Poelma


2/2/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period 23


Required for wb1424ATU, 1424BTU

Expected prior knowledge wb1123 , wb1220 , wb1321, wi3105mw

Course Contents In this course the fundamental and mathematical principles of fluid mechanics are treated. Point of departure is the conservationequations for mass and momentum. Based on these equations the equations of motion for a incompressible flow are derived. Inorder to close the equation of conservation of momentum a relationship must be prescribed between the stress tensor and thedeformation-rate tensor leading to the constitutive equation for a Newtonian fluid. The result is known as the Navier-Stokesequations. First these equations are simplified for the case of an inviscid fluid which are known as the Euler equations. Thesolution of these equations for the case of a irrotational flow leads to a treatment of potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli. This theory and law are applied to the flow around a sphere and around a cylinder. The flow around a cylinder is twodimensional and it is shown that in this case potential flow theory can be described in terms of complex function theory. Thistheory is applied to the flow around a cylinder in combination with a line vortex and by means of conformal transformations arelationship is derived with the lift force on a airfoil. In the remaining of the course the full Navier-Stokes equations, i.e.including the viscosity terms, are considered and the Reynolds number is defined. The effect of viscosity is coupled todissipation of energy and diffusion of vorticity. As example of a very viscous flow, we discuss the Stokes flow in particular theflow around a sphere. For large Reynolds numbers the boundary-layer theory is derived and the Blasius solution for theboundary layer over a flat plate is discussed.

NOTE:Knowledge of vector analysis is essential for this course. Students not familiar with vector analysis should follow wi3105me inthe first quarter.

Study Goals The student is able to describe the basic fundamentals of classical, incompressible fluid mechanics and to apply the fundamentaland mathematical principles of fluid mechanics.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.formulate the conservation equations for mass and momentum2.derive the equations of motion for an incompressible flow, based on the conservation equations for mass and momentum3.derive the constitutive equation for a Newtonian fluid (the Navier-Stokes equations)4.simplify the Navier-Stokes equations for the case of an in viscid fluid (the Euler equations)5.solve the Euler equations for the case of an irrotational flow, leading to a treatment of potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli6.apply the potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli to the flow around a sphere and around a cylinder7.derive that in the case of a flow around a cylinder, the flow is two dimensional, and the potential flow theory can be describedin terms of complex function theory8.derive a relation with the lift force on a airfoil by applying the complex function theory to the flow around a cylinder incombination with a line vortex and by means of conformal transformations

9.consider the full Navier-Stokes equations, i.e. including the viscosity terms, and to define the Reynolds number10.couple the effect of viscosity to dissipation of energy and diffusion of vorticity11.discuss the Stokes flow, in particular the flow around a sphere, as example of a very viscous flow12.drive the boundary-layer theory for large Reynolds numbers and discuss the Blasius solution for the boundary layer over a flatplate

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week), computer demonstration

Computer Use Computers are used for demonstrations of the lecture material during the course on the basis of home-made software and on thebasis of the symbolic manipulation program Maple.


Course material:Lecture Notes "Advanced Fluid Mechanics A" in downloadable PDF-format.Book: Fluid Mechanics by Cohen & Kundu, Elsevier Academic Press (3rd dition).



Design Content This is a fundamental subject which has only indirect relationship with design.


of 186



WB1428-3 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. M.J.B.M. Pourquie


0/2/2/0

Education Period 23

Start Education 2



Expected prior knowledge wb1321/wb3550, wb1422atu, wi3097tu, some elementary programming skill (matlab or any other)Course Contents Introduction, the finite difference method and the finite volume method for diffusion problems.

The finite difference method and the finite volume method for convection-diffusion problemsStability of discretization schemes for the convection-diffusion equation.Conservation laws for flowing media and boundary conditions.Simulation of steady flows.Methods for the solution of discretized equations.Simulation of time-dependent flows.The pressure correction method for mass conservation.Turbulence and turbulence models.Implementation of boundary conditions.Grid generation.Several lecture hours are used for practical exercises with matlab and Fluent.

Study Goals The student is able to use commercial computational fluid dynamics (CFD) packages properly. The basis is the commercial CFDpackage Fluent, which is widely used at the TU-Delft.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.describe the two most popular methods in commercial CFD, finite differences and finite volumes

2.solve simple demonstrative problems in fluid flow and heat transfer by programming them in Matlab, using finite differencesand finite volumes3.recognize the effects of numerical methods on the solution, such as numerical diffusion and numerical dispersion and toexplain how to make these effects smaller4.recognize numerical instability, to list several ways to avoid it and to analyze stability of simple methods analytically5.solve fluid flow and heat transfer problems with the commercial CFD package Fluent, which includes the following:make the geometry in the preprocessorchoose appropriate boundary conditionscorrectly apply wall boundaries, inflow boundaries, outflow boundaries, far field boundariesadapt the geometry to properly include boundary conditionsmake an appropriate grid, taking into account grid cell quality and grid point densityrun the solver for the problemchoose appropriate flow related quantities to monitor convergence of the solvervisualize the results, obtain relevant quantities such as forces on objects and heat flux through surfacesinterpret the results and recognize where the geometry and the grid have to be improvedfind out or argue whether grid-refinement is necessary

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week), practical exercises

Computer Use Practical exercises with simple matlab examples demonstrating methods usedin a CFD program, practical exercises with the CFD package Fluent.


Course material:J.H. Ferziger and M. Peric, Computational methods for Fluid Dynamics, Springer Verlag.

References from literature:C. Hirsch, Numerical computation of internal and external flows, Volume I Fundamentals of numerical discretization, Volume IIComputational methods for inviscid and viscous flows, Chicester, Wiley & Sons, 1988, 1990C.A.J. Fletcher, Computational techniques for Fluid Dynamics, Volume I Fundamental and general techniques, Volume IISpecific techniques for different flow categories, Berlin, Springer, 2-nd ed. 1991.

Assessment To be announced

Remarks Laboratory project(s):Practical exercises with a commercial code (FLUENT).


Design Content The design of a correct discretization/set-up of a model geometry for a flow calculation is part of the practical work.


of 186



WB1429-03 Microfluidics 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. J. Westerweel


2/2/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period 23


Required for wb1427-03, wb1428

Expected prior knowledge WB1125, TN1731 or equivalent

Course Contents This course is an introduction to fluid mechanics at small scales. The subjects treated are:Scaling laws, Navier-Stokes equations for micro-scale gas and liquid flows, for electroosmoticflow, electrophoresis, dielectrophoresis, dispersion and diffusion, capillary effects,experimental techniques, applications in flow control, flow sensors, valves, pumps, mixers,filters, separators, heaters and life science applications.Different mehtods for experimental flow characterization are discussed, i.e. microPIV (microscale Particle Image Velocimetry).

Study Goals Main learning goals of this course:Introduction in fluid mechanics at small scales so that the student is capable to understand scientific literature on this topic and toconduct research on this topic. The student learns about the differences of the treatment of the Navier-Stokes-Equations, whensurface forces become dominant over volume forces.

Specific learning objectives:1)Introduce the student to a novel field of fluid mechanics. The student gets an overview over fundamentals and applications of microfluidics.

2)The student understands the term continuum and is able to define the limits of the continuum at small scales.3)The student is able to simplify the Navier-Stokes equations for low Reynolds number flow.4)The student is able to derive the electrokinetic term in the Navier-Stokes equations.5)The student knows the molecular description of the states of matter.6)The student gets an overview of various designs of microfluidic devices such as pumps, mixers, valves and separators.7)The student is able to analyse the fluidmechanic efficiency of a microfluidic device8)The student is able to analyse a scientific publication on a microfluidics topic.9)The student has the fundamental microfluidics knowledge for a respective master thesis or a PhD program.



Henrik Bruus, Theoretical Microfluidics, Oxford University Press, 2007


Remarks Laboratory project(s):

hands-on laboratory demonstration of microfluidic diagnostics and measurement techniques

Design Content during the course models will be described that can be used to design simple microfluidic devices.


of 186



WB1433-04 Thermomechanical Modelling & Charact.of Polymers 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. K.M.B. Jansen



0/0/3/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Course Contents Linear viscoelasticity, creep, stress relaxation and dynamic behaviour, glass transition. Boltzman superposition principle. Time-temperature superposition. Free-volume interpretation. Crosslinking effects. Deformation modes, shear, tensile and bulkcompression. Interconversion relations, Kramers-Kronig relations. Laplace transformation. Non-linear viscoelastic models.Experimental methods: shear rheometers, dynamic mechanical devices, resonance devices, bulk modulus measurements.

Study Goals The student is able to understand and calculate the mechanical response of time dependent materials at different loadingconditions.

More specifically, the student must be able to1.understand the derivation of the basic linear viscoelastic constitutive equations2.describe the differences between relaxation, creep, creep-recovery, constant strain rate and dynamic tests3.identify the glassy and rubbery parts in a viscoelastic function4.describe the basic shape of the creep, relaxation and dynamic viscoelastic functions as a function of either time or frequency5.select the appropriate equations for transforming data from creep tests to that of relaxation and dynamic experiments (and viceversa)6.use the elastic-viscoelastic correspondence principle to solve simple viscoelastic problems7.explain the basics of the Time-Temperature Superposition principle8.use the Time-Temperature Superposition principle to construct mastercurves of experimental data9.understand the basics of the rubber elasticity and free volume theories

Education Method Lectures (3 hours per week), practical assignment


Hand-outs and sections from various books


Remarks The course includes practical work on a Dynamic Mechanical Analyser



of 186



WB1440 Eng. Optimization: Concept & Applications 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. M. Langelaar



0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Required for wb1441Expected prior knowledge Basic knowledge of mechanical engineering and mathematics

Course Contents Formulation of optimization problemsTypical characteristics of optimization problemsMinimization without constraintsConstrained minimizationSimple optimization algorithmsDiscrete design variablesApproximation conceptsSensitivity analysis

Study Goals The student is able to formulate a proper optimization problem in order to solve a given design problem, and is able to select asuitable approach for solving this problem numerically. Furthermore, he is able to interpret results of completed optimizationprocedures.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.formulate an optimization model for various design problems2.identify optimization model properties such as monotonicity, (non-)convexity and (non-) linearity

3.identify optimization problem properties such as constraint dominance, constraint activity, well boundedness and convexity4.apply Monotonicity Analysis to optimization problems using the First Monotonicity Principle5.perform the conversion of constrained problems into unconstrained problems using penalty or barrier methods6.compute and interpret the Karush-Kuhn-Tucker optimality conditions for constrained optimization problems7.describe the complications associated with the use of computational models in optimization8.illustrate the use of compact modeling and response surface techniques for dealing with computationally expensive and noisyoptimization models9.perform design sensitivity analysis using variational, discrete, semi-analytical and finite difference methods10.identify a suitable optimization algorithm given a certain optimization problem11.perform design optimization using the optimization routines implemented in the Matlab Optimization Toolbox12.derive a linearized approximate problem for a given constrained optimization problem, and solve the original problem using asequence of linear approximations13.describe the basic concepts used in structural topology optimization

Education Method Lectures (2x2 hours per week), exercises

Computer Use MATLAB is used for exercises.


Course material: P.Y. Papalambros et al. Principles of Optimal Design: Modelling and Computation.

References from literature: R.T. Haftka and Z. Gürdal: Elements of Structural Optimization.Assessment MATLAB exercises


Design Content The course is focusing on design optimization.


WB1441 Engineering Optimization 2 3




This course will not be given as lecture, but can be followed by self study (in consultation with prof. van Keulen)


Start Education 3Exam Period Different, to be announced


Expected prior knowledge wb1440

Course Contents The course is intended as a follow-up course to wb1440. However, the focus is more on the use of numerical models. Aspectsthat will be presented are:Optimization techniquesSensitivity analysisCoupling with simulation techniquesMulti-objective optimizationMulti-disciplinary optimization

The course will be organized as a special topics course.

Study Goals The course targets at a comprehensive understanding of structural optimization, ranging from the optimization strategiesavailable, up to the inherent complications related to the simulation techniques used.

Education Method Computer-based projects.Literature and StudyMaterials

R.T. Haftka and Z. Gürdal: Elements of Structural Optimization.

Assessment Project work



of 186



WB1443 Matlab in Engineering Mechanics 2




0/2/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period none


Required for wb1413 Multibody Dynamics BCourse Contents Matlab in Engineering Mechanics is an introductory course in technical computing, Matlab, and numerical methods. The

emphasis is on informed use of mathematical software. We want you to learn enough about the mathematical functions inMATLAB that you will be able to use them correctly, appreciate their limitations, and modify them when necessary to suit yourown needs. The topics include:

- introduction to MATLAB- linear equations- zero finding- least squares- ordinary differential equations- eigenvalues and singular values

The weekly homework assignments are on these topics. The final project is an individual choice from various fields of application like: Multibody System Dynamics with Matlab, Control Theory with Matlab/Simulink, or Finite element calculationswith FEMLab.

Study Goals The student is able to write his own MATLAB code to solve a technical computing problem in Engineering Mechanics on

graduate level. The emphasis is on informed use of mathematical software. The student is able to use the mathematical functionsin MATLAB correctly, appreciate their limitations, and modify them when necessary to suit his own needs.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.identify the finite accuracy of numerical results obtained in general due to the finite word length of the computer2.solve a system of linear equations and understand the effect on the solutions of close to singular systems3.apply numerous root finding algorithms and evaluate the speed and accuracy4.apply various curve fitting techniques and identify the least square solutions, both in linear and nonlinear curve fitting5.apply various numerical integration schemes to obtain the solutions of ordinary differential equations, determine and comparethe amount of computational effort, and the stability and accuracy of the solutions6.apply and understand Fourier analysis on measured data in order to extract basic frequencies7.calculate eigenvalues and do singular value decomposition on a system of equations and discuss the efficiency and accuracyfor large systems

Education Method Lecture (1 hour per week)

Computer Use The course and the assigments are fully computer oriented.


Course material:Cleve Moller, "Numerical Computing with MATLAB", SIAM, 2004An electronic edition published by The MathWorks is available for free at:http://www.mathworks.com/moler/chapters.html

References from literature:Rudra Pratap, "Getting Started With MATLAB 6", Oxford University Press, 2002.

Assessment homework assignments + final project

Remarks There will be weekly homework assignments and a final project. The homework is normally due a week after hand out and willbe graded. In doing the homework I encourage you to work in pairs. You have to make a report on the final project. Afterhanding in the report you make an appointment for the oral exam which is mainly on the assignments and the final project. Theexam is individual. For up-to-date information check out the webpage at http://tam.cornell.edu/~als93/



of 186



WB1444-07 Advanced Micro Electronic Packaging 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. G.Q. Zhang

Instructor Ir. J.J.L. Neve

Instructor Dr.ir. W.D. van Driel


0/0/2/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period none

Course Language EnglishRequired for wb1445-05

Summary Introduction to (advanced) wafer technology, microelectronic packaging and assembly, design and reliability qualification.

Course Contents As the bridge between IC and various electronics systems, microelectronic packaging controls more than 90% of the size, 60%of the cost, and largely the system performance and reliability. It is one of the most fascinating and rapid developing technologyand business fields of Semiconductors. Due to the recent progress of Cu/Low-k CMOS and advanced SiP technologies,microelectronic packaging is playing a dominant role in the development of future microelectronics and Microsystems.Course outline:- Application needs (Ambient Intelligence drives) for Semiconductors- Technology and business development trends of Semiconductors- Overview of advanced CMOS process technologies (including Cu/Low-k), and advanced packaging technologies (covering thepackaging glossary, design specification, materials and properties, process flows and process characteristics for both peripheraland Area Array interconnects, etc.)- Designing and qualification of advanced packages (QFN, BGA, FlipChip, CSP, WLP, three level SiP)- Emerging packaging technologies, such as Cu/low-k packaging, Nanopackaging, MEMS packaging, opto-packaging and Bio-packaging- Second level assembly

- International technology roadmap and future packaging perspectivesStudy Goals To master the knowledge of advanced packaging technologies, via learning the basics and critical aspects of designing and

qualification of advanced packages; knowing the technology roadmap, future perspectives and business trend of advancedpackaging.



Course material:Handout (presentations)Book 'Mechanics of Microelectronics' by G.Q. Zhang, W.D. van Driel, and X.J. FanExcursion to Philips

Assessment Two possibilities of course assessment: 1) participating in real and mini industrial R&D project team, or 2) conducting literaturestudy


of 186



WB1445-05 Mechanics of Micro Electronics and Microsystems 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. G.Q. Zhang

Course Coordinator Dr.ir. W.D. van Driel


0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4



Summary Virtual prototyping and qualification, designing for reliability, thermo-mechanical and multi-physics modeling, simulation-basedoptimisation.

Course Contents The technology trends of microelectronics and microsystems are mainly characterized by miniaturization down to nanoscale,increasing levels of technology and function integration and introduction of new materials, while the business trends are mainlycharacterized by cost reduction, shorter time to market, and outsourcing. Combination of these trends leads to increased chancesand consequences of failures, increased design complexity,decreased product development and qualification times, dramaticallydecreased design margins, and increased difficulties to meet quality, robustness and reliability requirements.

Most importantly, for the new product/process development, trial-error based design methods are still the common practice,while reliability qualification methods are still empirical. This situation, however, is becoming the bottleneck for the futuredevelopment, especially for the advanced Cu/Low-k CMOS and higher level SiP technologies. To achieve competitiveproduct/process development, it is vital to know and to apply the state-of-the-art of virtual prototyping and qualification.

Course outline:Major reliability problems in Semiconductors industriesStatus quo of current reliability paradigmThe state-of-the-art of virtual prototyping and qualification, including the basic theories and methodologiesCase study of covering important failure modes related with wafer backend, IC packaging and board level assembly, such as

(not limited to):Various cracks, and delamination

Wire bonding failuresSolder fatiguesMoisture-induced failuresWarpageChallenges and future perspective

Study Goals To know the current and expected reliability problems of and industry's concern for Microelelctronics and Microsystems; tomaster the state-of-the-art of theories, methodologies and industrial practices of virtual prototyping and qualification, incombination with some real industrial case studies; to know the challenges and future perspectives of virtual prototyping andqualification.



Course material:Handout (presentations)Reference books and papersBook 'Mechanics of Microelectronics' by G.Q. Zhang, W.D. van Driel, and X.J. FanReferences from literatureProceedings of IEEE conference of EuroSimE


Remarks Two possibilities of course assessment: 1) participating in real and mini industrial R&D project team, 2) conducting literaturestudy.


of 186



WB1450-05 Mechanical Analysis for Engineering 4





0/5/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 2


Required for wb1451-05,wb1416, wb1418, wb1417,wb1408a,wb1405a

Expected prior knowledge a basic knowledge of engineering mechanics is required (see mechanics and dynamics courses from BSc engineering mechnics)

Course Contents The course is designed to give a overview of essential mechanical topics relevant for production techniques, mechatronics andsystem designers. The main topics that will be handled are:- Multi-physical aspects of models (electrostatic coupling of microstructures, piezo-electric materials, thermo-mechanicalcoupling, vibro-acoustics)- basics of rotor dynamics- damping description in structural dynamics- visco-elasticity of materials- mechanical properties of composites

The course is intended to give an overview of the important phenomena and to give guidelines for further modeling and solvingof structural analysis problems.

Study Goals The student is able to recognize if complex mechanical interactions are affecting a mechatronical device or a production machine

and, understanding the important physical effects in action, he can choose the proper analysis tool and interpret the results.More specifically, the student must be able to:1.recognize and analyse the effects of the coupling of structural parts with electrostatic forces, acoustic pressure, thermo-mechanical effects and piezo-electric mechanics. In particular is able to analyze how those effects are utilized in mechatronicaldesigns.2.evaluate the effect of gyroscopic forces on the dynamics of rotors3.compute the linear dynamic response of mechanical systems excited by random forces4. Now the different ways to describe damping in structural dynamics (viscous, histeretic and visco-elastic).5.analyze the stiffness and strength of simple composite materials6.evaluate the visco-elastic properties of materials and use their constitutive description in numerical modelling


Computer Use Computer tools will be used (Matlab and/or Ansys) for the project exercise


Course material:lecture notes specifcally designed for the course and available through blackboard

References from literature:Fung, Y.C., Foundations of Solid Mechanics, Prentice-Hall, 1965.Timoshenko, S.P. en Gere, J.M., Theory of elastic stability, Second edition, McGraw-Hill, 1981.Crisfield, M.A., Nonlinear finite element analysis of solids and structures.Bathe, K.J., Finite element procedures.Zienkiewicz, O.C. en Taylor, R.C., The finite element method, Vol. 1 and 2, Fourth edition.Géradin, M. en Rixen, D.J., Mechanical vibrations: theory and applications to structural dynamics, Wiley, 1997.Inman, D.J., Engineering Vibration, Second edition, Prentice-Hall, 2001Hughes, T.J.R., The finite element method: linear static and dynamic finite element analysis, Prentice-Hall, 1987.

Assessment Oral exam + project exercise

Design Content No direct design content.


of 186



WB1451-05 Engineering Mechanics Fundamentals 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. M.A. Gutierrez De La Merced



0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period 45


Course Contents In this course the students will be given the basic knowhow to formulate the equations describing the mechanical behavior of continuum media and learn the theory underlying the elastic behavior of solids. The course will also cover the concepts of energies and variational analysis relevant to mechanical analysis. Two-dimensional and three dimensional classical problemswill be handled. Also the theory of plates and shells will be outlined.

Study Goals The student is able to choose the proper formulation to describe the continuous description of mechanical systems and of thematerial behaviour. He/she can apply energy principles to derive the governing equations and he/she can use the fundamentalsolutions for basic two and three-dimensional elasticity problems.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.formulate in a proper way the deformations in contiuum media (small and finite deformations), including the relation betweendifferent strain and stress tensors2.describe the relations between Lagrangian/Eulerian representation3.write, in solid mechanics, the constitutive laws of elastic materials4.use variational energy principles and apply them to derive approximation techniques5.describe the special formulations relative to plates and shells

Education Method Lecture 0/0/2/2Literature and StudyMaterials

Course material:Gerhard A. Holzapfel, "Nonlinear Solid Mechanics: a Continuum Approach for Engineering", Wiley, 2000.

References from literature:R. Aris, "Vectors, Tensors and the Basic Equations of Fluid Mechanics", Dover, 1962.Fung, Y.C., "Foundations of Solid Mechanics", Prentice-Hall, 1965.M.E. Gurtin, "An Introduction to Continuum Mechanics, Mathematics in Science and Engineering", vol. 158, Academic Press,New York, 1982.R.W. Ogden, "Nonlinear elastic deformations", Ellis Horwood Ltd., 1984

Prerequisites A basic knowledge of engineering mechanics and linear algebra is required (see mechanics and dynamics courses from BScengineering mechanics)

Assessment Written assignment and oral exam


of 186



WB1481LR Dynamics and Control Space Systems 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. P.T.L.M. van Woerkom



0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34

Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge Recommended prequisite courses:

AE4-305 Spacecraft attitude dynamics and controlAE4-305P Spacecraft attitude control system design exercise.

Course Contents The course focuses on dynamics modelling and controller design for space systems, such as rigid spacecraft, flexible spacecraft,space robotic manipulators, and onboard space mechanisms.To understand system behaviour a thorough understanding of system dynamics is required. In turn this understanding forms thebasis for the synthesis of suitable measurement and control systems, and for the selection of suitable estimation and controlalgorithms.

Study Goals The student must be able to:

A. Concerning dynamics modelling and dynamics analysis1. define suitable attitude parametrizations and the associated kinematic relationships for single bodies and for concatenatedbodies (including structural flexibility)2. derive and interpret the equations of motion for the translation, rotation, and deformation of a generic single flexible body(virtual work derivation; hybrid coordinate formulation)3. derive and interpret the equations of motion of single-spin and dual-sin spacecraft

4. derive and interpret the equations of motion for a rigid Earth-pointing three-axis stabilized spacecraft5. derive and interpret the equations of single-axis attitude motion of an agile (i.e. maneuvering) spacecraft disturbed bystructural flexibility, by environmental torques (gravity gradient and magnetic) and by internal torques (reaction wheels)

B. Concerning space system control6. determine dynamic stability of a given space system (Routh-Hurwitz criterion; Lyapunov first and second methods)7. design three controllers for a single-axis spacecraft: classical PID, modern LQG, and Lyapunov8. design and analyze suppression of nutation of a spinstabilized spacecraft, using passive damping (viscous dissipation) andthrough active damping (jet; reaction wheel)9. describe and analyze multi-sensor data fusion (test case: single-axis spacecraft with attitude sensor and rate sensor)10. describe and analyze measurement spill-over and control spill-over (test cases: pinned-pinned beam and single-axisspacecraft)11. describe and analyze robust disturbance accommodation control

During the course some items may be given more attention than other items, depending on the interest of the participants.


The course consists of a series of lectures and of several small-scale take-home assignments. Final grade for the course will bebased on the quality of the take-home work. Where deemed helpful the student will be asked to further clarify his work.


Study material (on Blackboard):- lecture notes- various supporting documentsSeveral take-home assignments (on Blackboard)

Assessment A series of take-home exercises

Special InformationStudents wishing to follow this course are invited to express their interest to dr.ir. P.Th.L.M. van Woerkom, Faculty3mE/Mechanical Engineering, Section Engineering Dynamics, 3mE 8B-4.21, extension 82792.Aerospace students wishing to follow this course are invited to express their interest in addition to dr. Q.P. Chu, FacultyAerospace Engineering, Section Control and Simulation, LR room no. 027, extension 83586.


of 186



WB2301-5 System Identification and Parameter Estimation 7

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. A.C. Schouten

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. E. de Vlugt

Instructor Prof.dr. F.C.T. van der Helm

Instructor Ir. A. Klomp


0/0/2/2

Education Period 34



Expected prior knowledge wb2104 and/or wb2207

Summary System identification based on estimators of spectral densities (nonparametric black-box) and on discrete time domain models(parametric grey-box). Translation of identified system dynamics into physical parameters using physical models (parameterestimation). Application to open-loop and closed-loop systems. Estimation accuracy, perturbation signal design.

Course Contents Analysis of unknown dynamic systems in the time-domain and the frequency domain.Application to relation between transferfunctions and spectral densities in open-loop and closed-loop systems.Modelling of systems: Choice of model structure and parametrisation.Linear and non-linear model structures.Parameter estimation by optimization.Optimization techniques: Gradient methods, random-search methods, genetic algorithms.Experimental validation of models: Coherence, Variance-Accounted-For (VAF).Special non-linear model structures: Expert systems, neural networks, fuzzy models.

Study Goals The student is able to:

1design test signals to identify an unknown systema.design proper experimental measurement conditionsb.understand the differences between stochastic and deterministic signalsc.indicate the differences in application between transient and continuous signals2estimate a nonparametric model of the unknown system from recorded signalsa.recognize and identify open-loop and closed-loop relations between measured signalsb.employ proper techniques to identify models in the frequency and time domainc.validate the nonparametric models using different indicators3parameterize nonparametric modelsa.derive the best model structure based on a priori knowledge from physicsb.parameterize the dynamic relation between the recorded signals using linear and non-linear parameter estimation techniquesc.implement different optimization techniquesd.assess the uniqueness of the parameters using correlation analysise.evaluate the derived parameterized model through validation techniquesf.recognize three non-linear model structures, and their applicability in a given situation

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week), practical assignments.

Computer Use Practical assignments on a PC with a number of available programs in MATLAB/SIMULINK.

Literature and StudyMaterials Course material (available through Blackboard website):Lecture slides, Assignment guide, Formula sheet.

Demonstration programs in Matlab.Book Chapters: Identification of Nonlinear Physiolocal Systems, Westwick and Kearney.

Assessment Written exam, graded assignments.

Remarks At the end of the course, a choice can be made out of several final assignments, for which recorded signals are available. Theavailable demonstration programs have to be adapted in order to estimate proper transfer functions and model parameters.



of 186



WB2303-10 Measurement in Engineering 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.ir. R.H. Munnig Schmidt


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Course Contents The course will focus on measurement techniques that are usually applied in Mechanical Engineering so integrated in largerequipment for feedback or calibration purposes but also in stand alone setups.

Topics include:

General performance characteristics of measurement instruments.Elements in measurement systems: Sensors, Signal conditioning and Signal processing.Electronics used in measurement systems and EMC. Signal manipulation and transmission, filtering, noise suppression,amplitude modulation.Measurement uncertainty, error sources, correction methods. Interfering and modifying error sources.Calibration, traceability and standards.Dynamics of measurement systems and measurement of dynamics. Transfer functions in the frequency and time domain.Measuring devices for both linear and angular motion (displacement, velocity, acceleration)Force, torque and pressure sensors.Strain gauge principlesOptical measurement systems, encoders and laser interferometry

Study Goals * The student will be capable of understanding the fundamental approach in measuring physical quantities and the influence of

the different elements on the performance of the measurement system.* The student will be capable of applying the basic principles of measurement of mechanical magnitudes.* The student will be capable of determining the suitable measurement systems for a given metrology problem.* The student will be able to design a concept measurement system for a given measurement problem by using different physicalprinciples.

Education Method Classroom Lectures. Basic theory and application by the main teacher and max. 2 invited speakers on a certain theme. These canbe from industry, another faculty or phd students about their research topic

Course Relations This course is directly related with Mechatronic System Design (WB 2414). Although WB2414 is not mandatory it is highlyadvised to get acquainted with the methodology.

Books Principles of Measurement systems. John P. Bentley 4th edition and higher. ISBN 0-13-043028-5. Available at VSSD

Prerequisites Knowledge on mechatronic design principles. Either by following WB2414 or by studying the Lecture Notes of WB2414 thatare available on blackboard.

Assessment Written examination, closed book


of 186



WB2305 Digital Control 3

Responsible Instructor T. Keviczky


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23


Expected prior knowledge wb2207 and wb2420 or sc4025Knowledge of classic control techniques as well as the state space theory is required.

Course Contents Computer control. Sampling of continuous-time signals. The sampling theorem. Aliasing. Discrete-time systems. State-spacesystems in discrete-time. The z-transform. Selection of sampling-rate. Analysis of discrete-time systems. Stability.Controllability, reachability and observability. Disturbance models. Reduction of effects of disturbances. Stochastic models.Design methods. Approximations of continuous design. Digital PID-controller. State-space design methods. Observers. Pole-placement. Optimal design methods. Linear Quadratic control. Prediction. LQG-control. Implementational aspects of digitalcontrollers.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.describe the essential differences between continuous time and discrete-time control2.transform a continuous time description of a system into a discrete-time description3.calculate input-output responses for discrete-time systems4.analyse the system characteristics of discrete-time systems5.employ a pole-placement method on a discrete-time system6.implement an observer to calculate the states of a discrete time system7.apply optimal control on discrete-time systems8.describe the functioning of the Kalman-filter as a dynamic observer

Education Method Lectures and computer exercisesComputer Use Matlab is used to carry out the exercises of this course.


Course material:Lecture notes are made available on Blackboard

References from literature:K.J. Astrom, B. Wittenmark 'Computer-controlled Systems', Prentice Hall ,1997, 3rd editionB.C. Kuo 'Digital Control Systems', Tokyo, Holt-Saunders, 1980G.F. Franklin, J.D. Powell 'Digital Control of Dynamic Systems', 1989, 2nd edition, Addison-Wesley

Assessment Final quiz in class + project assignment

Remarks The project assignment can be completed only during the quarter when the course is offered (i.e. the project has no resit duringother periods).

Design Content The design aspects of digital controllers are discussed.


of 186



WB2306 The Human Controller 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. D.A. Abbink


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45


Expected prior knowledge wb2207Summary The Human Controller - from perception to action

Course Contents 01. Introduction: General02. Introduction : from perceptionâ¦

(physiology: Visual, Tactile, Auditory)03. Introductionâ¦to action

(introduction on neuromuscular control, feedforward vs feedback)04. Perception: 3D vision & Static depth perception05. Perception: Vestibulary System06. Manual Control Theory â Crossover Model07. Practical assignment: measuring manual control strategies08. Manual Control Theory â Critical Instability Task09. Manual Control Application: vehicles10. Manual Control Application: haptics11. Manual Control Application: Measuring performance and effort12. Practical Assignment: the use of the neuromuscular system during manual vehicle control13. Discussion â student presentations from both assignments14. General Discussion

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.make a Problem Analysis of a given assignment in the field of a human in control of a technical device, e.g. a surgical tool, avehicle, a prosthesis or a chemical or nuclear planta)identify the dynamic relationships between the human and the device in terms of sensor input and actuationb)describe and explain the properties of the human controller in the system under 1a, with reference to the performance andstability limitations of the feedback loopc)translate the result of 1a and 1b into technical Design Objectives of the controlled system without reference to any solutionsd)derive qualitative and quantitative Design Specifications from the Design Objectives of the controlled system, and categorizeand prioritize these.e)assess feedback on the Design Specification from Assignor2.understand the physical limitations of the human musculoskeletal system and its sensorsa)identify the relevant dynamic characteristics of human sensor systems (auditory, tactile, visual, vestibulary systems), musclesand the central nervous systemb)indicate the mechanical, physiological and mental load and sustainable load of the human being, while at work and/or in ahuman control situation (direct control or supervisory control)c)select appropriate models and measurement methods for the load mentioned in 2bd)generate a variety of Conceptual Designs to decrease the mechanical, physiological and mental loade) judiciously select the most appropriate Conceptual Design

f)demonstrate the plausibility or feasibility of the Conceptual Design, with special emphasis to the workerï¿½s benefitsEducation Method Lectures (4 hours per week)


Lecture Sheets and selected papers

Assessment Two practical assignments are given, after which groups of students must communicate the results in a short presentation.These results account for 20% of the final grade.

The final exam is a written exam.


Design Content By including human limitations, abilities and preferences in the design of human-machine interaction, better performance and/orreduced mental or physical load can be achieved.


of 186



WB2308 Biomedical Engineering Design 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg


Instructor Dr.ir. G.J.M. Tuijthof


0/2/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 2

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents In biomechanical engineering, the design specifications are fundamentally different from those in industry. Typically, precise

motion is much less critical than safety, force transmission or distribution, and energy-efficiency. Hence, a different designapproach is needed.

This course presents a design philosophy and a design approach, dedicated to rehabilitation technology and [orthopaedic]surgery. These fields were selected because of human-machine interaction is inherent and vital. Illustrative examples will bediscussed by their entire design proces (system analysis, design approach, topology synthesis, system alternatives andimprovements, dimensional optimization, choice of components).

Topics addressed include: arm and hand prosthetics, arm orthotics and exoskeletons, control of prosthetics and orthotics,minimally access orthopaedic surgery, arthroscopy, transmission of forces, influence of visco-elastic materials on the behaviourof mechanical systems, static balancing, pneumatics, low-friction mechanisms, medical terminology.

Students will select a design assignment and perform a problem analysis, generate conceptual designs, and select a feasible one.The assignment will be carried out in groups of around two students, where possible from different faculties, and is completedwith a presentation and a report.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.make a Problem Analysis of a given assignment in the field of medical or rehabilitation technologyidentify the underlying cause of the problem as presented in the assignmenttranslate the result of 1a into technical Design Objectives without reference to any solutionsderive qualitative and quantitative Design Specifications from the Design Objectives, and categorize and prioritize these.obtain and assess feedback on the Design Specification from Assignor2.generate Conceptual and Embodiment Designs for the given assignmentselect and apply appropriate Design Methodology and Design Methodsgenerate a variety [typically at least three] of Conceptual Designs judiciously select the most appropriate Conceptual Designobtain and assess feedback on the selected Conceptual Design from Assignortransform the selected Conceptual Design into an Embodiment Designdemonstrate the plausibility or feasibility of the Embodiment Design



"Upper Extremity Prosthetics. Current status & evaluation"Dick H. PlettenburgVSSD, 2006, ISBN13: 978-90-71301-75-9

Assessment Design project

Remarks The course is completed with a conceptual engineering design project.


Design Content Design methods and design tools, illustrated with examples, are the major part of the course. Furthermore several supportingtheories are discussed. Students are required to do a conceptual design study on real-life and actual problems.


of 186



WB2404 Man-machine systems 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. P.A. Wieringa

Course Coordinator Dr.ir. J.C.F. de Winter


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period Different, to be announcedExam by appointment

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents The entire spectrum between manual and supervisory control is treated using scientific literature and own research results. The

student is encouraged to use a system & control engineering approach: the operator is considered to be part of a control loopwhich is either 1) continuously closed (manual control situations called direct control), 2) quickly changing between open andclosed control (intermittent control; e.g. car driving or ship navigation), or 3) mainly open loop control (supervisory control; e.g.,operators in control rooms).

The following topics are covered- Origin, historic overview, and scope of human factors.- Skill learning, training, augmented feedback, virtual reality, simulators- Automation (human-in-the-loop vs. human-out-of-the loop, mental models)- Task analysis- Human error, mental workload, attention, signal detection, vigilance, decision making- Organisational factors and cognitive work analysis- Accident analysis and prevention

Examples and case studies will be provided from e.g., car driving, aviation, and medicine.The course will feature a number of guest lectures from specialists in the field.

Study Goals The student should be able todescribe and provide definitions of the key topics in the course- explain and reflect on the differences between manual control and supervisory control- explain how human skills develop and how feedback affects skill acquisition- criticize and interpret existing human-machine-interface designs- select and perform a task analysis- classify different forms of human error- explain how design decisions affect performance, human error, and safety- summarize and interpret cases about accidents

Education Method Lectures (4 hours per week)Each year an excursion will be held to a research centre or industrial plant to show some of the items discussed during thiscourse.


Powerpoint slides of the lectures, scientific articles, and supplementary materials will be made available on Blackboard.

Assessment Closed-book written exam (50% open questions, 50% multiple choice questions)

Design Content Concepts and tools for design and evaluation of Human Interaction with complex systems are discussed


of 186



WB2408 Physiological Systems 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. J. Dankelman

Instructor Prof.dr.ir. C.A. Grimbergen

Instructor Dr.ir. A.C. van der Eijk


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 2


Course Contents 1.Introduction to human physiology (human body, homeostasis, general organization of the circulatory system).2.Central nerve system (nerve cells, synapses, sensory system, motor system, autonomic nerve system, reflexes).3.Mechanics and excitation of the heart (contraction mechanism of cardiac muscle, action potentials).4.Coronary circulation (control of coronary blood flow, influence of heart contraction on coronary blood flow, effect of stenoses).5.Cardiac output and Frank-Starling mechanism (regulation, venous return, arterial pressure, pulmonary resistance).6.Blood rheology and wave phenomena in the circulation (blood cells, blood flow, blood pressure, vascular compliance, clotting,Newtonian flow).7.Mass transport (diffusion, convection, osmosis, transport through cell membranes).8.Kidneys (anatomy, glomerular filtration, reabsorption, regulation of blood volume, artificial kidneys).9.Arterial pressure regulation (control system, baroreceptors, influence of nerve system, control by renal system).10.Lungs (respiration, alveoli, transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide, artificial lung).11.Pregnancy and human development (foetal circulation, oxygen transport in utero, umbilical cord, prematurity)12.Measurement and imaging techniques (ECG, MRI, Röntgen, echo, Doppler, catheters, ultrasound).13.Modelling of physiological control systems (identification, difficulties).14.A practical course on Cell Physiology at LUMC.

Study Goals The student is able to describe the function of several physiological systems from an engineering point of view.

The student must be able to:

Describe the anatomy and function of the heart, lungs, kidneys, and nerve systemDescribe and draw graphs of the mechanical and electrical activity of the heart(muscle)Identify and explain the transport mechanisms in the human bodyDescribe mechanisms for regulation of the cardiac output and the arterial blood pressureDescribe and draw graphs of wave and rheological phenomena in the blood circulationDescribe the principles of current used measurements and imaging techniques (e.g. echo, MRI,Röntgen)Formulate the problems of applying standard modeling and identification techniques on physiological control systemsFormulate design criteria for artificial organs

Education Method 2 times per week 2 lectures of 45 minutes1 excursion to Leiden University Medical Centre


Materials

Course material:

Reader: Physiological Systemsby J. Dankelman, C.A. Grimbergen, J.A.E. Spaan.Powerpoint slides of lectures

Optional:E.N. MariebHuman Anatomy & Physiology6th editionPearson; Benjamin-CummingsISBN: 0321204131

A.C. Guyton, J. E. HallTextbook of Medical Physiology11th EditionW B Saunders CoISBN: 9780721602400

W. Boron, E. BoulpaepMedical physiologyRevised editionW B Saunders CoISBN: 9781416023289



Design Content The design of several artificial organs will be discussed (e.g. artificial heart, valves, lung, and kidney).


of 186



WB2414-09 Mechatronic System Design 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.ir. R.H. Munnig Schmidt


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23


Required for All PME studentsExpected prior knowledge Bsc Mechanical Engineering, Electrical Engineering or Physics.

ME1611-10 (Physics for mechanical Engineers) and SC4026 (Control system Design) is needed as preparation

Course Contents Mechatronic system design deals with the design of controlled motion systems by utilizing a multitude of disciplines. It startswith thinking how the required function of a machine can be achieved by utilizing its different subsystems following a systemsEngineering approach (V-model).

Some supporting disciplines are not originally the working area of mechanical engineers like electronics, electromechanics andoptics. This course aims to connect these disciplines to realize an optimally designed system.

The target application of controlled motion systems explicitly includes the controlling of any movement ranging from perfectlystanding still, slow motion precision manipulators to high speed applications with extreme precision to sub nm level.

Based on practical cases ranging from CD drives , active car suspension systems to waferscanners the following subjects will bedealt with.

System design breakdown into subsystems and elements

Mechatronic motion system characteristicsDynamic behavior in the time and frequency domain of actively controlled motion systems.Transfer functions and position control(feedback,PID and feedforward).Electromechanical ActuatorsAnalog electronics, operational amplifiers and power electronics used for driving actuators

Although embedded sofware is very relevant in mechatronic systems only limited attention will be given to the subject as it isbetter covered in other specialized courses.

Study Goals The student can analyze active dynamic systems by means of bode diagrams.

The student can solve new mechatronic problems from a systems Engineering perspective.

The student will be able to understand the role of different disciplines that are used in Mechatronic systems in their mutualrelationship.

The student will be able to determine the optimal combination of the different disciplines to achieve a specific controlled motionfunction.

The most important aspect that will be assessed is the capability to match theory with practice. Translate a real system into adynamic model and vice versa. Understand what a position control system really does. Observe a system top-down. Starting witha global overview and use approximating (scalar) calculations by hand to get a sufficient feel of the problem to make conceptdesign decisions. Learn to use detailed calculations only as a last step to determine the details with the help of a (finite element)computer program.

Education Method Lectures around practical mechatronic systems based on a reader/book that is made available both on blackboard and in printedform as a book (planned not 100% sure if ready in time).

The lectures will be aiming at introducing the material and make the students learn by intensive studying and practicing inindividual exercises.

The theoretical part will concentrate on those supporting disciplines that are underexposed in the Bsc curriculum

The following disciplines are important aspects:Dynamics, electronics, electromechanics, control engineering, dynamic error budgeting.

While these disciplines mostly are dealt with in separate specialized courses, in this course the mutual relationship in theapplication in controlled motion systems is the central theme.

Computer Use No computers will be used nor will the emphasis lay on exact calculated values.


A reader is in concept published on blackboard.When possible in time it will be made available in printed form as a book.

The presentations will also be published on blackboard

Books "Mechatronic System Design" by R. Munnig Schmidt a.o. (planned in 2010)

Reader "Mechatronic System Design"

R. Munnig Schmidt

(blackboard)

Assessment Written Examination (Closed book) plus individual exercises.

Permitted Materials duringTests

Calculator.

Percentage of Design 50%Design Content The course gives methods to design complex systems by following the System Engineering guidelines of INCOSE. Clearly

distinguishing requirements and specifications.

Further it is focusing on mechatronic concept design by optimally combining different disciplines and pinpointing (dynamic)interactions between the different elements of a system


of 186



Judgement In the examination the judgment is determined for 60% on the proof of the real understanding of the problem and its solutionincluding knowledge of physical phenomena and basic relations. 40% is determined by crisp formulation and the relatedcalculations.

WB2415 Robust Control 6

Responsible Instructor Nabestaanden van O.H. Bosgra



0/0/4/0

Education Period 3Start Education 3



Expected prior knowledge Requires solid background on state-space descriptions of multivariable linear systems.sc4022/sc4025, wb2421

Course Contents · Recap on background in linear systems theory· Stabilizing controllers and the concept of the generalized plant· Uncertainty descriptions· The general framework of robust control· The structured singular value: Definition, properties, computation· Robust stability analysis· Nominal and robust performance analysis· Excursion: The algebraic Riccati equation· The H-infinity control problem and its solution in terms of Riccati equations· Design of robust controllers

Study Goals The student is able to reproduce theory and apply computational tools for robust controller analysis and synthesis.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.substantiate relation between frequency-domain and state-space description of dynamical systems2.define stability and performance for multivariable linear time-invariant systems3.construct generalized plant for complex system interconnections4.describe parametric and dynamic uncertainties5.translate concrete controller synthesis problem into abstract framework of robust control6.reproduce definition, properties and computation of the structured singular value7.master application of structure singular value for robust stability and performance analysis8.sketch derivation and precisely formulate the solution of the H-infinity control problem9.specify the role of Riccati equation within H-infinity control10.design robust controllers on the basis of the H-infinity control algorithm11.apply controller-scalings iteration for robust controller synthesis


Computer Use Computer exercises with Matlab's Robust Control Toolbox.


Course material:S. Skogestad, I. Postlethwaite, Multivariable Feedback Control, John Wiley & Sons, 1997.

References from literature:K. Zhou, J.C. Doyle, K. Glover, Robust and optimal control, Prentice Hall, 1996

Assessment Written exercise and oral examination


of 186



WB2421 Multivariable Control Systems 6

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. A.J.J. van der Weiden


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2



Required for wb2415, Robust Control

Expected prior knowledge SC4025 (or SC4022), Control TheoryCourse Contents The lectures are divided into blocks. At first a review of elementary single-loop feedback design is given. A standard design

problem is given and especially the limitations on performance are treated. In the second block of lectures a system theoreticalapproach is used to explain the properties and the computation of the poles and zeros of multivariable feedback systems.Furthermore internal stability and the generalized Nyquist stability is discussed. The third block treats performance androbustness of multivariable feedback systems. The use of principal gains (singular values) for assessing performance isintroduced. Different representations of uncertainties are given. The use of the H-infinty norm and the structured singular valueto analyse the robust stability and robust performance will be introduced. Examples are given of how to choose weightingfunctions to gain specified performance in the H-infinty control design context. Finally a block is spent on multivariable controldesign for real practical systems using Nyquist like techniques. In MATLAB implemented algorithms are explained and appliedto different design examples.

Study Goals The objective of the course is to gain a basic understanding of the problem formulation and solution for control design of (uncertain) multivariable systems. The mix of tutorial lectures and computer exercises on realistic examples provides a goodlearning environment.


Computer Use MATLAB, the Control and mu-toolbox may be used for the exercises.


Course material:Multivariable Feedback Control Analysis and Design. S.Skogestad, I.Postlethwaite. John Wiley & Sons, ISBN 0-470-01168-8Lecture notes: The poles and zeros of multivariable systems, A.J.J. van der Weiden.

References from literature:Many references are available in the Central Library.

Assessment Oral examination and exercises based on MATLAB

Remarks Each year a new set-up of design examples is considered.


WB2427 Predictive Modelling 3

Responsible Instructor P. Estevez Castillo

Instructor Prof.dr.ir. J. van Eijk

Contact Hours / Weekx/x/x/x 0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Course Contents Steps in a Modelling ActivityStepwise Refined ModellingPractical ModellingMixed Dynamics/Control SimulationsEffect of Modal Truncation and AccuracyModel Reduction TechniquesStatic Reduction TechniquesComponent Mode Techniques

Study Goals The student is going to be able to model (lump sum) some high precision engineering applications (positioning and vibrationisolation) with structural resonances using 20-sim, and is able to modify and optimize the mechanical structure for better

performancesEducation Method Lecture and computer room exercises


Machine Dynamics in Mechatronics Systems - An Engineering Approach (Rankers)

Assessment Oral


Design Content System level design and modelling - Improving mechanical design


of 186



WB2428-03 Mechanical Design in Mechatronics 5

Responsible Instructor Ir. P.C.J. van Rens

Instructor Dr.ir. A. van Beek


Instructor Dr.ir. R.A.J. van Ostayen

Instructor Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg


0/0/4/2

Education Period 3

4Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Course Contents Mechanical design principles for high precision positioning, controlling degrees of freedomStress and strain, design for stiffnessDesign principles to eliminate friction, wear and hysteresis

Study Goals To gain sound understanding of mechanical design principles for high precision applications in mechatronics



Will be made available on Blackboard

Assessment Verbal exam (semester 2A) and Design Exercise (semester 2B)

Percentage of Design 90%Design Content Mechanical design principles for high precision applications


WB2432 Bio Mechatronics 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg

Instructor Prof.dr. F.C.T. van der Helm


0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period 4


Expected prior knowledge wb2407

Course Contents Biomechatronics is a contraction of biomechanics and mechatronics. In this course the function and coordination of the humanmotion apparatus is the central focus, and the design of assistive devices for the support of the function of the motion apparatus.Examples are assistive devices like an orthosis, prosthesis or Functional Electrical Stimulation of muscles. The goal is to providesome function to patients with functional deficiencies.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.make a Problem Analysis of a given assignment in the field of the human motion apparatus and its interaction with an assistivedeviceidentify the underlying cause [pathology] of the problem as presented in the assignmentdescribe and explain the possible treatment options for the pathology of 1atranslate the result of 1a into technical Design Objectives without reference to any solutionsderive qualitative and quantitative Design Specifications from the Design Objectives, and categorize and prioritize theseassess feedback on the Design Specification from Assignor2.optimize the assistive device application given in the assignment in energetical and control aspectsselect and apply appropriate Design Methodology and Design Methods

generate a variety [typically at least three] of Conceptual Designs judiciously select the most appropriate Conceptual Designassess feedback on the selected Conceptual Design from Assignordemonstrate the plausibility or feasibility of the Conceptual Design, with special emphasis to the patient benefits



Course material:

A reader is available through Blackboard


D.B. Popovic and T. SinkjaerControl of Movement for the Physically DisabledSpringer (2000)ISBN-13: 978-1852332792

D.H. PlettenburgUpper Extremity Prosthetics. Current status & evaluation

VSSD (2006)ISBN-13: 978-9071301759

Assessment Assignment + written exam

Remarks Students are requested to make one final assignment, which will be part of the examination.


of 186



WB2433-03 Humanoid Robots 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. M. Wisse

Instructor Prof.dr. R. Babuska

Instructor Prof.dr.ir. P.P. Jonker


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 1

Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge BSc. requirements

Course Contents Humanoid robots are the research topic of the future, and partially already today. This course is organized around the centralproblem in humanoid robot design; they must operate fully autonomously. This results in design constraints such as energyefficiency and autonomous control. The course will treat the following topics:

IntroductionLegged locomotionperceptionvisioncontrolcollaborating robots (i.e. robot soccer)applications

Study Goals The student is able to provide an overview of the technical disciplines that are involved in research and development of roboticsystems. For each of the disciplines, the student is able to describe the main techniques and approaches, and to apply these onsample problems.

More specifically, the student must be able:1.System software and hardware architecture, the student is able to:design a modular system architecture for autonomous robots. For each of the software or hardware modules, the student candescribe (1) the function of the module, (2) the services that the module provides to higher-ranking modules, (3) the services thatthe module requires from lower-ranking modules, (4) the type(s) of interface(s) that the module requires2.Multibody dynamics, the student is able to:describe which functions a (any) multibody dynamics simulation package fullfills, which types of algorithms are used in thepackage, and which typical problems can arise (accuracy, instability) and where these problems originate. Also, the student candescribe the similarities between PD controllers and mechanical spring-damper systems3.Robot walking, the student is able to:describe the various existing methods to control two-legged walking robots. The student knows and is able to calculate the twomost common performance criteria, namely stability (plus robustness) and efficiency. The student can describe by which meansthe robustness can be increased4.Reinforcement learning, the student is able to:explain the principle of reinforcement learning and the special case of Q-learning. The student is able to set up a learningcontroller (i.e. defining the length and conditions of learning trials, the inputs and outputs, and the reward structure). The studentcan describe the effects of various reward settings and explore rates, and name potential pittfalls and advantages5.Actuator and sensor choice, the student is able to:select electric DC motors and gear boxes for a given required torque-velocity pattern, and accounting for motor inertia effectsand gear energy losses. The student can list the type of sensors required to measure the full state of a robot system. The studentcan explain why it is difficult to measure the absolute orientation of the system and provide a solution. The student can alsoexplain how one can create a series-elastic actuation system6.Vision, the student is able to:apply an image processing library to perform low-level image processing algorithms and higher-level feature detection, enablingthe automated detection of for example the location and size of an orange ball in an image. The student can explain why a colorspace other than RGB is used, and how the feature data can be used to obtain 3D information about the object of interest7.Man-machine interaction, the student is able to:describe how images of faces can be processed in order to obtain information about the face expression

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week)PC practical (4 hours per week)


Readers, papers (will be provided through blackboard)

Assessment Excercises

Remarks The students are required to have a personal interest and motivation for robotics.



of 186



WB2436-05 Bio-Inspired Design 3

Responsible Instructor Dr. T. Tomiyama

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. P. Breedveld

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. J.L. Herder


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 3

Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge Completed courses in mechanics and design

Course Contents The course Bio-Inspired Design gives an overview of non-conventional mechanical approaches in nature and shows how thisknowledge can lead to more creativity in mechanical design and to better (simpler, smaller, more robust) solutions than withconventional technology. The course discusses a large number of biological organisms with smart constructions, unusualmechanisms or clever processing methods and gives a number of technical examples of bio-inspired instruments and machines.

Examples of topics:Strength at low weight, stiffness with soft structures, robustness with redundancy, simple laws for complex behaviour, storingenergy in springs, energetically efficient muscle configurations, biological vibration systems, clamping with hands, claws,suction, glue, dry- and wet adhesion, biological walking, swimming and crawling methods, locomotion of micro- and single-celled-organisms.

Structure of the course:

1. Bioconstruction1.1. Biostructure

1.2. Bioenergy1.3. Bioreproduction & regeneration1.4. Biomaintenance & repair

2. Biomotion2.1. Bioclamping2.2. Biopropulsion at macroscale2.3. Biopropulsion at microscale

3. Bioprocessing3.1. Biosensing3.2. Biobehaving

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.describe methods for creative design2.identify mechanical working principles and phenomena of biological creaturesexplain their construction, motion, and/or processing mechanismsformalize the essence of these mechanisms in modelsderive non-conventional design principles from these models3.implement these design principles in innovative mechanical devicessummarize the transition process from the biological to the mechanical domainpresent their design in drawings or preferably in working models

Education Method Lectures, assignment

Computer Use Not Applicable


Handouts

Assessment Final exam will take place in form of presentation with demonstration during the exam period, after which students have to hand-in a written paper.

Remarks Students are subdivided in a number of groups. Each group gets a different assignment in which a biological solution for atechnical problem has to be found. During the course, in addition and prior to the final presentation, each group gives threepresentations: one about their problem analysis, one about their inspiration from biology, and one about their proposed concepts.Instructors and fellow students will provide feedback. Each group has to construct a simple demonstration model showing theworking principle of the final solution. This model is to be demonstrated during the final presentation. The final mark is based onthe final presentation, the demonstration model, and a written paper describing the whole process, including the biologicalsolution of the problem. At least one photograph of the physical model must be included. In exceptional cases, a softwaresimulation can be acceptable, to be decided by the instructors.


Design Content The course gives knowledge about innovative mechanical designs inspired by biological systems and phenomena, in addition todesign exercises.


of 186



WB2454-07 Multiphysics Modelling using COMSOL 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. R.A.J. van Ostayen


Instructor Dr.ir. M. Langelaar


0/0/2/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period none

Course Language EnglishSummary finite element method, multiphysics modelling, MATLAB, COMSOL

Course Contents In applied mechanics one is often confronted with a multi-physics or coupled problem: A problem that requires the(simultaneous) solution of more than one type of physical process or phenomenon in order to accurately describe the problem.Examples of multiphysics problems are fluid-structure interaction, thermal-structure interaction and electro-thermal-structureinteraction, possibly combined with a control problem. Particularly in the field of Mechatronic design and MEMS multiphysicsproblems are frequently encountered.

COMSOL MultiPhysics is a finite element code, which can be used both as a MATLAB toolbox and as a standalone program,which is particularly suited for the simulation of multi-physics systems.

In this course the student will learn to recognize different types of multi-physics coupling and methods for their efficientnumerical solution using COMSOL. Short homework assignments are used to practise the use of COMSOL on different types of problems and in a final assignment the student is asked to study a multi-physics problem using COMSOL.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1. recognize multiphysics coupling in complex problems2. distinguish between different types of coupling

one-directional vs. bi- or multi-directionalinterface vs. fieldstrong vs. weak

3. describe numerical solution techniques applicable to coupled problems4. use COMSOL MultiPhysics on coupled problems

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week) / Self study

Computer Use COMSOL MultiPhysics and MATLAB


Course material:Lecture notes and online COMSOL manualReferences from literature:Zienkiewicz, O.C. and Taylor, R.C., The finite element method, Vol.1, 2 and 3, Fifth edition.


Remarks A basic knowledge of engineering mechanics, fluid mechanics and the finite element method is required. The student is expectedto have some working knowledge of MATLAB.

The assessment is based on homework assignments and a more complex final assignment and report.

Design Content None


WB2601OE Strenght of Materials 1

Responsible Instructor Ir. M.G. van de Ruijtenbeek


x/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period none


Course Contents Structural Analysis integrates mechanics of materials and finite element method (FEM) in order to predict the behavior of

structures. In the course the emphasis is on correct application and interpretation of FEM.Special attention is given to verification, interpretation and accuracy of results, based on FEM theory and the way of modeling.The course is limited to linear elastic and static behavior of structures.

Study Goals Student is able to:1. describe the basics of FEM, as well as the importance of the method as an analysis tool for design and design verificationprocesses2. use a commercial FEM system by means of a graphical interface3. plan, perform, verify and interpret basic (static, linear-elastic) numerical analyses for 2-D trusses4. plan, perform, verify and interpret basic (static, linear-elastic) numerical analyses for 2-D solid models5. interpret strains, stress components and principal stresses as known from continuum mechanics and describe the limitations of linear continuum mechanics theory6. describe the limitations of a discrete finite element model and argue the choices for mesh densities7. interpret a linear finite element analysis with respect to correctness of results and the objective of the analys

Education Method Computer exercises

Assessment The grade will be based on written reports of the computer exercises


of 186



WB3404A Vehicle Dynamics A 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. E.J.H. de Vries



0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Course Contents Basic elements of the dynamics of road vehicles (car, truck, motorcycle). Ride vibration response to road unevenness. Sine andstochastic roadprofile. Single, two and three mass/spring/damper systems. Linear and non-linear models. Vibrational modes andstability. Discomfort analysis. System identification. Roadholding: vehicle handling and stability. Response to stear input andside wind. Singel two-wheel vehicle model to discuss effects of tyres, inertia and geometry. Influence of several designvariables: steering and wheel suspension, kinematics and compliance, toe angle, camber, roll axis, roll stabilizer, load transfer.Motorcycle stability and modal shapes (brief discussion of results)

Study Goals The student is able to apply dynamics methods and knowledge on vehicle specific problems

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.quantify comfort and road holding: recognise the paradox for optimal suspension design2.realize that linear models are approximations of reality in many aspects3.employ single mass and higher order models for vertical vibration analysis, and justify the choice for single d.o.f., quarter caror half car model4.implement the most common non linear elements in vehicle(models) and discover some analytical solution methods5.solve non-Linear problems with numerical integration routines6.apply Lagrange method to derive equations of motion7.analyze driving stability in the horizontal plane using Hurwitz criterion8.characterize vehicle handling in terms of under- and oversteer, apply critical and characteristic velocity on the vehicle

behaviour9.derive the single track model, linear and including elementary non-linear properties

Education Method Lectures (4 hours per week), practical exercises

Computer Use In working out the problems the computer will be helpful, for some problems essential. MatLab will be used for analysis andsimulation


Course material:Lecture notes: Vehicle Dynamics A (pdf on blackboard)

References from literature:Mitschke, Dynamik der KraftfahrzeugeGillespie, Fundamentals of vehicle dynamics 1992Genta, Motor Vehicle Dynamics 1997, 2003, 2006Pacejka, Tyre and Vehicle Dynamics 2002, 2006 (2nd)

Assessment Oral exam, by appointment

Remarks Laboratory project(s):About 10 problems (exercises) are requested to prepare at home.

Design Content The effect of design parameters of wheel suspension and stearing system are discussed.


of 186



WB3415-03 Adams Course 3

Responsible Instructor C. Verheul


x/x/x/x

Education Period Different, to be announced

Start Education 1



Expected prior knowledge wb1310 (Multi body dynamics A)

Course Contents The instruction consists of a 5-day course in a block of 2 and a block of 3 complete days in the period of two weeks consecutiveweeks.

During the instruction, students are taught to be able to independently use a high-end multi body modelling and simulationsoftware in a complex mechanical dynamics project. To educate the engineering task of professionally using a multi bodyprogramme, a selection of transport technical systems and problems are modelled and investigated.

Examples of mechanical systems and problems that will be modelled and analysed are: - Linkage mechanisms, - Kinematics anddynamics of crane systems,- Cable systems in transport equipment,- Conveyor belt systems.

The level and contents of the course are equivalent to an ADAMS user course supplied to industrial customers.

Study Goals Gaining sufficient knowledge of (the use of) numerical methods and dynamical and mathematical consequences of modelling amechanical system to enable independent use a multi body simulation software (with application in MSC.ADAMS) to perform acomplex dynamics task.

Education Method Computer course

Computer Use The course is performed on computers and consists of 40 % instructions and 60 % hands-on use of simulation software oncomputers.


Course material:MSC.ADAMS Starters Course Manual (MSC Software)

References from literature:Cranes, design, practice and maintenance; Ing. J.Verschoof; ISBN 1-86058 130 7

Assessment Computer test

Remarks Assessment is performed by observation of the ability to independently use the ADAMS software for a given complicateddynamics task ate the end of the 5 day course.


Design Content The student must be able to translate mechanical systems into a functional system of multibody components.


of 186



WB3416-03 Design with the Finite Element Method 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. W. van den Bos


0/2/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period none


Summary The main goal for the course wb3416 Design with finite elements is to learn using FEM (Finite Element Modeling) software as a

design tool. The assignment for this course is to structurally design a crane with the aid of finite element program ANSYS.Choose 1 crane (or ship loader or unloader) from a large library of cranes and structurally design the crane with the informationgiven from the technical specifications sheet and a photo or basic design drawing of an existing crane.Starting from the basic layout of the crane (see the photo) the structural design of the crane has to withstand weather conditionsand the working loads given in the specifications. The finite element model is used to study the influences of the different loadsand conditions of the crane.For approval the crane has to be calculated according to the Dutch standards NEN 2018 and 2019. For this course at least thefollowing criteria have to be checked:Material stressFatigueCorner loadDeflectionEigenfrequenciesBucklingDynamic behavior

The result of the course is a report with includes all calculations relevant to prove the structural integrity of the crane design. (forexample the displacement and maximum stresses in the crane as a result of lifting a container at the tip of the boom)

Course Contents Design a ship-shore crane according to the Dutch Standards (NEN 2017 to 2023) and control your design with the use of a finiteelement model (ANSYS)

For special groups as the "FORMULA STUDENT Design Team" alternative designs can be the subject of this course

for detailed description see:http://www.ocp.tudelft.nl/transport/Blackboard/Wb3416/index.htm

result examples see:http://www.dutracing.nl/ (Formula Student 2003) http://www.ocp.tudelft.nl/transport/Blackboard/Wb3416/index.htm

Study Goals The student is able to:1.use the Finite Element method as a Design Tool2; Judge and interpret FEM results correctly2.design according to standards

Education Method Lectures in computerroom (4 hours per week)

Computer Use ANSYS (Finite element program) (see www.ansys.com or www.coengineering.nl for examples of finite element modelling)

PSpad editor (text editor)


Course material:Lecture notes "Design with finite Elements" Available at blackboard(all information is only available in English)

References from literature:"Cranes, design, practice and maintenance"; Ing.J.Verschoof; ISBN 1-86058 130 7NEN 2018 Cranes Loads and combination of loadsNEN 2019 Cranes the metal structure (both can be downloaded on www.nen.nl on campus computers)


Remarks Compulsory for students Transport technology


Design Content Design the structural part of a Harbour crane.


of 186



WB3417-04 Discrete Systems: MPSC 5

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. J.A. Ottjes

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. H.P.M. Veeke

Instructor Ir. M.B. Duinkerken


2/2/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period noneCourse Language English

Expected prior knowledge basic knowledge of programming language 'Delphi' for example as obtained in course Wb3210

Summary Modelling, discrete simulation, process-interaction method, logistics, production, transport, control, practical

Course Contents This is a course on the modeling of discrete systems for transport and production. It deals with a method to quickly designflexible prototype models and to implement them in a simulation environment. The method is based on the systems approach incombination with process-interaction modeling. Special attention is paid to the modeling of operational control and the use of these models for real-time control. A number of practical examples, including a production process, a transport system and a portwill be considered.

During the course a number of individual assignments will be given to be answered via blackboard. Halfway the course, groupsof 4 students are formed. Each group has to design(on paper) a process-interaction model of a realistic case including the modelgoal, performance indicators, input, output and an experimental design, resulting in a short report.

Those who have attained a satisfactory result for both the individual work and the group model design will be admitted to thesecond part of the course. This takes the form of a practical. The model developed in the first part has to be implemented andapplied in a simulation environment based on Delphi and Tomas (see http://www.delphibasics.co.uk/ and www.tomasweb.com.

The results: process-interaction model design, implementation, experiments and final report will be graded.

Study Goals Student is able toa)Apply the Process-Interaction method on any discrete logistic system

More specifically, the student is able to:1.decompose the system into relevant classes of elements, patterned on the real-world elements of the system2.distinguish the relevant properties of the element classes3.distinguish the active element classes and provide their process description

And tob)design and implement a simulation model of a simple logistic system in Delphi/Tomas

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.formulate the goal of the simulation project2.distinguish the relevant parameters and performance indicators3.define the input required

4.set up an experimental plan5.transfer the process-interaction model into Delphi/Tomas code6.carry out the experimental plan7.interpret and report results

Education Method 9 Lectures (2 hours per week), individual assignments, group assignment

Computer Use Use of discrete simulation software: Tomas based on Delphi.


Lecture materials, hand outs, example models, recent publications on the subject area and the Web sites: www.tomasweb.comand www.delphibasics.co.ukA text book is in preparation

Assessment Practical (in groups of 4 students): Design, implementation and application of a simulation model resulting in a final report. Twogrades will be assigned and averaged: 1) for the initial model design 2) for the implementation, application and final report.

Special Information

Remarks During the practical each group will have a coach assigned.Adequate coaching can only be assured if all members of the group have attended most of the lectures.

A basic knowledge of the programming language "Delphi" is required for the practical. Though some attention is paid to thatlanguage during the course, it still is recommended to get acquainted with Delphi in an early stage of the course.a useful web site is: www.delphibasics.co.uk


Design Content The modeling of a system has a major design component


of 186



WB3419-03 Characterization and Handling of Bulk Solid Materials 6

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. D.L. Schott

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. G. Lodewijks

Practical Coordinator E.F.L. Stok


2/2/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period 23


Course Contents This course focuses on the characterisation of the mechanical and dynamical behaviour of bulk solid materials. Bulk solidmaterials include coal, sand, limestone etc. These materials can be free flowing through bunkers and chutes as well as stored insilos, handled by stackers and reclaimers or transported by conveyors. Experimental ways to determine the mechanical propertiesof bulk solid materials will be discussed.

An experimental assignment to determine these properties of a particular bulk solid material is part of the course in the firstperiod. With the experimentally determined properties the behaviour of this material in a silo (no flow or mass flow versusfunnel flow) will be predicted.

Knowing the properties of a specific bulk solid material, the effect of these properties on the design of handling or transportingequipment can be determined. This includes also the influence from and on the environment of bulk handling systems.

Conceptually designing a piece of equipment for storing, handling or transporting a bulk solid material, of which the mechanicalproperties are determined experimentally earlier in this course, is also part of this course.

Study Goals The student will be able toGeneral1.Recognize the different functions of bulk materials handling

Material characterization2.Describe and explain the fundamental difference between a fluid and particulate material.3.Experimentally determine the mechanical properties of a particular bulk solid material (Characterize particulate material (theirphysical properties))4.Relate the material properties to each other and perform calculations (distributions)

Behavior of material5.Perform sheartest measurements6.Assess the quality of a mixture7.Explain the different principles behind mixing, segregation, homogenization, blending (and to recognize the situations incases/practices)

Equipment(3 types: silo, belt conveyor, size reduction equipment)8.Explain the design procedure, incl requirements and choices for the design of equipment

8a Explain the design procedure, incl requirements and choices for the design of a silo9.Design equipment on headlines9a Design a silo (use the sheartest results)10.Describe the physical working principles of different types of the equipment11.Describe the advantages/disadvantages of the equipment12.Determine the equipment that is suitable for a given situation13.Calculate the appropriate parameters of equipment required for performance in a given situation14.Describe typical/characteristic/maximum values for equipment (belt speed, width, max angles, etc.)

Interaction Material and Equipment15.Recognize and motivate weak points in a given BMH configuration and solve them by proposing solutions.

Education Method Lectures, laboratory assignment (in pairs), Company visit

Computer Use Use of data acquisition equipment and database software.


1. Book: Introduction to Particle Technology by Martin Rhodes, John Wiley & Sons, ISBN 978-0-470-01427-1, 2008.Online ISBN: 9780470727102, DOI: 10.1002/9780470727102http://www3.interscience.wiley.com/cgi-bin/bookhome/117932420?CRETRY=1&SRETRY=0

2. Papers and NEN standard provided during the lecture series on Blackboard.3. Slides

4. Other interesting and recommended book: Powders and Bulk Solids by Dietmar Schulze, ISBN 978-3-540-73767-4, 2008Online ISBN: 978-3-540-73768-1, DOI: 10.1007/978-3-540-73768-1http://www.springerlink.com/content/l55416/?p=fbeb6748815f4e4c92f56519a15f8837&pi=0

(Both of the books are available online (access only from university network))

Assessment 1. report of experimental assignment (25% of the mark)2. written examination (75% of the mark)The final mark can be obtained only if the grade for each of the parts equals 6 or higher.


calculator


Design Content Conceptual design of various bulk material handling equipment.


of 186



WB3420-03 Introduction Transport Engineering and Logistics 5


Instructor Prof.ir. J.C. Rijsenbrij


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12

Course Language EnglishRequired for wb3410, wb3421, wb3422

Course Contents Transport in society: importance of transport systems and logistics; design requirements (energy consumption; directives fromauthorities; working conditions).Networks, terminals and equipment: terminal types; handling activities and logistics; terminal design.Conceptual design of transport systems and equipment.Process analysis; key performance indicators; systems approach and object oriented design; integrated cost approach.Production and distribution: logistic networks and concepts; push systems and pull systems; logistic chains; terminals,warehouses; physical distribution.Queueing theory: overview of basic models and results.Routing and scheduling: standard models; algorithms; branch and bound method.Forecasting and decision making: process control and forecasting; models for decision making.Modelling and simulation: worldviews in discrete event simulation; stochastic processes; design, planning and control withsimulation; distributed simulation; case study.Load units and equipment: unitized cargo handling; standardisation in manufacturing, transport and logistics; overview of widelyused systems.Mechanisation and automation: trends in mechanised transport; design demands; drivers for automation; design topics.Case studies on transport systems.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.Recognize importance of transport systems and logistics in society, in particular in supply chains and in production systems.2.List restrictions and options in design and optimisation of transport and logistic systems (energy consumption; legislative rules(environmental, labour); technical restrictions; working conditions).3.List characteristics of networks, terminals, warehouses and equipment (transport modes, terminal types,material handling andlogistics).4.List characteristics of commonly applied principles in production organisation.5.List load units and equipment used in material handling and list characteristics of widely used systems.6.Identify trends in mechanisation and automation in material handling.7.Identify and define key performance indicators (KPI) of transport and logistic systems.8.List methods to analyse components of systems (i.e. queuing theory, simulation, forecasting, routing, scheduling) and apply themethods to small scale problems.9.Analyse processes at a transfer point (terminal, warehouse) and to decide on number of equipment and handling capacityneeded to handle transport flows.



Course material:Lecture notes. Handouts.



of 186



WB3421-04 Automation and Control of Transport and Production Systems 6




0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3


Course Language EnglishCourse Contents This course focuses on the automation and control of modern transport and production systems. Automation is often necessary to

increase the capacity or to reduce operating costs of industrial systems on one hand while maintaining a sufficient level of operational accuracy on the other hand. Automation requires full control of an industrial system and its equipment and athroughout understanding of the transport/manufacturing process and the dynamics of the equipment involved. In this course theautomation of a number of typical systems will be studied and the dificulties and opportunities of new technologies. Basis of thiscourse is a study of the dynamics of the operational process and the equipment. In an automated system data communication isimportant to ensure reliable performance. In this respect equipment and process monitoring is important as well. Therefore dataacquisition, mining, analysis and transfer will be discussed in detail. The course is concluded by a practical assignment where thecontrol of equipment used in an automated system will be studied.

Study Goals (1) To categorise industrial systems and identify properties that determine their performance; (2) to describe mathematically thetransport process and the behaviour of equipment; (3) to determine the requirements to automate an industrial system in terms of control algorithms and equipment involved; (4) to experience the difference between automation in concept and automation inpractice.

Education Method Lectures (2 hours per week), practical assignment

Computer Use Uses of data acquisition equipment and database software

Literature and StudyMaterials Course material:Lecture book

References from literature:To be determined


Remarks Access to the oral examination only after completion of the practical assignment.

Design Content Not applicable


WB3422-03 Design of Transport Equipment 5

Responsible Instructor Ir. W. van den Bos


0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period none


Expected prior knowledge wb3420-03

Course Contents Application of design methodology to a specific case of conceptual design (functional analysis, morphological matrix,multicriteria analysis). Calculations of mechanical power for typical motion (cycle with start, stationary motion, stop), like indriving, hoisting, rolling and belt transport. Selection of driving motor and transmission. Soft start and controlled braking.Overview of typical equipment like cranes, stackers. Working cycle, working area, displacement functions (drive, slew, extend).Cable loop systems: examples and typical aspects like mechanical efficiency, wear and safety. Crane components like grabs andspreaders: typical aspects like open/close motions, force analysis, position accuracy. Application of kinematics and dynamics intransport equipment: transfer of non-uniform motion, degree of freedom, instantaneous center of rotation, kinematic transferfunctions, transfer quality (pressure angle), force analysis using virtual work principle. Timed motion with start-stop behaviour.Static balancing regarding support forces and driving force. Dynamic effects like slip and rest vibration after a stop or a collision.

Demonstration of tools for motion and force analysis. Dimensioning of the whole structure using standards (load combination,group factor). Machine directives (CE-marking) and tender documents. Dimensioning of typical large stuctures such as lattices.Examples of welded connections. Demonstration of analysis tools for stress, deformation, fatigue.

Study Goals To obtain general insight in designing transport equipment, both in its fundamental (conceptual) aspects and in the characteristicconstruction details, aiming to early estimate the technical feasibility of transport equipment.

Education Method Lectures, designing in groups


Course material:written papers, to be collected in a map (under construction), available on blackboard

References from literature:Verschoof, J.: Cranes

Assessment Written report and final discussion of this report

Remarks To participate in the project, that is the basis for the assessment, it is strongly recommended to be present during the lecturehours.


Design Content Participants work in groups to make a (conceptual) design of a case, that will be introduced in the first lecture hour. The teachersuse the case as much as possible to make the theory clear. At the end of the course the groups present and defend their concept inthe lecture room. A report containing design calculations and offering tender documents has to be submitted as well.


of 186



WB3423-04 The Delft Systems Approach 3



2/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Course Contents Complete modeling of industrial systems includes both function models for static structures and time-dependent behaviourmodels.

A fundamental approach leads to the proper model, the steady state model and the control paradigm. For multi-aspect modellingthe PROPER model will be explained and applied to the field of logistics and organization.

Modelling of the design process itself with a clear distinction between interdisciplinary function design and monodisciplinaryprocess design.

Study Goals The course aims to learn the students the basics of the Delft Systems Approach for Industrial Organizations (DSA).Therefore the student should learn to:

- Structure complex industrial systems into the conceptual models: Steady State Model, Innovation Model, Proper Model- Describe all types of activities in terms of functions- Recognize both the operational and the control functionality- Differentiate between operational and innovation management.- Use the models for analysis and design of industrial systems



Course material:Book: The Delft Systems Approach: Analysis and Design of Industrial Systems, H. Veeke, J. Ottjes, G. Lodewijks, Springer,2008



Design Content Understanding the design process itself and the transition of using conceptual models to concrete process models.


WB3424-08 Production Organisation Principles 3


Instructor Ir. A.J. Valkenberg

Contact Hours / Weekx/x/x/x 0/2/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period none


Course Contents This course highlights several topics in the field of operations management like Lean Manufacturing, Maintenance, Marketing,Shift work etc.Guest lecturers are invited, who have experience in their subject.

Study Goals The course aims to learn the students to:

- Explain the characteristics of different production organization structures- Explain the connections between organization structure and decision support systems.- Explain the difficulties of trends in the management world- Differentiate between different types of information

Education Method Guest LecturesLiterature and StudyMaterials

Course material:Lecture notes + reader (see blackboard)

Recommended:- Ray Wild, "Operations Management", Continuum, London,ISBN 0 8264 4927 1

Assessment Essay


of 186



WB3425-04 Production Engineering Practical 5


Instructor Ir. A.J. Valkenberg


0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period none

Course Language Dutch (on request English)Required for Production Engineering and Logistics

Expected prior knowledge systems approach and participating in masterclass "Delft Systems Approach for Industrial Organization"

Course Contents Design of real industrial system

Study Goals The production Engineering practical aims to learn the PEL-students to:

- Participate and cooperate in a complex design project- experience multidisciplinary decision making- split complex problems in smaller domain-specific problems- contribute to the result by means of a specific specialization- prove the technological and logistical feasibility- present ideas and results completely but short

Education Method Practical with project teams


design methodology

Assessment plenary presentation + final reportEnrolment / Application PEL master students only


Design Content (Re)design of a real industrial system based on global management requirements and a formulated policy


of 186



WB4300B Fundamentals of Fluid Machinery 2

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. C.A. Infante Ferreira

Instructor Prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen


0/0/0/2

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents Pump types.

General definitions for pumps. Characteristics. Net positive suction head. Cavitation. Thermodynamic definitions.

Centrifugal pumps. Characteristics. Unstable operation. Self-priming centrifugal pumps. Parallel en series operation of pumps.Capacity control. Variable speed drive.

Positive displacement pumps.

Introduction to compressors. Application range. Compressor types. Thermodynamic principles. Theoretical work of compression. Thermodynamic efficiencies. Second law of thermodynamics. Exergy and exergy-loss. Energy and exergy flowdiagrams. Multistage compression.

Positive displacement compressors. Working principle; characteristics, advantages, disadvantages and application range of thedifferent types. Reciprocating compressors: construction characteristics; compressor cycle; valves; capacity control; gaspulsations. Helical screw compressors: compressor cycle SRM-compressor; built-in volume ratio; capacity control and built-involume ratio control. Rolling piston compressors. Rotary vane compressors. Scroll compressors. Roots-blowers. Liquid ring

compressors.Turbo-compressors and turbines: axial and radial flow types; working principle; relation between velocity tri-angles andthermodynamic state change; dimensionless performance parameters; performance maps and off-design behaviour; limits of operation; preliminary design procedures.

Study Goals The student is able to understand, reproduce and apply thermodynamic definitions to come to identification and quantification of processes in fluid machinery, to recognize and apply the working principles, specific characteristics and application range of themost relevant pump, compressor and turbine types and to model fluid machinery with simplified models.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.understand, reproduce and apply the thermodynamic definitions in relation to pumps2.recognize and apply pump characteristics including their net positive suction head behavior, parallel and series operation andcapacity control3.understand, reproduce and apply the thermodynamic definitions in relation to compressors including first and second lawanalysis and multi-stage operation4.identify thermodynamic losses that take place in compressors and to explain how these losses are affected by the selecteddesign5.explain the working principles of positive displacement and dynamic compressors6.describe the basic construction of the different positive displacement compressor types (including piston, helical screw, rollingpiston, rotary vane, scroll, roots-blowers and liquid ring compressors) and their operation limits and capacity control capability7.model, in a simplified way, the processes taking place in reciprocating compressors taking piston displacement and (automatic)valve behavior into account8.quantify the effect of the built-in volume ratio on performance for the relevant compressor types9.recognize and apply characteristics of turbo machinery including their operation limits and capacity control



Course material:Lecture notes (Blackboard)O'Neill, P. A., "Industrial compressors", Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd, Oxford, 1993.

References from literature:Bos, G. A., "Stromingsmachines", Stenfert Kroese Uitgevers, Leiden, 1992.Ferguson, T.B., "The centrifugal compressor stage", Butterworth, London, 1963.Frenkel, M.I., "Kolbenverdichter", VEB Verlag Technik, Berlin, 1969.Rinder, L., "Schraubenverdichter", Springer, Wien, 1979.



Design Content This course provides the students with engineering knowledge to size pumps and compressors as a part of a system. Forreciprocating compressors a simplified design model is discussed.


of 186



WB4302 Energy Conversion 4

Responsible Instructor Dr. P.V. Aravind


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Required for st310, wb4422, wb4410, wb4412, wb4419, wb4420Expected prior knowledge wb4100, wb1224, wb3560

Course Contents · Short recapitulation of the fundamentals of engineering thermodynamics: first law, energy balance of closed and opensystems, second law, entropy and irreversibility.· Specific thermodynamic properties of fluids: properties of water and steam, properties of ideal gas.· Extended definition of exergy and environment. Chemical exergy. Exergy of fuels. Exergy efficiencies.· Value diagrams. Application for heat exchanging equipment and combustion processes.· Exergy losses of basic processes: fuel conversion, heat transfer, turbines, compressors.· Exergy analysis and optimisation of conventional power stations (boiler/steam cycle):boiler: air preheating, steam conditions, feedwater temperature;steam cycle: selection of working fluid, friction losses in boilers, losses in condensor and piping, feedwater pump, extractionfeed water heating.· Gas turbine processes, losses and optimization:closed cycle GT process: pressure ratio, turbine inlet temperature, cycle configuration (intercooling, recuperation, reheat);open cycle GT process: cycle configuration, value diagram;combined cycle systems: exergy losses HRSG, multiple pressure steam cycles, supplementary firing;· Combined heat and power production (CHP): thermodynamic principle of CHP, evaluation criteria, applications, power toheat matrix.

· Fuel cells: calculation of reversible power and reversible cell voltage, effect of irreversibilities on cell performance, Nernstequation and some characteristics of SPFC (PEMFC), MCFC and SOFC, exergy losses in fuel cell systems.· Refrigeration cycles and heat pumps: properties of working fluids, processes with mixtures, absorption processes,water/lithium bromide systems, ammonia/water systems.

Study Goals The student is able to evaluate the thermodynamic performance of various conversion processes and systems by applying theexergy concept and to identify ways to reduce overall exergy losses of frequently applied processes and systems.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.determine the exergy values, including chemical exergy, of fluid mixtures and fuels2.determine exergy losses and exergy efficiencies of basic processes like fuel conversion (combustion, gasification, reforming),heat transfer, expansion turbines and compression and to present exergy losses in property diagrams and value diagrams3.determine fluid properties of pure components as well as binary fluids from property diagrams and to present the processes andcycles in property diagrams of the considered fluids4.identify thermodynamic losses (exergy losses) of processes that take place in the main equipment of conventional powerplants, like boiler, piping, steam turbine, condenser, feedwater heaters and pumps and to explain how these losses are affected bythe selected steam parameters and alternative system configurations5.identify the thermodynamic losses (exergy losses) of gas turbine cycles (open cycles and closed cycles) and to explain howthese losses are affected by the selected design parameters (turbine inlet temperature and pressure ratio) and alternative system

configurations (intercooling, recuperation and reheat)6.explain how combined cycle plants can reduce overall exergy losses in comparison with conventional power plants and gasturbine cycles and to show the effects of multiple pressure steam generation and supplementary firing7.explain how and under what circumstances combined heat and power generation (CHP) can reduce overall exergy losses incomparison with separate generation of heat and power by applying value diagrams and power to heat matrices8.describe the processes that occur in various types of fuel cells under development and to determine the power that can beobtained from a reversible fuel cell and indicate the losses that will occur in fuel cell systems9.describe the processes that occur in absorption refrigeration and heat pump systems (water/lithium bromide systems,ammonia/water systems) and to show (in the property diagrams of the respective binary fluids) the effect of various measures forimproving system performance



Course material:· Thermodynamica voor energiesystemen. J.J.C. van Lier, N. Woudstra. (Delft University Press, ISBN 90-407-2037-1)· Absorption chillers and heat pumps. K.E. Herold, R. Radermacher, S.A. Klein. (CRC Press, ISBN 0-8493-9427-9)

References from literature:· Thermodynamik. Eine Einführung in die Grundlagen und ihre technische Anwendungen. Baehr, H.D.. ISBN 3-540-08963-2· Thermodynamik. Grundlagen und technische Anwendungen. Einstoffsysteme. Stephan, K., Mayinger, F.. ISBN 3-540-15751-4· Technische Thermodynamik. Mehrstoffsysteme und chemische Reaktionen. Schmidt, E.. ISBN 3-540-07978-5· Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics. Moran, M.J., Shapiro, H.N.. John Wiley & Sons, ISBN 0 471 97960 0· Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics. Smith, J.M., Van Ness, H.C., Abbott, M.M.. ISBN 0-07-118957-2· Combined-Cycle Gas & Steam Turbine Power Plants. Kehlhofer, R..ISBN 0-88173-076-9



Design Content design and optimization of system components and system lay-out


of 186



WB4400-03 World of Process & Energy Technologies 1



0/0/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23


Expected prior knowledge MSc ME SPET courses of semester 1ASummary To collect and use information about various research projects to come to a comparison of research topics based on self

developed criteria and to develop a plan for a MSc final project.

Course Contents The ongoing research projects of the Department Process and Energy are presented in oral and poster presentations. Informationon related PhD projects, which are carried out at other Dutch universities, must be obtained via internet. The information must beused to write a plan for a MSc final project. The project plan should include objectives, tasks, deliverables, time planning andreferences to background material.

Study Goals The student is able to collect and use information about various research projects to come to a comparison of research topicsbased on self developed criteria and to develop a plan for an MSc final project.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.reproduce the scope of research fields presented by research staff members2.develop rough criteria for an initial selection of appealing research topics3.analyse these scientific research areas by having discussions with relevant staff members4.develop and defend a simplified project plan for a MSc final project5.formulate and defend detailed criteria for a final selection of a research topic

Education Method Oral and poster presentations

Computer Use Search information on Internet


material on Blackboard and poster presentations

Assessment Report

Remarks Compulsory for all Sustainable Processes and Energy Technology students.


WB4402 Project Engineering 6

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr. H.L.M. Bakker


0/0/2/2

Education Period 3

4Start Education 3



Course Contents Project management: contracts, project controls, procurement, construction management, contractual risk management, costestimating and project data management.Project engineering: process engineering, controls and operations, safety, reliability, environmental engineering, mechanicalengineering and electrical engineering.Parallel with the lectures, a design assignment is performed by the course participants and a visit to a construction site or a plantis organised.

Study Goals The student is able to apply fundamental knowledge in a practical design, to collaborate in a project team and to manage aproject.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.apply project engineering fundamentals (process engineering, controls and operations, safety, reliability, environmentalengineering, mechanical engineering and electrical engineering) in a design assignment

2.apply project management fundamentals (contracts, project controls, procurement, construction management, contractual riskmanagement, cost estimating and project data management) in a design assignment

Education Method Lectures, design assignment

Computer Use Computer aided drawing software.


Hand-out of sheets

Assessment working out and discussion of design-assignment.


Design Content Design of small process installation eq. a heat-power cycle, a large steam-line, a test facility for Diesel engines.


of 186



WB4403 Advanced Reaction & Separation Systems 4

Responsible Instructor H.J.M. Kramer

Instructor Z. Olujic


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3



Expected prior knowledge wb4435 Equipment for heat transferwb4436 Equipment for mass transfer

Parts The course consists of two parts:Part one is focussed on the design of equipment for destillation, absorption, desorption/stripping and extraction.

Part two concerns crystallisation and mechanical separation methods.

For both parts an assignment is given to the students.

Course Contents Basic principles and design methods for equipment used in equilibrium stage separation processes, such as distillation,absorption, stripping (desorption), extraction and crystallization, and in mechanical separation processes, such as sedimentation,filtration, etc.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.design, with help of basic principles and design methods, equipment used in equilibrium stage separation processes(such asdistillation, absorption, stripping (desorption), extraction and crystallization)2.design, with help of basic principles and design methods, equipment used in mechanical separation processes, such assedimentation, filtration, etc.

Education Method Lectures (4 hours per week)Computer Use Computer aided solving the process equipment design assignments.


Course material: J.D. Seader and E.J. Henley, Separation Process Principles, J. Willey & Sons, 2006.References from literature:Sinnott (Coulson, Richardson; Chemical Engineering, vol.6) An Introduction to Chemical Engineering Design.

Assessment Realising and defending two (design) assignments.

Remarks Assessment date by appointment


Design Content A fully design oriented approach.


of 186



WB4405 Fuel Conversion 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. W. de Jong


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Required for wb4422Expected prior knowledge wb1220, wb1321

Course Contents A wide variety of solid and gaseous, mostly fossil, fuels form the basis of our current energy supply. This course deals withunderstanding the fundamentals of the underlying thermo-chemical conversion (combustion, gasification) processes of thesefuels.

Combustion calculations for determining the amounts of air and fuel needed, the (adiabatic, stoichiometric) flame temperatureand the extent of the reaction limited by thermodynamic equilibrium are dealt with at first. Moreover, aspects of mass transferduring the combustion process are treated subsequently, which gives insight into the combustion of fuel droplets. Then thekinetics of the reaction and combustion mechanisms for diverse gaseous fuels are studied, like e.g. hydrogen. Of course inindustrial practice these reactions proceed in advanced combustion equipment; in order to be able to predict the burnout of fuelsand e.g. NOx emissions, simple reactor models for these combustors are dealt with. Renewable fuels and processes for asustainable future power and heat generation are dealt with in the topic solid fuel conversion. The emission constraints for thesespecial fuels are treated here.

The unique feature of the course from this year on is that a cooperation with an Algerian university in Batna is established insuch a way that via videoconferencing tools -backed up with "collegerama"- lectures are given by teachers of both universities.

As the final assessment, a major assignment is handed out to be worked out in small groups (2-4 students) composed of studentscooperating together internationally. During the final lecture short presentations will be given by the groups on the assignment.The communication will be facilitated by webbased tools. The assignment deals with a renewable biomass/waste based energyconversion system for which combustion calculations and dimensioning is to be performed. The system should be dimensionedin the context of small-scale decentralized energy supply in the Batna area.

Study Goals The student is able to define energy producing systems and components based on the thermal conversion of a broad range of fuels, to discern the major problems related to them and to perform idealised chemical reactor and sub-system calculationsrelated to fuel and product gas constituents.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.to classify fuels according to their elemental composition, origin, production method, phase and applications2.to set up reaction equations for a wide range of energy production related fuel conversion processes and perform balancecalculations on mass, molar and volumetric basis3.perform basic ideal gas phase chemical reaction equilibrium calculations to calculate product compositions and extents of reactions4.describe reaction kinetic expressions concerning atomic, molecular and radical species and apply them in order to solveproblems related to the primary conversion of fuels and the formation of emission components5.demonstrate basic knowledge of mass and heat transfer phenomena applied to the chemical conversion of both liquid and solid

fuels6.derive equations for idealised model reactors (well-stirred reactor and plug flow reactor concepts) and apply these reactorconcepts to solve engineering problems related to the thermal conversion of fuels7.explain the concept of the laminar flame and to calculate its characteristic parameters, like laminar flame speed, flame lengthand thickness8.describe the technology of fluidised bed reactors and perform calculations of the basic design parameters for such reactors, likethe minimum fluidisation velocity, terminal velocity, superficial gas velocity and transport disengagement height9.define and justify the selection of appropriate analysis and characterization techniques for a given thermal conversion systemof a wide range of fuels


Computer Use needed for major assignment


Course material:An Introduction to Combustion - concepts and applications, second edition Stephen R. Turns, McGraw-Hill Internationaleditions, ISBN 0-07-235044-X (book bound with disk)Handouts (available on blackboard)


Coal : typology, physics, chemistry, constitution / by D. W. van Krevelen. - 3., completely rev. ed.. - Amsterdam : Elsevier,1993. - XXI, 979 S. : Ill., graph. Darst.; (engl.) ISBN 0-444-89586-8

Books An Introduction to Combustion, 2nd edition by Stephen R. Turns

Assessment Small group assignment, cooperation Batna - Delft

Remarks Sign up for the course via blackboard


Design Content Construction aspects of burners/reactors for biomass/waste fuels with application in furnaces and boilers.


of 186



WB4408A Diesel Engines A 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.ir. D. Stapersma

Practical Coordinator R.H. van Till

Assistent Nabestaanden van H.T. Grimmelius

Assistent R.H. van Till


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 3Course Language Dutch

English

Expected prior knowledge Basic understanding of engineering thermodynamics, flow mechanics and heat transfer.

Course Contents PERFORMANCEIntroduction: Engine types and construction, historical overview and present applications.Performance parameters: fuel economy, power density and emissions, basic principles and main paramaters of modern dieselengines.Sizing of main dimensions and database of engines.Thermodynamic analysis of cylinder process, including explanation of generalised polytropic process.Performance analysis of diesel engines: important trends made clear by using a realistic Seiliger process and reasonableestimation of mechanical and heat losses.TURBOCHARGINGIntroduction: mechanical charging versus exhaust driven turbocharger, constant pressure versus pulse system, turbochargingexplained in P-V and T-S diagram.Gas exchange: mechanisms of air supply and air swallow capacity of 2- and 4-stroke engines, mechanisms of gas disposal, i.e.blow down, exhaust and scavenging.

Principles of interaction between the turbocharger and the engine: power balance of turbocharger and flow balance betweenengine and turbine, energy in the exhaust gas, off-design performance of a turbocharged diesel engine.Trends in turbocharging: waste gate, Variable Turbine Geometry (VTG), sequential turbocharging, two-stage turbocharging.Modelling: classification of diesel engine simulation models, physical balances, blockdiagram of engine + turbocharger.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1. Recognise the technical and economical importance of the diesel engine relative to other energy generating installations.2. Explain the complexity and interdependency of the main performance parameters of a diesel engine and be able to calculatethese parameters in several problem settings.3. Formulate the limitations when determining the main dimensions of a diesel engine and be able to calculate these dimensionsin several problem settings.4. Analyse the thermodynamic processes in the diesel engine, both in the cylinder and in the turbocharger and be able tocalculate the thermodynamical process data and resulting engine performance.5. Discuss the importance of main performance parameters as well as trends and limitations from the perspective of the user6. Explain the principles of a turbocharger as an example of direct waste heat usage to increase the power density of the engine.7. Explain the gas exchange mechanisms and be able to contrast the differences between the 2- and 4-stroke diesel engine.8. Explain the complex interaction between engine and turbocharger at part load and be able to calculate part load performancewith a simplified method.9. Discuss the importance, trends and limitations of turbocharging from the perspective of the user.

10. Apply the knowledge gained during the course in a practical laboratory test.Education Method The student prepares the lecture by reading chapters and preparing (preferably challenging) questions. During the lectures these

questions are discussed as well as questions raised by the tutor. The lecturing is focussed on subjects that are agreed to needfurther explanation.

Computer Use Limited: the course is woven around a computer aided cycle analysis program of the cylinder process and a mean value firstprinciple simulation model of the diesel engine. The course also provides a basis for doing advanced simulations. Theassignments can be solved either by hand or with the help of a computer.


DIESEL ENGINES, a fundamental approach to performance analysis, turbocharging, combustion, emissions and heat transferD. Stapersma, Netherlands Defence Academy/TUDelft, 2009Volume 1: Performance analysis and turbochargingVolume 2: TurbochargingVolume 5: Appendix: thermodynamic principles I

Assessment 1. Written exam.2. After attending the lectures a practical laboratory test plus a report concludes the course.

Enrolment / Application Two week prior to start of lectures through blackboard.

Remarks During absence of prof D. Stapersma questions relating to the subject matter can be answered by Dr H.T. Grimmelius.The laboratory test is tutored by Ing. R. van Till who can also answer practical questions.


Design Content Limited: assessment of the design parameters governing the performance of the engine. No extensive treatment of constructionaldetails of the engine.


of 186



WB4408B Diesel Engines B 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.ir. D. Stapersma

Assistent Nabestaanden van H.T. Grimmelius

Assistent R.H. van Till


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 4

Course Language EnglishExpected prior knowledge Basic understanding of engineering thermodynamics, flow mechanics and heat transfer

Course Contents FUELSRefining process, chemical structure of hydrocarbons, types and designation of fuel products, availability.Fuel properties: composition (C/H ratio, S-content), density, viscosity, combustion value, ignition performance (CCAI).Fuel (pre)treatment and separation.

COMBUSTIONStoichiometric number, mol and mass balance of combustion process, analysis of exhaust gas composition, practicaldetermination of air excess ratio from emission measurementsProperties of substances and mixtures: series expansion for specific heat, intenral energy, enthalpy and entropy.Thermodynamics of combustion: precise definition of heat of combustionChemics and physics: atomizing, ignition (conditions, delay), explosion diagram, flame shape, thermal theory (Arrhenius),reaction mechanisms, chain reactions, premixed and diffusive combustion.Heat release: Determination of of Net and Gross Apparent Heat Release as well as Combustion Reaction Rate by reversedsimulation algorithm, practical measurement (incl. assessment of Top Dead Centre), maximum pressure and temperature as aresult of heat release.

Modelling of heat release by single and double Vibe model, basic principle of single zone cylinder process simulation.HEAT TRANSFERMean values of heat transfer between gas and wall: summation over time and location.Heat transfer mechanisms: conduction, convection, gas radiation and flame radiation, order of magnitude of the differentcontributions.Heat transfer coefficients: empirical methods (Nusselt, Eichelberg), methods based on dimension analysis (Sitkei, Annand,Woschni).Gas velocities in the cylinder: swirl, squish.Dynamics of heat transfer: theory of instationary heat transfer in the cylinder wall: stepchange, sinusoidal and periodical input.Estimation of temperature amplitude in the wall.

EMISSIONSOverview: types of emission: gaseous (CO2, CO, HC, SOX, NOX) and particles (PM).Requirements: units and methods of conversion, measurement techniques and equipment.Fomation: chemics, i.e. reactions, equilibrium and kineticsHazards: health and environmental.Methods of reduction:1. Choice of fuel.

2. Primary methods (engine optimalisation): injection(timing/pressure/rate/shape), air humidity, air inlet temperature,compression ratio, air excess ratio, variable turbine geometry (VTG).3. More drastic primary methods (engine modifications): fuel/water emulsion, water injection, exhaust gas recirculation (EGR).4. Secundary methods (end of pipe solutions): selective cathalytic reduction (SCR).Legislation: stationary installations, road traffic and shipping.

Study Goals The student must be able to:1. Recognise the global problem of fossil fuels availability and the undesirable effects of combustion for the environment i.e.pollutant emissions into the air.2. Explain the chemical and physical aspects of combustion in a diesel engine.3. Explain the methods to determine the heat release in a diesel engine and differentiate between levels of heat release (net,gross, reaction rate).4. Explain the principles used for simulation of the cylinder process in the diesel engine, in particular the modelling of the heatrelease..5. Calculate exhaust gas composition and calculate emissions into units as required by legislation.6. Describe aspects of the emission problem, i.e. types of emissions, formation, hazards, methods of reducing emissions andlegislation.7. Explain the relation between the cyclic nature of heat transfer and spatial an temporal mean values.8. Describe mechanisms of heat transfer and apply these to the diesel engine.

9. Explain the differential equations describing the dynamic heat transfer in the wall. Explain the solutions for step, sinusoidaland periodical input from the gas temperature. Estimate the amplitude of the wall temperature at several depths.

Education Method The student prepares the lecture by reading chapters and preparing (preferably challenging) questions. During the lectures thesequestions are discussed as well as quations raised by the tutor. The lecturing is focussed on subjects that are agreed to needfurther explanation

Computer Use Indirect: examples are given of the complex data processing by computer when measuring heat release and emissions. Also thebasic algorithm of modern single zone crank angle based simulation program codes are given


DIESEL ENGINES, a fundamental approach to performance analysis, turbocharging, combustion, emissions and heat transfer.D. Stapersma, Royal Netherlands Naval College, 2003Volume 3: Fuels, Combustion and EmissionsVolume 4: Heat TransferVolume 6: appendix: Thermodynamical principles II



Design Content Limited: assessment of the design parameters for the combustion process and the heat loss in the diesel engine.


of 186



WB4410A Refrigeration 3



4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Required for wb4427Expected prior knowledge wb4100, wb1224

Course Contents · Introduction. Historical notes.· Ozone and global warming implications. The Montreal Protocol. Leaktightness requirements. STEK-provisions. ODP,GWP and TEWI.· The working field of refrigeration.· Overview of the most important refrigeration systems: Mechanical vapour compression refrigerating machines, vapourabsorption refrigerating machines, gas cycle refrigerating machines, thermo-electric cooling. Comparison of these systems.Selection criteria.· Mechanical vapour compression-refrigerating machines. Carnot cycle. Theoretical and actual refrigeration cycles anddifferences among themselves. The pressure-enthalpy diagram. Entropy production in the components of the refrigeration cycle.Relationship between entropy production and COP. Effect of operating conditions: evaporating temperature, condensingtemperature, liquid subcooling, suction vapour superheat and liquid-vapour recuperative heat exchanger. Two-stage operation.Reasons for application. Choice of intermediate pressure. Layout of two-stage systems. Cascade systems. Highlights of components: evaporator, compressor, condenser and expansion devices. Selection criteria.· Working fluids. Refrigerants for mechanical vapour compression refrigerating machines: limits of application. Effect of pressure, latent heat of evaporation, safety, price, water, oil, air and high temperature. Media for vapour absorption refrigeratingmachines: refrigerants and absorbents. Criteria. Media for gas cycle refrigerating machines. Medium for thermo-electric cooling.

Secondary coolants.· Control. Basic elements of control. Control loops in refrigeration systems. Working principle of correcting unit: on-off,multi-step and continuous control action. Economic evaluation. Model design of refrigerating systems. Physical model.Mathematical model. Model design of correcting unit. SIMULINK model. Control loops for components: compressor,condensor, expansion device, evaporator. Sensors and controllers.· Gas cycle refrigerating machines. Gas-phase cycles: Carnot cycle, Brayton cycle, Stirling cycle and Ackeret-Keller cycle.Cycles ending in the liquid-phase: Linde cycle and Claude cycle. Highlights of the components.· Thermo-electric cooling. Vortex-tube. Vortex-wheel.· Vapour absorption refrigerating machines. COP. Enthalpy-concentration diagram. theoretical cycle. Actual cycle. Effect of liquid-liquid heat exchanger in the solution circuit, absorption, rectification, evaporation, external heat exchanging, pressure dropand non-condensables. Intermittent operation. Multistage operation and resorption. Highlights of components.

Study Goals The student is able to understand, reproduce and apply thermodynamic concepts in relation to refrigeration machines taking intoaccount their economic and environmental impact, to recognize and apply the working principles, specific characteristics andapplication range of the most relevant methods to generate refrigeration and to evaluate the impact of the alternative part-loadconcepts for refrigerating machines.

More specifically, the student must able to:1.describe the position and role of Refrigeration in society and economy and its environmental impact

2.recognize the different methods to generate refrigeration effect and the most important properties of these methods3.reproduce and apply thermodynamic concepts in relation to mechanical vapor compression machines taking operatingconditions and irreversibilities into account and including first and second law analysis, two-stage, cascade and indirectoperation4.reproduce and apply thermodynamic concepts in relation to vapor absorption machines taking operating conditions andirreversibilities into account and including first law analysis, multi-stage, resorption and intermittent operation5.reproduce and apply thermodynamic concepts in relation to machines based in gas cycles including the Carnot, Joule-Brayton,Stirling and Ackeret-Keller cycles and cycles that end in the liquid phase as the Linde and Claude cycles6.reproduce thermodynamic concepts in relation to thermo-electric, compression-resorption, adsorption, magnetic, thermoacoustic and metal hydride machines7.reproduce the selection criteria for the main components of mechanical vapor compression machines and their maincharacteristics8.reproduce and apply selection criteria for working fluids for the different refrigeration systems including volumetric heatcapacity, safety and environmental impact9.describe the working principles of the various part-load control methods for refrigerating machines including on-off, speed,cylinder unloading, suction line and hot-gas bypass control10.model the processes taking place in vapor compression machines with the purpose of investigating the performance of alternative part-load control methods

Education Method LecturesComputer Use Model design of refrigerating systems with SIMULINK.


Dincer, I., "Refrigeration systems and applications", Wiley, Chichester, 2003.



Design Content About 50% of this course deals with discussion of the design methods for the different systems.


of 186



WB4416 Nuclear Engineering 3

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. A.H.M. Verkooijen


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Course Contents ï¿½ Introduction to nuclear power.ï¿½ Introduction nuclear physics, reactor kinetics and reactor control.ï¿½ Description of the various reactor types and future trends.ï¿½ Reactor safety and safety analysis. Reactor cooling during normal operation and accidents.ï¿½ Reactor materials.ï¿½ Radioactive isotopes, radiation and health effectsï¿½ Three Miles Island and Chernobyl accidentsï¿½ Economics of nuclear power.

Study Goals The student is able to describe the characteristic differences between a conventional and a nuclear power plant, to explain theconsequences for the design and operation of these differences and to develop an independent judgment about advantages anddisadvantages of the generation of nuclear electricity and thus contribute to the public debate.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.describe the history of the development of nuclear science and engineering2.make an elementary calculation of the marginal and total costs of nuclear electricity3.describe the basic properties of radioactive isotopes and radioactive decay and to make calculations. Describe the effects of ionizing radiation on health4.describe the basics of neutron physics and of reactor kinetics

5.describe the physical processes that allow control of a nuclear reactor and to calculate the reactivity of reactors and thedifferent feedback mechanisms6.describe the different systems that are necessary to safely convert thermal energy from nuclear reactions into electricity and tocalculate the system for energy removal for normal and accident situations7.describe the various reactor types now operational8.describe and quantify factors that influence the spent fuel produced9.explain the improvements that future designs must bring10.list factors for reactor safety and quantify the most important ones for a simple safety analysis11.list materials used in nuclear reactors and the specific requirements they must meet12.describe the accidents at Three Miles Island and Chernobyl and explain their cause and effects


Computer Use Pc Simulators of a PWR and a BWR will be supplied to students. Load change and loss of coolant accident will be analyzed on asystem level.


Course material:R.A. Knief, Nuclear Engineering

References from literature:Same, ISBN 1-56032-089-3



of 186



WB4420 Gas Turbines 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. W.P.J. Visser

Responsible Instructor Prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen

Exam Coordinator Ir. M.L. Verbist


2/2/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period 23


Required for WB4421

Expected prior knowledge WB1224, WB4304

Course Contents The course is given according to the diktaat GASTURBINES.· Introduction. Historic development. Gas Turbine industry.· Areas of application and comparison of stationary gas turbine and aircraft engine performance.· The ideal cycle and the effect of compressor pressure ratio, inlet pressure ratio and turbine-entry temperature on power andefficiency.· Real cycle: deviations of the ideal cycle and variants on the standard cycle.· Gas turbines for shaft power: single and multiple shaft configurations, calculation of efficiency, combined-cycles envariants on the standard cycle.· Gas turbines for thrust: aero engines, thrust calculation, turbojet, turboshaft and turbofan engines.· Combustion chambers: fuel, vaporising, combustion process, emissions. New concepts for low emissions and combustorhardware design.· Turbo machinery: axial en radial compressors, axial en radial turbines. Energy transfer, velocity tri-angles and degree of

reaction, mechanical design, blade cooling.· Gas turbine characteristics: component characteristics, stall, surge and choking. Characteristics of the gas generator, incombination with a jet pipe or a power turbine.· Examples of performance calculations.

Study Goals The student is able to describe the fundamental aspects of the working principle of gas turbines.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.reproduce and apply thermodynamic principles of gas turbines2.describe different gas turbine cycles3.describe the influence of different losses on the performance (power and efficiency) of gas turbines4.synthesize different gas turbine cycles with respect to their application5.describe the aerodynamic working principles of gas turbine components as compressors and turbines6.describe the principles of combustion as applied in gas turbines with respect to functionality and emissions7.describe the part load characteristics of gas turbines and its relation to the functional characteristics of gas turbine components8.describe specific mechanical design aspects of gas turbines9.list materials and their properties of materials to be selected for gas turbine components

Education Method Lectures, laboratory project (3-4 hours)

Literature and StudyMaterials Course material:Prof. Ir. J. P. van Buijtenen; Ir. W.P.J. Visser, "Gas Turbines, WB4420 / 4421"

various hand-outs during the course. (See also list of applicable chapters of Gas Turbine Theory, to be issued during the Englishcourses)

References from literature:Cohen, H., Rogers, G.F.C., Saravannamuttoo, H.I.H., Gas Turbine Theory, 4th ed., Longman, London, 1996. ISBN 0-582-23632-0


Remarks Exam: no books allowed, formula sheet will be made available.

Laboratory project(s):Demonstration of a small twin-shaft gas turbine: starting up and steady state operation, instrumentation and analysis of measured data. Demonstration of the aerodynamic behaviour of a small three-stage axial compressor. Duration 3-4 hours. Noreport. Attendance required.


Design Content The course includes design aspects of the thermodynamic process. Some aerodynamic design aspects are covered; mechanicaldesign aspects are only given in a descriptive way.


of 186



WB4421 Gas Turbine Simulation/Application 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. W.P.J. Visser

Responsible Instructor Prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen

Instructor Ir. M.L. Verbist

Exam Coordinator Ir. M.L. Verbist


0/0/2/2

Education Period 34



Expected prior knowledge wb1224, wb4304, wb4420 (wb) of wb4280 (lr)

Course Contents The course consists of two parts: one part is about off-design behaviour of gas turbines (with simulation-practicum with GSP)and a part application.Part 1:Performance characteristics of gas turbine components, procedures and computer programs for the calculation of the static anddynamic part load behaviour of gas turbines, the effect of ambient conditions on performance. Operating envelope, flowphenomena in compressors: stall, surge, choking. Performance monitoring: trend analysis, the use of parameter estimationtechniques in case only limited data are available.Part 2:In part 2 the student is expected to carry out an assignment with GSP, consisting of the analysis and the generation of solutionsfor a practical example of the behaviour of a gas turbine under deviating operational conditions, as component wear, a differentfuel , application of water- of steam injection. A report has to be written, and discussed with the lecturers. A grade will bedetermined during the evaluation.

Study Goals The student is able to compute gas turbine performance under varying operational conditions.More specifically,the student must be able to:1.describe the part load characteristics of gas turbines and its relation to the functional characteristics of gas turbine components2.calculate gas turbine performance with modern computational tools (i.e. GSP, Gas Turbine Simulation Program®)3.analyse gas turbine performance under different operational conditions such as ambient conditions and power setting4.analyse gas turbine performance under different hard ware conditions, i.e. after wear, erosion, corrosion of critical gas turbineparts and components5.analyse gas turbine performance as a function of installation design


Computer Use Simulation code GSP (Gas turbine Simulation Program)


Course material:Prof. Ir. J. P. van Buijtenen; Ir. W.P.J. Visser, "Gas Turbines, WB4420 / 4421"

Lecture slides available from blackboard

References from literature:RTO TECHNICAL REPORT 44 "Performance Prediction and Simulation of Gas Turbine Engine Operation" RTO-TR-044(available from blackboard)

Cohen, H., Rogers, G.F.C., Saravannamuttoo, H.I.H., Gas Turbine Theory, 4th ed., Longman, London, 1996. ISBN 0-582-23632-0

Assessment Individual assignment

Remarks Practicum:

Simulation practicum with GSP (Gas turbine Simulation Program)


Design Content Design aspects of the gas turbine in relation to the behaviour of the gas turbine and its applications.


of 186



WB4422 Thermal Power Plants 4



0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34


Required for wbo201-1 (Process scheme calculation)Expected prior knowledge BSc

Course Contents The objective of the lecture Thermal Power Engineering is develop a thorough understanding of technical options to produceheat and electricity in centralized and decentralized power plants. Boundary conditions which are taken into account aresustainability, environmental impact and economical competitiveness. Possibilities to contribute to the development of highlyefficient, environmentally friendly and integrated processes for the production and utilization of heat, power and secondary fuelslike hydrogen will be discussed.

The lecture comprises:1. Introduction: current developments, requirements, thermodynamics2. Scheme of a steam power plant and a combined cycle3. Combustion: fundamentals, combustion systems, emissions and emission control4. Steam generation: fundamentals, boilers, design of a steam generator5. Steam turbine6. Cooling system and feed water preparation7. Possibilities for efficiency improvement and future developments8. Gas turbines and combined cycles for natural gas9. Combined cycles for solid fuels (Integrated gasification combined cycle, Pressurized fluidized bed combustion,

Pressurized pulverized coal combustion, Externally fired combined cycle)10. Alternative concepts: fuel cells, MHD, CO2 sequestration11. Possibilities for Biomass conversion

Study Goals The student is able to understand the technical options to produce heat and electricity in centralized and decentralized powerplants. Boundary conditions which have to be taken into account like sustainability, environmental impact and economicalcompetitiveness. Possibilities to contribute to the development of highly efficient, environmentally friendly and integratedprocesses for the production and utilization of heat, power and secondary fuels like hydrogen.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.describe current developments in the energy situation and trends, requirements for energy conversion systems, and thethermodynamic basics2.design a scheme of a steam power plant, a combined cycle power plant and a combined heat and power plant and to calculateefficiency and basic process parameters3.describe the combustion process: its fundamentals, the design characteristics of different combustion systems for differentfuels, and to calculate emissions and design systems emission control4.explain the construction of steam generation equipment: fundamentals that determine the design of boilers, and to calculate themain dimensions of a steam generator5.describe the functioning of a steam turbine, and to calculate the power developed from steam properties

6.list the different parts of a energy conversion systems, describe their role, construction and operation, and to calculate the maindimensions for cooling system and feed water preparation7.use thermodynamic knowledge to identify possibilities for efficiency improvement and to be aware of future developments andthe bottle necks to be overcome8.describe the basic properties of gas turbines and combined cycles for natural gas, and to design these systems9.describe the system for combined cycles using solid fuels (Integrated gasification combined cycle, Pressurized fluidized bedcombustion, Pressurized pulverized coal combustion, Externally fired combined cycle), the different components of the systemsand their specific properties10.describe the basics of alternative concepts: fuel cells, MHD and their impact on future energy systems11.list the different options for CO2 capture and sequestration

Education Method Lectures, Excursion to Industrial plant with large energy consumption

Computer Use In the Process scheme calculation following on this course, the computer programm Cycle Tempo will be used to make thethermodynamic calculations.


Course material:Copies of the sheets on the internetFor some chapters a manuscript is available

References from literature:· Strauß, K.: Kraftwerkstechnik zur Nutzung fossiler, regenerativer und nuklearer Energiequellen. Springer-Verlag, Berlin,1998. ISBN 3-540-64750-3· Black&Vatch: Drbal, L-F., Boston, P-G: Power Plant Engineering. New York, Chapman & Hall, 1996. ISBN 0-412-06401-4· Stultz, S.C., Kitto, J.B.: Steam, it´s generation and use.Babcock Wilcox, Barberton, Ohio, USA, 1992. ISBN 0-9634570-0-4· Elliot, T.C., Chen, K., Swanekamp, R.C.: Standard Handbook of powerplant engineering. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1997.ISBN 0-07-019435-1· Dolezal, R. Dampferzeugung, Springer Verlag, ISBN 3-540-13771-8 of ISBN 0-387-13771-8.

Assessment Written test1st hour: closed book on theoretical questions2-3rd hour: open book on problem calculations

Remarks · Linked to (and follow up of) Thermal Power Plants is the calculation of a power plant cycle with the programme CYCLETEMPO· The participation in the lecture and exercise is strongly recommended for the examination.

Laboratory project(s):The Process Scheme calculation after the course has to be completed in about 200 hours.

Design Content The design of thermal power plants consisting of several kinds of components like: turbines, pumps, condensors, steam boilers,reheaters, preheaters that are connected by pipes and for which thermodynamic optimization is very important.


of 186



WB4425-09TU Fuel Cell Systems 3

Responsible Instructor Dr. P.V. Aravind


0/3/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 2


Expected prior knowledge wb4100, wb1224, wb4304, wb4302

Course Contents Electrochemical power production, open circuit voltage and reversible voltage, the Nernst equation, the effect of pressure andgas concentration, actual fuel cell voltage and efficiency, fuel and oxidant utilization.

Fuel cell irreversibilities, activation losses, tafel equation, fuel crossover and internal currents, ohmic losses, concentrationlosses, optimum current density.

Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells (PEMFC): electrolyte materials and structure, electrode materials and structure, gaschannels and separator plates, water management, cell cooling and air supply, considerations with regard to system design (fueland air conditions at cell inlet), construction of stacks.

High temperature fuel cells, internal reforming, fuel utilization, bottoming cycles, the use of exergy and pinch technology.

Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell (MCFC): molten carbonate electrolyte materials and structure, electrodes materials and structure,gas supply and separator plates, stack configuration, direct and indirect internal reforming, cell and stack performance, CarbonDioxide recirculation, system layout.

Solid Oxide Fuel Cell (SOFC): electrolyte materials, electrode materials and structure, cell configuration and design (flat plateand tubular configuration), stack design, internal reforming and prereforming, cell and stack performance, system design options.

Fuel processing: desulphurisation, steam reforming, partial oxidation, autothermal reforming, carbon formation, hightemperature and low temperature shift, CO removal, combustion of residual fuel, gasification and gas cleaning, heat integration.

Study Goals The student is able to describe the processes taking place in fuel cells and fuel cell systems and explain the effects of variousdesign options on the performance of fuel cell systems (PEMFC, MCFC and SOFC systems).

More specifically, the student must be able to:1. describe the main processes taking place in the various types of fuel cells as well as the layout of various fuel cells and fuelcell stacks2. explain the various parameters used to indicate the performance of fuel cells and fuel cell systems3. dtermine the cell voltage of a reversible hydrogen fuel cell and explain the effect of the main irreversibility's on theperformance of an irreversible fuel cell4. dscribe the specific processes and effects that are determining the performance of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells(PEMFC), to describe the components and usually applied materials of the cell and the design of a PEMFC stack5. describe the components and usually applied materials of Molten Carbonate Fuel Cells (MCFC) and MCFC stacks andsystems, and to indicate the effect of various design options on system performance6. describe the components and usually applied materials of Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFC) and SOFC stacks and systems and toindicate the effect of various design options on system performance7. list and describe the various processes for the conversion of fossil fuels into hydrogen for low temperature as well as hightemperature fuel cell systems and to explain how various design options for the balance of plant will affect the performance of fuel cell systems

Education Method lectures/(Self study option together with oral examination is permitted on special request throughout the year except for thelecture period)


Course material:Fuel Cell Systems Explained. James Larminie, Andrew Dicks, John Wiley & Sons, LTD, 1999, ISBN 0-471-49026-1Course slides

References from literature:· Fuel Cell Handbook, Department of Energy, EG&G Services Parsons Inc.· Fuel Cell Systems, Edited by L.J.M.J. Blomen and M.N. Mugerwa, Plenum Press, ISBN 0-306-44158-6· Electrochemical Reactors, Their Science and Technology, Part A. Edited by M.I. Ismail. Elsevier, ISBN 0-444-87139-X\

Assessment Written/oral exam

Design Content design and optimization of fuel cell stacks and system lay-out.


of 186



WB4426 Indoor Climate Control Fundamentals 3

Responsible Instructor Dr. L.C.M. Itard


4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1



Expected prior knowledge BSc.

Course Contents - Overview of indoor climate technology and historical developments- Overview of energy generation systems for indoor climate- Thermodynamic properties of humid air and the way changes of air condition can be realised and demonstrated in the Mollierdiagram. Different processes of air handling are explained by this diagram.- Thermal comfort of human beings is made clear by mathematical models based on heat and mass balances. Regions of comfortable values of indoor temperature, radiant temperature, air speed and humidity are given. The fuzzy aspect of comfort ismade clear.- Physical properties of weather variables having an effect on the indoor climate are discussed. Hourly weather show a stocasticbehaviour. It is made clear how these data can be used to define the capacity and energy use of climate installations.- Thermal behaviour of buildings and the way it can be simulated by heat balances. It is discussed how such a simulation can beset up. An example of a simple standard room is given. Based on this example the student should make a dynamic simulation of another room and make a sensitivity analyses. Such as: what is the impact of the size of a window on the capacity of theinstallation and its energy consumption. The simulation can be carried out by Matlab, Simulink or Excel.- Systems used in practice are shown. Pro and contras are given. Attention is given to design the duct for transporting the makeup air from the central air handling installation to the various room units. Methods to predict the air flow patterns in a room aregiven very briefly.- Throughout the course exercises are given to training the student.One assignment should be made and defended at the oral exam, e.g:

- Simulation of the dynamic thermal behaviour of an office room in order to define the cooling and heating capacities and theenergy use or- Design of the ventilation system of a small office building using a solar chimney.

Problems encountered by the students in making these assignments will be discussed at regular moments during the course.

Study Goals The student is able to apply the fundamentals of indoor climate control in order to sustainable design indoor climate installations.

More specifically, the student must able to:1.derive the mathematical equations describing the thermal performance of the various components2.combine these equations in order to simulate the whole system consisting of the weather, building and installation3.use this tool to answer questions about the design, such as capacities, energy use, comfort, etc.4.determine the change of air conditions by the various components of an air handing installation applying the knowledgeobtained about the thermodynamic aspects of humid air5.translate the fuzzy term "comfort" into design requirements that can be checked afterwards by measurable variables and todescribe the limitations of this technical approach learning the theory about the thermal sensation of human bodies6.calculate the heating and cooling capacity of a confined space by means of simple hand calculation and by simulation, wherethe simulation is based on statistical properties of the weather variables, thermal response of the building on weather, people andmachines and its ability to accumulate heat7.present the pro and contras of indoor climate systems used in practice, as well as more sustainable alternatives including anindication of their economics9.make optimal designs of simple systems based on simulation

Education Method Lectures, assignments and excursion

Computer Use Excel, MAtlab, Simulink


Course material:Indoor Climate A (wb4426)Calculation of heating, cooling load and temperature exceeding.

References from literature:Papers mentioned in course material.

Assessment Oral exam, based on an assignment (siumlation + report)

Remarks Exam by appointment


Design Content A case study: a design for a specific building is discussed.


of 186



WB4427 Refrigeration Technology and Applications 4



0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3



Required for First assignmentExpected prior knowledge wb4100, wb1224, wb4300B, wb4302, wb4410A

Course Contents · Compressors: function, types and models, thermodynamics, pistoncompressors, screwcompressors, other rotatingcompressors, centrifugal compressors, simulation models, selection criteria.· Condensers: function, types and models, heat transfer (general), heat transfer with condensation of pure gas, condensationin presence of other gases, special types of surfaces, heat transfer at the cooling water side, air cooled condensers, plate-fincondensers, economical optimization.· Expansion devices: function, types and models, dynamics of the thermostatic expansion valve, models, selection criteria.· Evaporators: function, types and models, heat transfer, aircoolers, combined heat- and mass transfer at the air-side of theaircooler, heat transfer between two-phase flow of refrigerant and internal evaporator surface.· Absorption chillers and heat pumps: function, types and models, physical transport phenomena in liquid films, heat andmass transfer in a liquid film.· Total compression refrigeration system: introduction, graphical methods, analytical methods, connection of models,dynamic behaviour.· Managing frozen foods: safety in the cold chain, freezing and storing of frozen foods products.

Study Goals The student is able to understand, reproduce and apply heat and mass transfer models in relation to the components used inrefrigeration systems and selection criteria for expansion devices and compressors, to analyze and model an industrial

refrigeration process including the application, and to design the main components of industrial refrigeration systems takingrecent technological developments into account.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.model an industrial refrigeration process including the application (e.g. freezing of food products)2.analyze the application process in terms of throughput en specific requirements and convert this information into refrigerationplant requirements3.optimize the refrigeration plant taking relevant aspects into account including system lay-out, refrigerant, energeticperformance and environmental impact4.understand, reproduce and apply heat and mass transfer models in relation to the components used in refrigeration systems(e.g. condensers, evaporators, secondary fluid heat exchangers, absorbers and generators)5.understand, reproduce and apply selection criteria for expansion devices and compressors including thermodynamicperformance associated with type and part-load behavior6.design the main components of the system taking recent technological developments, relevant heat (and mass) transferphenomena and component interaction into account7.evaluate the differences between the main industrial refrigeration plant alternatives (based on vapor compression or vaporabsorption)


Literature and StudyMaterials · Herold, K.E. et al. "Absorption chillers and heat pumps", CRC Press Inc., New York, 1996· C.J. Kennedy, Managing frozen foods, CRC Press Inc., New York, 2000.

Assessment Exercises + oral exam


Design Content Roughly 80% of this course is dedicated to the discussion of sizing methods for the various components.


of 186



WB4429-03 Thermodynamics for Process & Energy 3

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. W. de Jong


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2



Expected prior knowledge wb1224, wb4304

Summary Equations of state, estimation of thermodynamic properties, mixtures, chemical potential, fugacity, activity, chemical exergy,phase- and chemical equilibria.

Course Contents Calculation of heat capacity and enthalpy and Gibbs energy of reaction data. Use of equations of state necessary for thecalculation of thermodynamic quantities. Estimation of thermodynamic data, using e.g. the corresponding states principle andgroup contribution methods. Non-ideal behaviour of pure substances and mixtures whereby properties of the chemical potential,the fugacity and the activity will be considered. The notion of exergy as used for chemical conversions. Application to physicalprocesses, such as separations and chemical reactions, like combustion/gasification.

Study Goals The student is able to solve chemico-physical process problems in the area of phase and chemical equilibria for both purecomponents and mixtures under ideal and non-ideal process conditions.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.formulate "equations of state" (EOS), describe their physical background and to select them appropriately for given processconditions (pure components)2.estimate thermodynamic data from the "corresponding states principle" and "chemical group contribution" methods (purecomponents)3.calculate (physical) phase equilibrium behaviour for vapor-liquid and liquid-liquid systems of multi-component ideal mixtures4.calculate (physical) phase equilibrium behaviour for vapor-liquid and liquid-liquid systems of multi-component non-ideal

mixtures5.recognize the important role partial molar properties play in mixture phase equilibrium calculations, and to perform these typeof calculations6.calculate the extents of chemical reaction equilibria and resulting mixture compositions in ideal and non-ideal mixture gas andvapour-liquid systems7.calculate heat effects occurring in chemical equilibrium reactions


Computer Use Problems are given to students to determine non-ideal mixture behaviour; the use of the computer (excel, matlab etc.) isindispensable.


Course material:J.M.Smith & H.C. Van Ness, Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, 7th ed, McGraw-Hill Book Company

References from literature:R.C.Reed, J.M.Prausnitz and B.E.Poling, The properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th ed, McGraw-Hill Book Company, ISBN 0-07-51799-1

Assessment Oral examination based on the problems

Remarks By solving 7 problems during the lecture period, which are handed out at the end of the first lecture week, 70% of the grade canbe obtained; the oral exam on the theory and the problems solved counts for 30%. The book of Smith&Van Ness must be usedthroughout the course.


Design Content Design of process parameters necessary for simulation of extractors, distillation columns, boilers, fuel cells, chemical reactorsetc.


of 186



WB4431-05 Modeling of Process and Energy Systems 4

Responsible Instructor Dipl.ing. C. Trapp

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. P. Colonna

Instructor Dipl.ing. C. Trapp


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3


Course Language EnglishParts Part 01Introduction

Part 02Conservation LawsPart 03Modeling ParadigmsPart 04Numerical Methods and Software / 1st Midterm ExamPart 05Software We Use (hands-on)Part 06Fluid Properties, Heat Transfer, Fluid Dynamics, Chemical ReactionsPart 07Validation and Model Analysis, ExamplesPart 08Modeling Example/ 2nd Midterm Exam

Summary Physical modeling of energy systems and processes, Simulation, Steady-state, Off-design, Dynamics, Laws of conservation,Lumped parameters models, Distributed parameters models, Causality, Energy conversion systems, Processes, Thermodynamics,Heat Transfer, Fluid Dynamics, Ordinary Differential Equations, Numerical Methods and Analysis, Modularity, ProcessComponents, Power plant, Cogeneration, Trigeneration, Fluid Properties, Simulation Software, Model validation.

Course Contents This is a basic course on the modeling of energy conversion systems and processes based on physical equations. The focus is onlumped parameters models, but notions on distributed parameters models are included. Concepts from thermodynamics, fluiddynamics and heat transfer are merged with new aspects that are typical of system modeling, so that the student learns how todevelop and implement model equations. The applicative part includes simple exercises on the development of models of unit

operations (e.g. evaporator, reactor,...) and on their implementation using Matlab/Simulink (steady state and dynamic).

Program:

ï¿½Introduction: The role of models in Process Systems Engineering, Examples of processes, modeling paradigms, applications,tools, method.

ï¿½Process representation, definition of on-design and off-design steady state models, dynamic models and their applications todesign, operation and control.

ï¿½Conservation equations: intensive, extensive, lumped parameters and distributed parameters, steady state and dynamic,examples.

ï¿½Constitutive equations: review of fluid properties, heat transfer, fluid dynamics, chemical reactions...,

ï¿½Numerical methods: review of theoretical aspects and numerical solution techniques for non-linear algebraic systems anddifferential-algebraic systems of equations.

ï¿½Lumped parameters modeling: Modeling approaches, Modularity and Hierarchy, Model representation, connections and inter-module variables, "open loop" modeling, Well posedness and Index problem in DAEï¿½s, Bilateral coupling and causality,Connecting rules and example of model decomposition.

ï¿½Model validation: steady state validation, qualitative dynamic validation, quantitative dynamic validation.

ï¿½Examples: to choose from: boiler, condenser, compressor, turbine, reactor, combustion chamber, fuel cell, electric generator,...

Study Goals After learning the content of the course the student will have the following capabilities:1.Describe the role of models in Process and Energy Systems Engineering, and describe examples of systems, processes,modeling paradigms, applications, software tools, methods.

2.Represent a process with process flow diagrams, and define and use on-design and off design steady state models, "open loop"dynamic models and their applications to design, operation and control.

3.Present various forms of conservation equations: intensive, extensive, lumped parameters and distributed parameters, steadystate and dynamic, and to make examples. The student is able to apply the basic principle of accounting for conserved variablesand to write conservation balances that occur in typical energy and chemical processes.

4.List the main characteristics and choose among different models of fluid properties, heat transfer correlations, fluid dynamiccorrelations and chemical reactions model in order to appropriately select the constitutive equations that close the lumpedparameter modeling problem.

5.List the main characteristics and choose among various numerical techniques for the solution of non-linear algebraic systemsof equations, differential algebraic systems of equations, partial differential systems of equations, which are the mathematicalproblems that have to be solved when simulating a process.

6.List the various modeling approaches and describe the concept of modularity, hierarchy, connections and inter-modulevariables that are necessary to correctly setup a complex model. The student is also able to apply these concepts to develop amodel.

7.Present the fundamentals of the Index of differential-algebraic systems of equations. The student is able to detect index>1problems for simple cases, can describe the bilateral coupling concept and is able to apply it in order to obtain index = 1problems.

8.Apply (based on the previous concepts) connecting rules to sub models and to formulate model decompositions.

9.Describe the basics of distributed parameters modeling, their development. Te student is able to describe examples, relatedboundary conditions and the use of lumped parameters model to represent distributed parameters models.

10.Apply the method to develop a model to obtain the steady state and dynamic model of a process component, to implement itin a computer code and to simulate a transient and validate the results.


Computer Use The computer is used to develop dynamic models of plant components and to run simulations for the purpose of validating and

of 186



analyzing the response of the system. Due to licenses availability on campus, Mathworks Matlab/Simulink is employed.

Course Relations Follow up courses:wb4433-05 Conceptual Process Design and Optimization

wb4432-05 Process Dynamics and Control

ME2320-9 Process Modeling and Simulation Project


Course material: Printouts from lecture slides

K. Hangos, I. Cameron, Process Modelling and Model Analysis, Academic Press, 2001MMS, Modular Modeling System v.5.1, Reference Manual, and Basics, Framatome Technologies, 1998.

O.H. Bosgra, wb2311 Introduction to modeling, Lecture notes, 2002, DelftUniversity of Technology.(Matlab) Simulink R2006b , on-line help, The Mathworks inc.

A.W. Ordys, A.W. Pike, M.A. Johnson, R.M. Katebi and M.J. Grimble, Modeling and Simulation of Power Generation Plants,Springer Verlag, London, 1994.

P. Moin, Fundamentals of Engineering Numerical Analysis, Cambridge University Press, 2001.

List of scientific articles is made available to students

Prerequisites O.D.E., numerical methods: wi2051wb Differential Eqns.

Principles of programming: e.g. IN2049wbmt Programming in Visual Basic (stopped in 2006) or in2050wbmt Programming inDelphi

Thermodynamics: wb4100 Thermodynamics 1, wb1224 Thermodynamics 2Heat and Mass Transfer: wb3550 Heat and Mass Transfer

Thermodynamics of Processes and Systems: wb4302 Tmd. Eval. of Proc. and Sys.

Fluid Properties: wb4429-03 Tmd of Mixtures

Process/System Components: wb4435-05 Equipment for heat transfer, wb4436-05 Equipment for mass transfer

Assessment A sufficient performance in the written test (6) covering the content of the lectures is a prerequisite for obtaining the modelingexercise.There are to routes to pass the exam:

1. Nominal route: 2 midterm exams + modeling exercise2. Alternative route: written exam (3 times per year) + modeling exercise

The model documentation and Simulink files must be submitted via Blackboard (Projects->File Exchange). The final coursegrade is given 4 times per year, after a short discussion based on the modeling exercise. Efforts are made so that the exercise is

graded as soon as possible, after it has been handed in.If the exercise is evaluated less than 4, the revised exercise cannot be submitted for the subsequent examination date.

Enrolment / Application Please enroll using the Blackboard. Note: enroll only once, the first time you attend lectures. Students attending lectures insuccessive years should not enroll multiple times.

Design Content Modeling and simulation of components typical of energy conversion systems or chemical plants, like boilers, evaporators,condensers, turbines, compressors, distillation columns, etc.


of 186



WB4432-05 Process Dynamics and Control 3

Responsible Instructor Ir. A.E.M. Huesman


0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 34Exam by appointment


Course Contents IntroductionOverview of the process and energy industryDesign versus operation, batch and continuous operationObjectives of process control

ModelingSystem boundary, conservation laws and constitutive equationsDegrees of freedom (DOFs)Examples; stirred tank (reactor), furnace, distillation columnDifferential and algebraic equations (DAEs)Simulation of DAEsAnalysis

Common sources for nonlinearity and linearizationState space formatLaplace transformation and analysis; poles, zeros, stabilityCommon process transfer functionsModel approximation

Interaction; concept

ControlInstrumentation; sensors, actuators, control systems and Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)Feedback and feedforwardControl in the Laplace domain

PID control; tuning and practical aspects (scaling, tamed D-action)Internal Model Control (IMC) and direct synthesis

Extensions; ratio, feedforward, cascade, override, split-rangeInteraction; pairing (RGA) and decouplingPlantwide control; production rate control, quality control and recyclesBatch control; Sequential Function Charts (SFCs)Optimization; Model Predictive Control (MPC), Real Time Optimization (RTO) and Scheduling and Planning (S&P)

Study Goals The student is able to apply the control theory which is relevant for the dynamic modeling and simulation of chemical andenergy conversion processes.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1. Have a general understanding of process operation.2. Be able to analyze the dynamics of a process.

3. Be able to design a control system for a process.Education Method Lectures

Computer Use During the lectures and the assignment Matlab will be used.


Course material:Lecture notesStandard text book see below (not obligatory)

References from literature:Process Dynamics and Control, Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp.

Assessment Assignment

Special Information -

Remarks The final mark will be based on the assignment and the discussion of the assignment.


of 186



WB4433-05 Conceptual Process Design and Optimization 4

Responsible Instructor Prof.dr.ir. A.I. Stankiewicz


0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 45


Required for Project 'Process Modeling and Simulation'Course Contents This course provides the fundamentals for conceptually designing processes of energy/chemical plants, where basic operations

(reactions, separations) are modelled and process topologies are derived along with their appropriate mass- and enthalpy-balances. The conceptual process design involves a rough-sizing of basic equipment. The course brings also the up-to-dateinformation on Process Intensification fundamentals, equipment and processing methods providing the key element of sustainable chemical manufacturing.

During the course the students get a hands-on experience by developing concepts of an inherently safe, sustainable chemicalprocess (case study assignment).

The course serves as a preparation for the project-work (ï¿½Process Modeling and Simulationï¿½).

The course includes the following elements:

1. Intro; Scope; Designing a sustainable chemical plant;2. Presentation of case-study assignments3. Unit operations, equipment modeling and design: Reactors4. Unit operations, equipment modeling and design: Separators

5. Hierarchical approach to CPD6. Simulation and optimisation7. Flow-sheet design using Aspen8. Tutorial /Case study6. Fundamentals of Process Intensification;7. Intensified equipment and operations: Reaction, Mixing and Heat Exchange8. Intensified equipment and operations: Integrated devices and operations9. Modeling and design of intensified systems

Study Goals The student is able to conceptually design and optimize chemical or energy related processes.

More specifically, the student must be able to:

1. Model and design non-ideal reactors2. Model and design advanced separation equipment3. List the steps in hierarchical approach to process design4. Describe state-of-the-art PI technologies5. Design a safe, sustainable chemical processing plant


Computer Use One of the lectures is a computer exercise given in a PC-room demonstrating the use of process simulation software

An extension of the course contents and its application to a real process takes place in a subsequent project 'Process Modelingand Simulation'


Course material:A set of slides or course-notes supplement the lectures

References from literature:various

Prerequisites wb4429-03, wb4435-05, wb4436-05, wb4431-05

Assessment Written exam and presentation of case-study assignments.


of 186



WB4435-05 Equipment for Heat Transfer 3



4/0/0/0

Education Period 1

Start Education 1

Exam Period 12


Required for wb4433-05, Process modelling and simulationSummary Heat transfer by conduction, convection ,radiation, condensation and boiling. principles and application of heat integration,

exergy analysis and pinch technology

design procedure for heat transfer equipment. Shell and tube heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers, condensors, funaces, andboilers

Course Contents Calculation of heat transfer by conduction, convection and radiation in process equipment; estimation of heat transfer bycondensation and boiling, calculation of overall heat transfer coefficients using heat transfer resistances in series and by applyingthe film theory. Principles of heat integration, exergy analysis and pinch tecnoklogy.

Principles and characteristics of heat transfer equipment, such as Shell & tube heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers, doublepipe HEX, finned tube HEX, air cooled HEX, furnaces, condensers and (re-)boilers;

Design procedures for S&T HEX, Condensers, (re)boilers, plate HEX

application of pinch tecnology for the design of heat exchanger networks.

Study Goals The student is able to select and make the hydraulic and heat technically design of heat transfer equipment.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.describe energy transfer by conduction, convection and radiation in process equipment; can estimate the heat transfer bycondensation and boiling, can calculate overall heat transfer coefficients using the concept of heat transfer resistance in seriesand the film theory; Can describe the principles of heat integration, exergy analysis and pinch technology2.describe functions and characteristics of heat transfer equipment such as Shell & tube heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers,double pipe HEX, finned tube HEX, air cooled HEX, furnaces, condensers and (re-)boilers3.list design procedures for S&T HEX, Condensers, (re)boilers, plate HEX4.apply principles for the selection and design of heat transfer equipment5.apply pinch technology for the design of a heat exchanger network



Course material:1: J.M. Coulson, J.F. Richardson, Sinnott; Chemical Engineering Vol. 6, Ch. 7, Ch. 122: course sheets

References from literature:G.F. Hewitt, Heat exchanger design Handbook

Prerequisites wb1321 Heat and mass transfer



Course book and course handouts

Percentage of Design 60

Design Content Hydraulic and heat technical design of equiment of heat transfer


of 186



WB4436-05 Equipment for Mass Transfer 3


Instructor Prof.dr. G.J. Witkamp


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23

Course Language EnglishSummary Underlying theory and basic concepts: equilibrium thermodynamics, mass transfer by convection and difusion, film theory,

separation process,single equilibrium stages, cascades of equilibrium stages,absorption, stripping, distillation, crystallisation and membrane separation.Principles of design of separation processes and equipment.

Course Contents Thermodynamics of separation processes, convective mass transfer, mass transfer by diffusion, film theory.Single equilibrium stages and cascades.Examples of separation processes.Basic principles and design methods for equipment used in equilibrium stage separation processes, such as distillation,absorption, stripping (desorption), extraction, crystallization and mechanical separation processes, such as sedimentation,filtration and membrane separations

Study Goals The student is able to describe theory, equipment and design principles for physical separation processes.

More specifically, the student must be able to:1.describe thermodynamics of separation processes, convective mass transfer, mass transfer by diffusion, film theory2.describe single equilibrium stages and cascades

3.present examples of separation processes4.describe principles and design methods for equipment used in equilibrium stage separation processes, such as distillation,absorption, stripping (desorption), extraction, crystallization and mechanical separation processes, such as sedimentation,filtration and membrane separations


Computer Use Simulation of performance of distillation trays

Course Relations wb4433-05, wb4403


Course material: Handouts with lecture notes,J.D. Seader, E.J. Henley, Separation Process Principles, J. Willey & Sons, 2006.References from literature: J.M. Coulson, J.F. Richardson, Sinnott; Chemical Engineering Vol. 6, Ch. 7,11

Assessment Two design assignments to be completed (written part) and upon delivery defended (oral part). Assessment by appointment.

Design Content Basic priciples of dimensioning of equipment used in the above mentionned processes


of 186



WB4438-05 Technology and Sustainability 3


Instructor Prof.dr.ir. B.J. Boersma


0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 23

Course Language EnglishSummary This course gives a thorough introduction in the world of energy, the technologies to use energy and the effects on sustainability

of our society. The course wants to show the importance of energy in our society and especially the interdependencies betweenenergy and worldwide developments in our society, economy and requirements towards sustainability and environmentalprotection. The course covers the worldwide energy supply and consumption, discusses resources of fossil and renewableenergies, and describes technologies of fuel exploration and the variety of energy conversion technologies in large, medium andsmall scale.

Course Contents The course has been completely renewed and presents the world of energy on the basis of fact sheets, figures and tables. Thefollowing subjects are treated:

Energy in our society: relation between energy, economy, environment and sustainability Illustration of sustainability withexamplesFundamentals and definitions of energy economy and conversion: forms of energy, thermodynamics like 1st and 2nd law,exergy, entropy, Carnot cycle, energy balances,Energy supply and consumption in the world and in NLFossil and renewable energy resourcesEnergy economics: static, dynamic cost calculation, calculation of electricity production costsExploration and production of fossil fuels: exploration of oil and gas, oil and gas production technologies, surface and

underground coal miningNuclear energy conversion: physical principles of fusion and fison, nuclear power station technologies, safety aspectsHeat and power from fossil fuels: combustion and steam generation, coal fired steam power plant, gas turbine and combinedcycles, combined cycles for solid fuels, fuel cells, combined heat and power, household heating systems, heat pumps, use of energy in the steel industryRenewable energy technologies: solar thermal, solar power, wind, water, biomassEnvironmental aspects: targets for CO2 reduction, possibilities for implementation, CO2 reduction and separation technologies,possibilities for disposal of CO2, NOx emissions, SO2 emissions, particulates, hydrocarbons

Study Goals The student is able to understand the interdependencies between energy and worldwide developments in our society, economyand technology requirements towards sustainability and environmental protection are discussed.

More specifically, the student must be able to:understand and explain:1.the role of energy in our society: relation between energy, economy, environment and sustainability2.fundamentals and definitions of energy economy and conversion: forms of energy, thermodynamics like 1st and 2nd law,exergy, entropy, Carnot cycle, energy balances3.primary energy supply sources and final consumption in the world and in NL4.the characteristics of fossil and renewable energy resources

5.energy economics: static, dynamic cost calculation, calculation of electricity production costs6.exploration and production of fossil fuels: exploration of oil and gas, oil and gas production technologies, surface andunderground coal mining7.nuclear energy conversion technologies: physical principles of fusion and fission, nuclear power station technologies, safetyaspects8.technologies for heat and power production from fossil fuels: combustion and steam generation, coal fired steam power plant,gas turbine and combined cycles, combined cycles for solid fuels, fuel cells, combined heat and power, individual and districthousehold heating systems, heat pumps, use of energy in the steel industry9.renewable energy technologies: solar thermal, photo voltaic, wind, water, biomassenvironmental aspects: targets for CO2 reduction, possibilities for implementation, CO2 reduction and separation technologies,possibilities for disposal of CO2, NOx emissions, SO2 emissions, particulates, hydrocarbons


Computer Use Search of information on the Internet


Lecture notes and sheets

Prerequisites none

Assessment WrittenDepartment 3mE Department Process & Energy

of 186



WB5400-08 Mechatronic System Design 2 4

Responsible Instructor Dr.ir. A. van Beek


0/0/2/2

Education Period 34

Start Education 3

Exam Period none


Required for wb2454-05Expected prior knowledge wb3201

Course Contents In this course you are asked to carry out a small research project related to the mechanical design of precision machines andequipment. Examples are

- The preparation of an experimental research project that may include the design of a test rig, setting up a test procedure,making a time schedule and the budgeting of costs. For example, the design of a test rig to measure stick in MEMS devices.

- Performing an experimental research project that may include to set up a test with data acquisition (labview), to carry out someexperiments and to evaluate the results. For example, testing the limitations of an ultra high speed rotating spindle, testinglubricants or testing materials of slide surfaces and evaluating the results.

Study Goals The student is able to- Apply design principles for high precision test rigs, machines or measuring equipment.- Set up experimental research projects (selecting the experimental method, planning, budgeting)- Set up data acquisition programs (labview).- Perform data analyses (Evaluating measuring data, applied statistics).

Education Method Personal coaching

Computer Use Labview, Pro Engineer / Solid Works, Comsol Multiphysics


Beek, A. van, "Advanced Engineering Design: lifetime performance and reliability", 534 pp., edition 2009, available atLeeghwater

References from literature:see references in the course book

Assessment Written report as a small paper with attachments

Remarks Topics treated in the course wb3201 are to be applied.

Design Content 100%


of 186



WB5414-08 Design of Machines and Mechanisms 4




2/2/0/0

Education Period 12

Start Education 1

Exam Period 2

Course Language EnglishCourse Contents 1. Introduction (Grouping, Assignments)

2. Conceptual Design of Machines (first quarter)- Design Methods- Requirement Analysis- Function Modeling and Function Decomposition- Generating Concepts- Evaluation of Concepts- Selection of Solutions3. Design of Mechanisms- Diagram of Motion- Diagram of Goal Functions- Available Mechanism Types- Type- and Dimension Synthesis of Mechanisms4. Presentation of Assignments5. Industrial Application of Mechanization and Mechanisms (Factory Visit)

Study Goals The student must be able to:1. describe the conceptual design process for systematic design

- perform requirement analysis and build function structure- derive physical phenomena necessary for achieving required function and combine different options to systematically developdifferent candidate solutions- compare different candidate solutions and choose the best solution2. describe the basic design process of mechanisms- calculate the performance of various kinds of mechanisms (such as four bar link, cam, gear pairs, etc.) with software packagesfor mechanisms design- determine the dimensions and other design parameters of a mechanism3. employ these design methods for a real industrial problem in a teamwork environment- perform the design task at the both conceptual and basic design levels in a team- present their design in drawings or as a CAD model

Education Method Project: Students will be divided into groups of 4 to 5 students and each group is given its assignment.

At every lecture, in principle, first half of lecture hours is used for presenting students homework and the other for instructions.During presentation of homework, students are expected to participate in discussions actively.

Computer Use Use of dedicated PC software. Software programs will become available for downloading from the blackboard.


Materials

Lecture notes wb5414 (in Dutch available from the blackboard).

Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J., Grote, K.-H: Engineering Design, A Systematic Approach (Third Edition), Translated by K.Wallace and L. Blessing, Springer, London, ISBN: 978-1-84628-318-5, (2007). Available from TU Delft Library as an e-book.Other appropriate literature and software programs will be specified during the lectures and uploaded to the Blackboard.

Books Lecture notes wb5414 (in Dutch available from the blackboard).Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J., Grote, K.-H: Engineering Design, A Systematic Approach (Third Edition), Translated by K.Wallace and L. Blessing, Springer, London, ISBN: 978-1-84628-318-5, (2007). Available from TU Delft Library as an e-book.

Assessment Attendance (compulsory) including a factory visit scheduled at the end of the semester or the beginning of 2A: if you are absenttwice, the end of the story.

Written reports (intermediate and final).

Final presentation (taking place during the exam period).

Enrolment / Application Since this course involves team working, good command of English is required. In particular, foreign students should make surethat their English level is high enough for intensive communication with teachers and other students.

While any specific knowledge about machine design is not required, it is desirable that students have some experiences of machine design (such as BSc mechanical engineering design courses and projects).

Remarks During the course, a real industrial design case will be assigned to a group of students. Attendance is obligatory, including afactory visit planned at the end of the lecture.The project has two parts, conceptual design (largely following the Pahl & Beitz method) and mechanisms design (using variousanalysis and synthesis software).


Design Content Design of industrial machinery for discrete production (mechanization). Design aspects: technical and economical demands,conceptual design, finding mechanisms to perform the required motions (synthesis), analysis and evaluation of solutions.


of 186



WB5430-05 Engineering Informatics 3



0/4/0/0

Education Period 2

Start Education 2

Exam Period 2


Required for Machine Intelligence (Wb 5435-05)

Expected prior knowledge Computer programming coursesCourse Contents The aims of this course are twofold. One is to give fundamental knowledge about computer systems including both hardware and

software. The other is to give theoretical foundations behind computer-based engineering tools and systems which play anincreasingly important role in mechanical engineering.

The course comprises of lectures in a classroom and practices in the form of homework. It emphasizes homework (mostlyprogramming) that will be included in the final evaluation. While no preference is given to a particular programming language,basic programming capabilities are needed.

Topics:1. Fundamental Logic and the Definition of Engineering Tasks2. Fundamentals of Semiconductors and Logic Gates3. Fundamentals of Computer Architecture4. Fundamentals of Operating Systems5. Data Representation and Data Structures6. Numerical Computation and Computational Errors7. Computational Complexity8. Object Representation and Reasoning

9. Databases Concepts10. Constraint-based Problem Solving11. Optimization and Search12. Discrete Event Simulation13. Geometric Modeling and CAD14. Industrial Engineering Information Systems (PDM, ERP, SCM, LCM)

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.describe fundamental principles of computers systems including both hardware and software-illustrate mechanisms for digital computers-explain software architecture and its working principles-illustrate data representation methods and data structure-analyze computational errors and computational complexity2.describe theoretical foundations of modeling and computing behind computer-based engineering tools-explain such data modeling principles as object oriented representation and programming, relational data model, and entity-relationship data model-explain an appropriate computing algorithm for constraint-based problem solving, optimization, search, and discrete eventsimulation-explain fundamentals of geometric modeling

-illustrate architecture and functionalities of industrial engineering information systems such as PDM (Product Data Modeling),ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning), SCM (Supply Chain Management), and LCM (Life Cycle Modeling)

Education Method Lectures (4 hours per week) plus regular homework assignments (around ten homeworks, individual work), final-homeworks(three final-homeworks, individual and creative self implementation of the techniques in programming enviroenments).

Computer Use Access to a programming environment (any language of your choice, such as C++, C, Visual Basic, Java, MATLAB, etc.) isnecessary.


Benny Raphael, Ian F. C. Smith, Fundamentals of Computer Aided Engineering, ISBN: 0-471-48715-5, (2003), Wiley & Sons.

Assessment Assessment will be based on the three final-homework assignments and regular homework assigments.

In order to pass this course, students have to submit all homework assignments as well as the final ones. (If you miss one, youdon't pass.) In case a student did not pass in the previous year, he/she needs to re-submit all homework assignments and finalones on time even if questions are the same. There is no automatic carry-over of grades from previous years.

Homework assignments (around ten homeworks, individual work), around 30%.

Final-homework (three final-homeworks, individual and creative self implementation of the techniques in programmingenvironment), around 70%.

The ratio is variable year to year.

The students will need on average and approximately ten hours per final-homework and two hours per homework. The final-homeworks will test the practical and creative capabilities of implementation on computer; the homeworks will test thetheoretical knowledge.

Remarks


Design Content Although the course does not directly aim at "design of software", it will nonetheless include principles of building engineeringapplications.

Department 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering

of 186



WB5431-05 Life Cycle Engineering 3



0/0/0/4

Education Period 4

Start Education 4

Exam Period 4


Course Contents This course deals with fundamentals and technology of life cycle engineering that require a systematic and holistic approaches to

product life cycles, rather than just end-of-pipe technologies.First, we will discuss the fundamental concepts of life cycle engineering, in particular, the relationships among environment,design, manufacturing, and economy. Second, we will look at details of life cycle stages including marketing, design,production, logistics, operation (use), maintenance, recovery, reuse, remanufacturing, and recycling. Third, we will discuss themotivation behind life cycle engineering and its philosophy. We will understand that in particular design has a big influence onany other aspect of product life cycle. Fourth, we will particularly highlight maintenance and remanufacturing. Fifth, we willlook at design methodologies (Design for Environment) as a technology.Homeworks and excersises are important part of evaluation.

Contents1. Introduction2. Environment, Design, Manufacturing and Economy3. Basic Concepts4. Product Life Cycle Stages5. Business and Environment

LCA, Tools (SCM, Green Purchase, ISO 14000 Series, Benchmarking)6. DfX (Design for X), DfE (Design for Environment)7. Maintenance and Self-Maintenance8. Recycling

9. Remanufacturing and Reuse10. Life Cycle Simulation and Life Cycle Design11. Service Engineering and Product-Service Systems12. Summary

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.describe fundamental principles and philosophy toward a sustainable society from the viewpoint of manufacturing-explain the relationships among environment, design, manufacturing, and economy-classify and compare various strategies toward a sustainable society-explain various tools related to sustainability, such as LCA, Green Purchase, ISO 14000 series, etc.)2.identify the motivation and background philosophy of life cycle engineering3.illustrate details of product life cycle stages, including marketing, design, production, logistics, operation (use), maintenance,recovery, reuse, remanufacturing, and recycling-explain, among other things, the roles of design in a product life cycle-explain, among other things, the roles of maintenance in a product life cycle-explain, among other things, the roles of remanufacturing, reuse, and recycling in a product life cycle4.explain various methods of Design for Environment through concrete examples

Education Method Lectures (4 hours per week) including homework assignments (around 5) and a design for environment exercise (group work).

Literature and StudyMaterials Powerpoint presentations. A copy of the presentaiton will be available through the Blackboard.Any other handouts.

Recommended Book: T.E. Graedel and B.R. Allenby: Industrial Ecology (2nd Edition), Pearson Education, Inc., New Jearsey(2003), ISBN 0-13-046713-8 (58 at Amazon)

Assessment Assessment includes three components.

1. Homework (individual, around 20%): Students need to submit all homework assignments on time. If you did not pass inprevious years, you still need to re-submit homework assignments. If the question is the same, you can resubmit your oldassignments.

2. Design for Environment exercise (group work, around 20%): Students will be given a DfE task and will need to present duringthe lecture and to submit a mini report.

3. Final exams (individual, around 60%): Written/Oral exams.



Design Content A large portion of the course deals with sustainability issues in design.Department 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering

3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering

of 186



WB5435-05 Machine Intelligence 3



0/0/4/0

Education Period 3

Start Education 3

Exam Period 3


Expected prior knowledge Computer programming courses

Engineering Informatics (Wb5430-05), not a must but recommended

Course Contents This course firstly gives an introduction to computational aspects of intelligent systems, in particular, artificial intelligence,logic, and knowledge based systems. These techniques form symbolic computing techniques for advanced reasoning andembedded intelligence. Secondly, the course discusses some soft computing techniques that have been hinted or inspired by dailylanguge, biological phenomena or physical phenomena, such as fuzzy logic, genetic algorithm, artificial neural networks, andsimulated annealing. Thirdly, the course illustrates some techniques for intelligent systems to deal with real world applications.The course will not only describe the theoretical aspects but also demonstrate the applications of these technique to intelligentsystems and engineering.

Topics1. Fundamental Theories and Techniques1.1. Artificial Intelligence, Pattern Recognition, and Robotics1.2. Logic1.3. Knowledge Representation1.4. Fundamental Reasoning Techniques1.5. Knowledge Based Systems

2. Soft Computing and Bio-Inspired Computing2.1. Fuzzy Logic2.2. Genetic Algorithm2.3. Simulated Annealing2.4. Artificial Neural Networks

3. Intelligent Systems3.1. Model-based Reasoning and Qualitative Physics3.2. Machine Learning3.3. Self-Organization and Emergence

Study Goals The student must be able to:1.describe fundamental logical computing techniques and soft computing techniques-explain principles of logic, knowledge representation techniques, and reasoning algorithms-explain principles of fuzzy logic, genetic algorithm, simulated annealing, and artificial neural networks2.describe fundamental mechanisms and architecture of reasoning systems and embedded intelligence-explain mechanisms and architecture of knowledge based systems, model-based reasoning systems, machine learning systems-explain mechanisms of self-organization and emergent systems3.implement intelligent systems using these techniques to deal with real world applications-compare different computing techniques-select an appropriate method for the application, based on the comparison-compose an algorithm for the chosen method-demonstrate the algorithm in some way (not necessarily in the form of programs)

Education Method Lectures (4 hours per week), homework assignments (around six homeworks, individual and self implementation of thetechniques in programming enviroenments).


1) Negnevitsky, Michael (2005), Artificial Intelligence - A Guide to Intelligent Systems, Harlow: Addissson - Wesley, England,2nd. Edition. [Available in TU Delft Libraray, in the section of "Studioboeken", ISBN: 0-321-20466-2 .]

2) Raphael, B. and Smith, I.F.C., (2003), Fundamentals of Computer Aided Engineering, John Wiley and Sons inc., Corwall,great Britain. [Available in TU Delft Library, ISBN: 0-471-48715-5, is included in the standard VSSD collection. Seehttp://www.vssd.nl/winkel/studieboeken.html for more info. The price is Euro 58,00.]

3) Mitchell, Tom. M. (1997), Machine Learning, McGraw Hill International Editions, Singapore. [Available in TU Delft Library,ISBN: 0-07-042807-7.]

Handouts.Other references will be specified during the course or obtainable from the blackboard.

Prerequisites Computer programming courses and familiarity with MATLAB. Engineering Informatics (Wb5430-05) is not a must butstrongly recommended. Any lectures on Artificial Intelligence can help you, but there could be inevitable overlaps.

Assessment Assessment will be based on the final exam and homework.

In order to pass this course, students have to submit all homework assignments. (If you miss one, you don't pass.) In case astudent did not pass in the previous year, he/she needs to re-submit all homework assignments and final ones on time even if questions are the same. There is no automatic carry-over of grades from previous years.

Homework assignments (around ten homeworks, individual work), around 40%. If you submit homework reports with yourfriend, you will get a total score divided by the number of students involved.

Final exam, around 60%.Final exam questions will not be published in the blackboard, because basically homework assignments are hints. During thelectures, exam questions can be suggested.


The students will need on average and approximately four hours per homework. The exam will test the theoretical knowledgeand analytical capabilities; the homeworks will test the practical capabilities of implementation on computer.


Design Content The course helps to understand how to design "intelligent systems."

Department 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering

of 186



WB5451-05 Student colloquia and events PME 1

Responsible Instructor Ir. J.J.L. Neve


1/1/1/1

Education Period 1234

Start Education 1

Exam Period none

Course Language EnglishRequired for Mandatory for all students doing the ME track PME

Course Contents Presentations by PME students about their research assignments, followed by an academic discussion.

Presentations are held throughout the year.

Study Goals The student:- is able to communicate verbally about research and solutions to problems with colleagues, non-colleagues and other involvedparties in the English language.- is able to generate a well-structured multi-media presentation to colleagues, non-colleagues and other involved parties in theEnglish language.- is able to take part in an academic dispute.

Education Method Presentations and mini-lectures. Learning by example. Academic discussions.


Optional.The student might benefit from literature on preparing multi-media presentations and on presentation skills.

Assessment Students have to present a research topic, in which they have contributed and attend at least 20 presentations by fellow PME

students and selected guestspeakers.Department 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering

of 186



WBP202 Haptic Experiment Design 4

Responsible Instructor Dr. J.J. van den Dobbelsteen

Instructor Dr.ir. D.A. Abbink

Instructor A.J. Knulst

Instructor Ir. D.J. van Gerwen


0/x/0/x

Education Period 24

Start Education 24



Expected prior knowledge Admission to MSc phase

Summary Haptics, master-slave, control, manipulator, psychophysics, human-machine interaction

Course Contents In this course, students carry out self-contained projects which contribute to the realization of haptic (force-feedback) interfacesfor medical or automotive applications.

Key in this course is that students, in groups of two, identify their individual assignment themselves. You (together with yourteam partner) will select and define a sub-project that will contribute to solve a part of the very complex problems encountered inabove-mentioned research fields. You will set up your own experiment and investigate how users respond to your experimentalmanipulations and from that you should be able to draw conclusions that are relevant for the development of a haptic interfacefor automotive or medical applications (e.g. feedback or control requirements).

Different experimental set-ups are available, including FCS Haptic Master, Omega, Phantom, Falcon Novint, Steering wheels

and custom made haptic devices. Often other hardware needs to be build for specific experiments.Study Goals The student must be able to:

1Formulate a self-contained subproject within the framework of a given long-term research project in the field of haptics.Get acquainted with background knowledge on the research subject.Identify a subproject that has sufficient profundity and that can be completed in the allotted time.Formulate the Research Questions or Objectives without reference to methods or solutions.2Execute the self-defined subproject.Select and apply appropriate Research Methods.generate a variety of Research Questions.Select the most appropriate Research Question.Create an Experimental Platform.Use suitable methods to analyse the data.Present the results in a concise report and podium presentation.Self-reflect on intended and actual project outcome.

Education Method Students preferably work in groups of two. They acquire basic knowledge through self-study, guided by instructors.Subsequently, they define a project that fits in the overall project that is (a) sufficiently profound, and (b) doable in the allottedtime. Finally they execute this self-defined project and conclude with a presentation and a brief report.The underlying educational idea is that students not only familiarize themselves in a subject that is new to them but also obtain

hands-on experience in handling big projects by subdividing them into multiple smaller ones. This experience is useful in theirgraduation project and future profession.

Computer Use Depending on individual project between 20 and 80%


Course material: Blackboard

References from literature:Depending on individual assignment, Reports from previous students, materials in 'Course Documents' folder in Blackboard.

Assessment 1. About one page containing self-defined project (background, problem statement, research objective, limitations, relevance tooverall project) and planning.2. Intermediate progress presentation.3. Final presentation (10-15 mins).4. Written report (around 4 pages, two-column scientific paper format).

Remarks The course incorporates a fair amount of self-reliance, and is intended to be Self-Developing in two senses. Firstly, this termemphasizes the responsibility of the students to acquire the appropriate knowledge. Secondly, it indicates that students do notexecute predefined yearly repetitive projects but rather define and execute small, not previously conducted research projectswithin the framework of the innovative overall projects. Thus, the course aims to bridge the gap between regular courses and thegraduation project. Meanwhile, the students efforts add up to the completion of major research projects.


Design Content Students will be familiarized with the following aspects, all of which are important for the design of the haptic systems:specification of demands, conceptual design, optimization for the human operator, kinematics, dynamics, control (master-slave),identification, modelling, biomechanics, psychophysics. Every student group specializes in one or more of these for their self-defined assignment.


of 186



Dr.ir. A. Abate

Dr.ir. D.A. Abbink

B. AdouaneDr.ir. I. Apachitei

Dr. P.V. Aravind

Prof.dr. R. Babuska

Prof.dr. H.L.M. Bakker

Dr.ir. A. van Beek

T. van BeekProf.dr.ir. H. Bijl

Ir. A.A. van der Bles

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Hybrid & Distributed Sys&Con

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85606Room E-4-190


Room -

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Biomechatronics & Biorobotics

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82077Room F-1-010

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment BioMaterialen

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82276Room F-2-320

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Energy Technology

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83550Room 1-430

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Intelligent Control & Robotics

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85117Room E-3-330

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Process & Energy

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86687Room 1-030

Unit Techniek, Bestuur & ManagementDepartment Tech Strat & Ondernemersch

Room -

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Mechatronic Systems Design

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86984Room G-1-460

Unit Luchtvaart- & RuimtevaarttechnDepartment Dean

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85373Room NB 1.47.1

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Ship Design, Prod & Operations

Room D-1-160

of 186



Prof.dr.ir. B.J. Boersma

Dr.ir. X.J.A. Bombois

Dr.ir. A.J.J. van den Boom

Prof.dr. R. Boom

Ir. W. van den Bos

Nabestaanden van O.H. Bosgra

Ir. T.N. Bosman

Dr. A.J. Bottger

Dr.ir. P. Breedveld

Prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 87979Room 1-250

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Model-based Measurem & Contr

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85150Room E-2-270


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 84052Room E-3-240

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Metals Proc.Micr. & Prop

Room H-2-190

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Transport Eng & Logistics

Room B-1-250

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Support Delft Cent Syst & Cont

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85610Room E-2-300

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Ship Hydromech & Structures

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85923Room D-1-330

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Surface & Interface Eng.

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82243Room H-4-210

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Medical Instruments

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85232Room -

Unit Luchtvaart- & RuimtevaarttechnDepartment Flight Perform. & Propulsion

Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82179Room 1-03

Unit Luchtvaart- & RuimtevaarttechnDepartment System Eng & Aircraft Design

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83833

of 186



Dr.ir. P. Colonna

Dr. M. Corno

Prof.dr. J. Dankelman

Prof.dr.ir. B.H.K. De Schutter

Dr.ir. A.J. den Dekker

Ir. N.F.B. Diepeveen

Prof.dr. J. Dik

Dr. J.J. van den Dobbelsteen

Dr. D. Dodou

Room NB 2.52


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82172Room 1-050

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Engineering Dynamics

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85242Room E-4-170


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85565Room E-1-330


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85113Room E-2-280

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Systems and Control

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81823Room E-2-260


Room -

Unit Civiele Techniek & GeowetenschDepartment Offshore Technologie

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 88030Room HG 2.84



Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Virtual Mat. & Mech.

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 89571Room H-4-270


Room -


Room F-2-080

of 186



Dr.ir. W.D. van Driel

Ir. M.B. Duinkerken

Dr. J. Duszczyk

Dr.ir. A.C. van der Eijk

Prof.dr.ir. J. van Eijk

Dr.ir. G.E. Elsinga

Prof.dr.ir. L.J. Ernst

P. Estevez Castillo

Unit Elektrotechn., Wisk. & Inform.Department Elektr Compon Techn & Mat

Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81790Room B-1-260

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment 3mE General

Room -

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment 3mE General

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82218Room 8D-3-25-K


Telephone +31 (0)15 2784223Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 84223Room 8C-0-26-V


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85396Room 4B-1-29

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Fluid Mechanics

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 88179Room F-1-470

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment 3mE Algemeen

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86519Room G-1-390

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Fundamentals of Microsystems

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86519Room 4B-1-33


Room -


of 186



Dr.ir. E.L. Fratila-Apachitei

Ir. J.W. Frouws

Ir. N. Geerlofs

Ir. D.J. van Gerwen

Prof.dr.ir. C.A. Grimbergen

Nabestaanden van H.T. Grimmelius

Drs. N.C.F. Groot

Prof.dr.ir. M.A. Gutierrez De La Merced

Dr.ir. R. Happee

Dr.ir. R.G. Hekkenberg

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86428Room 5A-1-03

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment BioMaterialen

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 89083Room E-1-300


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86606Room D-1-190

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Metals Proc.Micr. & Prop.

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 84920Room J-0-310


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86574Room F-0-200


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83607Room F-1-080


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82746Room D-1-220


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81610Room G-1-320


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83213Room F-1-140


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83117Room D-1-180

of 186



Prof.dr.ir. J. Hellendoorn

Prof.dr. F.C.T. van der Helm

Dr.ir. J.L. Herder

Dr.ir. M.J.M. Hermans

Dr. P.S.C. Heuberger

Prof.dr.ir. E.G.M. Holweg

Prof.ir. J.J. Hopman

Dr.ir. J.H. ter Horst

Ir. A.E.M. Huesman


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 89007Room E-2-220


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85616Room E-1-340


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 84713Room G-1-440


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82286Room H-1-300


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85331Room 8C-3-08


Room -


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 89007Room 8C-2-12


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85605Room D-1-240

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Intensified Reaction and Separ

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86661Room 1-070

Unit Technische NatuurwetenschappenDepartment ChemE/Algemeen

Room -

of 186



Prof.dr.ir. R.H.M. Huijsmans

Dr.ir. C.A. Infante Ferreira

Dr. L.C.M. Itard

Dr.ir. K.M.B. Jansen

Prof.dr. G.C.A.M. Janssen

Dr.ir. M. Janssen

Dr.ing. D. Jeltsema

X. Jiang

Dr.ir. P. de Jong

Dr.ir. W. de Jong

Prof.dr.ir. P.P. Jonker


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83598Room D-1-300

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Engineering Thermodynamics

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 84894Room 1-010

Unit Onderzoeksinstituut OTBDepartment Duurzame Woningkwaliteit

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86341Room c3.260

Unit Industrieel OntwerpenDepartment Product Engineering

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86905Room B-3-070

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Micro and Nano Engineering

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81684Room G-1-320


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85866

Room H-1-230

Unit Elektrotechn., Wisk. & Inform.Department Mathematische Fysica

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 89277Room HB 05.280


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 88511Room D-1-420


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83876Room D-0-320


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 89476Room 1-030

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Vision Based Robotics

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82561Room E-0-340

of 186



Prof.dr.ir. M.L. Kaminski

Prof.dr.ir. L.A.I. Kestens

Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen

Dr.ir. J.A. Keuning

T. Keviczky

D. de Klerk

Ir. A. Klomp

A.J. Knulst

Dr.ir. H.J. de Koning Gans

H.J.M. Kramer


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 89250Room D-1-360


Room H-3-260

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Struc Optimization & Mechanics

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86515Room G-1-430


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81897Room D-0-260


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82928Room E-2-310


Room G-1-200


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85625Room E-1-250


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85625Room 8C-1-07


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81852Room D-1-340


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85593Room 1-130

of 186



Ing. C. Kwakernaak

Dr.ir. M. Langelaar

Prof.dr.ir. G. Lodewijks

Dr.ir. T.W. de Loos

H. MeersmanDr.ir. S.A. Miedema

Dr.ir. J.M.C. Mol

Prof.dr.ir. F. Molenkamp

Prof.ir. R.H. Munnig Schmidt

Ir. P. Naaijen

Ir. J.J.L. Neve

Dr.ir. L. Nicola


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82223Room J-1-420


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86506Room G-1-300


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 88793Room B-1-340

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Engineering Thermodynamics

Room -

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Offshore & Dredging Eng

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 88359Room D-1-310


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86778Room H-2-260

Unit Civiele Techniek & GeowetenschDepartment Geo-engineering

Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86663Room G-1-465


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81570Room D-0-360


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86581Room G-1-290


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 88806Room H-4-320

of 186



Dr.ir. S.E. Offerman

Z. Olujic

Ir. J.P. Oostveen

Dr.ir. R.A.J. van Ostayen

Dr.ir. J.A. Ottjes

Dr.ir. R.H. Petrov

Prof.dr. S.J. Picken

Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg

Dr.ir. C. Poelma


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82198Room H-3-280


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86674Room 1-150


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85423Room KG 00.480


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85423Room KG 00.480


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81647Room G-1-460


Room B-1-320


Room B-1-320


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 84318Room 8B-1-09-K


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85194Room H-3-260

Unit Technische NatuurwetenschappenDepartment ChemE/Advanced Soft Matter

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86946Room 0.027


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85615

Room F-1-340


of 186



Dr.ir. M.J.B.M. Pourquie

Ir. J.F.J. Pruyn

Ir. P.C.J. van Rens

Prof.dr.ir. C. van Rhee

Prof.dr. I.M. Richardson

Prof.ir. J.C. Rijsenbrij

Prof. D.J. Rixen

Ir. M.G. van de Ruijtenbeek

Dr.ing. A. Schiele

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82620Room F-1-470


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82997Room F-1-600


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86840Room D-1-120


Room -


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83973Room D-1-370


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85086Room H-1-260


Room B-1-240


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81523Room G-1-455

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Precision & Microsystems Eng

Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81278Room G-1-180


Room -

of 186



Dr.ir. D.L. Schott

Dr.ir. A.C. Schouten

Dr.ir. A.L. Schwab

Prof.dr.ir. J. Sietsma

Dr.ir. W.G. Sloof

Dr. M.H.F. Sluiter

F.G.M. SmeeleProf.dr.ir. A.I. Stankiewicz

Prof.ir. D. Stapersma

E.F.L. Stok


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83130Room B-1-240

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng

Department Biomechatronics & BioroboticsTelephone +31 (0)15 27 85247Room F-1-240


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82701Room G-1-370


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82284Room H-3-300


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 84924Room H-4-260


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 84922Room H-4-230


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82147Room 1-290


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83051Room D-1-230


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83051Room D-1-230

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Support Marine &Transport Tech

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86839Room D-1-290

of 186



E. Stroo-Moredo

Dr.ir. A.M. Talmon

Prof.dr.ir. T.J.C. van Terwisga

Prof.dr. B.J. Thijsse

Dr.ir. M. Tichem

R.H. van Till

Ir. G. Tol

Dr. T. Tomiyama

Dipl.ing. C. Trapp


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86930Room D-1-100


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83717Room D-1-440


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86860Room D-1-340


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82221Room H-4-190


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81603Room G-1-360


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86564

Room D-1-150

Unit ExternenregistratieDepartment Ampelmann Operations

Room -


Room -


Telephone +31 (0) 15 27 89250Room 7-1-132

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Intelligent Mechanical Systems

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81021Room F-2-120


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81021Room F-2-120


Room -

of 186



Dr.ir. G.J.M. Tuijthof

E.H.M. Ulijn

Ir. A.J. Valkenberg

Prof.dr.ir. E.R. Valstar

Prof.dr.ir. P.M.J. Van den Hof

E. VandevoordeDr.ir. H.P.M. Veeke

Ir. M.L. Verbist

Prof.dr.ir. M.H.G. Verhaegen

C. VerheulProf.dr.ir. A.H.M. Verkooijen


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86780Room F-1-360


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81503Room D-1-170


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85343Room 8B-1-07-K


Room -


Room -

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Model-based Measurem & Contr

Room -

Unit Technische NatuurwetenschappenDepartment IST/Algemeen

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 84509Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82706Room B-1-270


Department Energy TechnologyRoom -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 87428Room 0-37


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85204Room E-2-330


of 186



Ir. W.P.J. Visser

Dr.ir. E. de Vlugt

P. de Vos

Ir. E.J.H. de Vries

Ir. W.E. De Vries

Ing. J.C. van der Wagt

Prof.dr.ir. J. Wardenier

Dr.ir. A.J.J. van der WeidenProf.dr.ir. H.H. Weinans

Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86822Room 1-390


Room -


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85247Room F-1-240


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81040Room D-1-140


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86980Room G-1-420


Room -




Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 87430Room 7-1-105

Unit Civiele Techniek & GeowetenschDepartment Gebouwen en Civieltech Constr

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 85072Room S2 2.58


Room -

of 186



Ir. J.H. Welink

Prof.dr.ir. J. Westerweel

Prof.dr.ir. P.A. Wieringa

Ir. A.M. van Wijngaarden

Prof. C.A. Willemse

Dr.ir. J.W. van Wingerden

Dr.ir. J.C.F. de Winter

Dr.ir. M. Wisse

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Biomechanical Engineering

Room -

Unit ExternenregistratieDepartment Delft Projectmanagement

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 89205Room H-3-210

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Support Materials Science &Eng

Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86887Room F-1-580

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Medical InstrumentsTelephone +31 (0)15 27 89093Room E-1-330

Unit UniversiteitsdienstDepartment Protocollaire Zaken

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86441Room 00.[230]


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 87643Room 7-1-139

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Support 3mE

Room D-1-360


Room -


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 81720Room E-3-320


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86794Room F-2-100


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 86834

of 186



Prof.dr. J.H.W. de Wit

Prof.dr. G.J. Witkamp

J.A. Woelders-van der BurgDr.ir. P.T.L.M. van Woerkom

Dr. Y. Yang

Room E-1-240


Telephone +31 (0)15 27 82196Room H-2-240

Unit Technische NatuurwetenschappenDepartment BT/Milieubiotechnologie

Telephone +31 (0)15 27 83602Room 0.830


Room G-1-420


Department Engineering DynamicsRoom -

Unit Mech, Maritime & Materials EngDepartment Metals Proc Micr & Prop

3mE Keuzevakken 2010 En

Documents

Transcript of 3mE Keuzevakken 2010 En